370 (4)
· Video:
· The OSI Model https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HEEnLZV2wGI
· TCPIP & OSI Model https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=e5DEVa9eSN0
· WANs https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fCxfp1iUbqw
· MANs and WANs https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=P4wshpM_Ktk
· What is Cloud Computing? https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=arVoQxjIxUU
· Cybersecurity https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=n25L89E-lfY
· An Overview of Network Security https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ndmYTAqV9eE
Chapter 6: Fundamentals of Data Communications
OVERVIEW
A favorite subject for cartoonists used to be the mechanical man. Next came the electronic computer or mechanical brain that could solve extremely complicated problems with lightning quickness. Last year the Bell System demonstrated a service that may give the artists a new inspiration—a device that lets machines "talk" over telephone lines to other machines. Known as the Dataphone service, this arrangement lets customers send up to 800 words a minute over telephone lines from a business machine to another machine, or machines, throughout the country. Any type of information that can be recorded on tapes or cards may be transmitted…. The new system is about ten times faster than previous methods [telex and TWX] and will be a great help to businesses that send large amounts of business information.
Telephone Almanac, Bell Telephone System, 1959
Electronic data communications was born in 1844 with the transmission of the first telegraph message, "What hath God wrought?" sent by Samuel F.B. Morse in 1844. Development of telegraph networks was fastest in the United States. At the beginning of 1846, the only working line was Morse's experimental line, running 40 miles between Washington, D.C., and Baltimore, Maryland. In 1848, there were approximately 2000 miles of telegraph lines. The first commercial telegraph service began in 1849 between New York, New York, and Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. In 1850, there were over 12,000 miles of line operated by 20 different companies offering commercial telegraph service [1]. Western Union dates to 1851 through its predecessor, the Mississippi Valley Printing Telegraph Company, which became the Western Union Telegraph Company in 1856 through a series of acquisitions. As telegraphs were manually operated, telegraph services were labor intensive and expensive. Telegraph services also were regional in nature and interconnection, if any, of the regional networks involved a manual process. A telegraph operator would have to receive the telegram transmission over one network, write it down, and rekey it into the next network. The Pony Express began service in April 1860 with the promise that it could deliver a letter from St. Louis, Missouri, to Sacramento, California, in 10 days or less. Eighteen months later, the Western Union transcontinental tele-graph network was completed and the Pony Express was decommissioned shortly thereafter. The first telephone networks appeared in 1877 and soon replaced tele-graphy as the primary means of electronic communications. Long-distance voice telephone service became so inexpensive in the 1970s and 1980s that the use of telegrams declined precipitously, never to recover. Telegraphy died a slow death, however. Western Union sent its final telegram on January 27, 2006, after 150 years in the business. At its peak in 1929, Western Union sent some 200 million telegrams. In 2005, it sent about 20,000. According to MSNBC, "the last 10 telegrams included birthday wishes, condolences on the death of a loved one, notification of an emergency, and several people trying to be the last to send a telegram" [2]. That's a far cry from "What hath God wrought?" Western Union introduced teletypewriter service in 1923 so that companies could link branches and even join other companies in private text messaging over leased private-line networks. (Note: The terms teletype, teletypewriter, and telewriter are used interchangeably.) Beginning in about 1935, telegraph companies began to use telex (teletypewriter ex change), a rotary dialing system much like that used in telephone networks. Telex was an effective means of routing telegraph calls, and it ran at the amazing signaling speed of 45.5 bps and, later, at 50 bps, or approximately 66 words per minute (wpm). At that low signaling rate, one analog voice-grade channel could support 24 or 25 telex transmissions through Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM). In 1958, Western Union introduced its Telex service, a direct-dial consumer-to-consumer teleprinter service. Initially, consumers could direct dial numbers only in the United States, Canada, and Mexico; operator assistance was required for dialing to other countries. In 1930, AT&T released its TWX (TeletypeWriter eXchange, and pronounced "twix") service, a high-speed telex service that ran at the blazing speed of 75 bps and later 150 bps [3]. Western Union operated the TWX service in the United States for many years until AT&T acquired Western Union's Telex network in 1990, which then reached over 190 countries. Altogether, telex services eventually reached some 3.5 million machines, by some estimates. Telex was, at one time, undoubtedly the most heavily used textual telecommunication system in the business world. Lest you dismiss this bit of history as relating only to simple times and primitive technologies, you should take note of the fact that telegraphy was considered quite complex at the time and that telegraphers were in great demand. Dodge's Institute of Telegraphy (Valparaiso, Indiana) claimed to be "the most completely equipped school in the world and the only institution in which a student can become entirely quali-fied for a position" (as a telegraph operator). The institute was "endorsed by Officials of the Western Union Telegraph Company. Situations secured for graduates. Demand for operators greatest in the history of the telegraph. We have for some time been unable to fill demand made upon us for qualified students," or so read the advertisement in 1903. Training was on site. "The cost of a six month's course, including tuition (telegraphy and typewriting), table board and furnished room need not exceed $ 87" [4]. This is reminiscent of the advertisements by schools teaching courses for certified network administrators and systems engineers only a few years ago, although the classes did not last quite six months and room and board was not included in the tuition. Those advertisements will seem equally quaint and amusing 100 years from now. (They are certainly not that amusing today, at least not to many certified network administrators and systems engineers who have switched careers for lack of work.) Telex service is still in use, largely in developing countries. TeleTYpewriter (TTY) service, also known as Telecommunications Device for the Deaf (TDD) in the United States, textphone in Europe, and minicom in the United Kingdom, is heavily used by those with hearing or speech impairments.
Many of the early chapters of this book have explored the world of voice communications. During that exploration, it became clear that many of the devices and circuits in the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) are digital in nature. In large part, the contemporary PSTN is a data network, transporting and switching voice data in digital format. After all, voice can be considered as the first in a long string of what, in a contemporary context, are considered to be data applications. This chapter introduces the basic concepts of the communications of computer data. Reflecting the reality of contemporary systems and networks, the balance of this book largely focuses on computer-to-computer data communications.
In order to comprehend the intricacy of contemporary data communications systems and networks, it is necessary to develop a solid understanding of certain basic concepts. These definitions and concepts extend across all technologies and service offerings, from the historical to the most contemporary. The historical is more than a footnote; it is important for purposes of understanding. Indeed, the contemporary and future networks are built on those fundamental concepts.
This chapter first addresses the concept of functional domains. I explain terminal equipment, communications equipment, and communication software and provide a detailed discussion of modems and DSUs/CSUs. I explore the concept of protocols at length, with discussion of basic protocol dimensions and issues. I also discuss computer network architectures, with emphasis on IBM's Systems Network Architecture (SNA) and the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) reference model. Finally, I pause to consider the importance of security in data systems and networks.
|
|
||
|
|
|
Chapter 6 - Fundamentals of Data Communications Telecommunications and Data Communications Handbookby Ray Horak John Wiley & Sons © 2007 Citation
Recommend? |
|
|
|||||
|
|
|
|
6.1 FUNCTIONAL DOMAINS
Functional domains comprise the spheres of influence exerted by the various network elements that perform specific tasks in a data network. Data terminal equipment, data communications equipment, communications software, switches, and transmission facilities all are physical elements of such a network, with each performing specific functions and all supported by a signaling and control system. Since the general nature and specifics of both circuit switches and signaling systems are explored in Chapters 1 and 5, I will not repeat those discussions here. Please seek out the discussions in those earlier chapters for more information on those topics.
6.1.1 Data Terminal Equipment
The data equivalent of Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) in the voice world, Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) comprises the computer transmit and receive equipment. DTE includes a wide variety of dumb terminals, or terminals without embedded intelligence in the form of programmed logic. Dumb terminals (e.g., Hewlett-Packard HP2521P and Televideo 950) are devices that merely provide a user interface to a more capable host computer. Semi-intelligent terminals (e.g., IBM 317x and 327x) possess a limited amount of intelligence, enabling them to perform certain, limited processes, independent of the intelligence contained in the host computer. Intelligent terminals generally are in the form of Personal Computers (PCs) that are networked to a host computer. Such devices are highly capable hosts in their own right, although and in this context they often are linked across a network to an even more capable host. At the top of the terminal food chain are client workstations, highly intelligent and capable host computing devices that access a more capable server in a client/server environment. In such an operating environment, clients' requirements for access to files, applications, and network communications software are satisfied by one or more servers, which typically are accessed across a Local Area Network (LAN). As a result, the client workstation can perform certain appropriate functions (e.g., screen formatting) related to the specific user task at hand, while the servers' memory and processing power are dedicated to the performance of tasks such as file storage, database management, and security management that are accomplished more effectively on a centralized basis.
DTE also is in the form of host computers such as mainframes and midrange (mini) computers. Host computers, also known as host nodes, are highly capable devices with substantial processing power and storage memory. Hosts also, at least theoretically, are carefully administered to ensure that they operate successfully and reliably. Hosts also serve as highly effective information repositories, with the data backed up and archived on external storage media such as magnetic tapes and CD-ROMs or on networked storage devices such as RAID (Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks) systems. Note: In the DTE context, host computers and nodes are end-user endpoint (i.e., transmit and receive) equipment, rather that the various types of computer nodes that might be employed in networking capacity, such as the computers that run the IP protocol suite on the Internet.
Also note that the lines have blurred between categories of host computers. The PC on which I am writing this book is much more capable (and much less expensive) in many respects than was a typical mainframe only 15–20 years ago. Most of you would not even recognize a mainframe if you saw one. I would, but then I come from the days of heavy metal, when a forklift upgrade meant using a forklift to move out the old computer and move in the new one. The old one became a boat anchor or artificial reef. (This is true, except for the part about the boat anchor and artificial reef.)
6.1.2 Data Communications Equipment
Also known as Data Circuit Terminating Equipment (DCTE), Data Communications Equipment (DCE) is the equipment that interfaces the DTE to the network and resolves any issues of incompatibility between those domains in the process. Incompatibility issues can include digital versus analog, voltage level, signaling speed, and bit density. DCE includes modems, DSUs and CSUs, and Front-End Processors (FEPs), all of which I discuss in greater detail later in this chapter.
6.1.3 Communications Software
Communications software often is required and generally is embedded in the computer operating system; alternatively, it can take the form of a systems task under the control of the computer's operating system. The role of communications software is to assist the operating system in managing local and remote terminal access to host resources, to manage security, and to perform certain checkpoint activities. The remote terminals interface to the operating system access methods, which contain the specific code required to transfer data across the network channels between the devices. An example of an access method includes IBM's Virtual Telecommunications Access Method (VTAM).
Alternatively, commercial communications management software can control and manage access to the host. IBM's Customer Information Control System (CICS) is such a product. This software resolves contention issues between diverse applications without impacting programs or terminals. It handles polling, selection, and program interrupts, thereby ensuring minimum response time. It also resolves error conditions at both the data and line levels. Random-Access Memory (RAM) maintains CICS and other Terminate-and-Stay-Resident (TSR) software.
6.1.4 Networks
Networks provide the connections between computer resources in order to accommodate the flow of information. Networks support the logical transfer of data during a communications session through the establishment of paths, circuits, or channels over a physical medium. The network can be in the form of a Local Area Network (LAN), a Metropolitan Area Network (MAN), or a Wide Area Network (WAN). These networks support communications over areas of increasing geographic scope. Data LANs, MANs, and WANs, which I discuss in later chapters, also can be interconnected.
6.1.5 Switches
Developed in support of voice communications, circuit switches serve for the flexi-ble interconnection of circuits. Once the circuit is established, a circuit switch dedi-cates a communications path for the duration of the session in support of a data transmission that is presumed to be in the form of a continuous stream. Because of their ubiquity, Central Office (CO) circuit switches remain widely used in support of dial-up data communications for Internet access. With that exception, most data communications takes place over networks that variously employ packet, frame, and cell switches.
These switches are highly advanced computerized switching devices that have substantial capacity as well as the ability to share high-capacity transmission systems among large numbers of individual user transmissions. In capsule, such switches read the destination address of each packet, frame, or cell of data and forward it through the switch and across the network, perhaps on the basis of priority, in recognition of the underlying application being supported. As all network resources are highly shared, the network operates with much greater efficiency than does a network based on circuit switching, at least for bursty, low-volume data communications applications.
Switches make forwarding decisions independently, link by link, although their activities commonly are coordinated by higher level system. Routers are highly intelligent switches that are capable of making path selection decisions across a network, from end to end and in consideration of perhaps a wide range of factors such as priority, protocol, and underlying application. Routers also can operate at much higher levels than switches, as they can be equipped to accomplish protocol conversions, manage security, and so on. I discuss packet, frame, and cell switching and routing in detail in later chapters. (Note: A switch is beneath a router, and network purists will find my characterization of routers as highly intelligent switches to be offensive, even in a descriptive sense. I reckon they'll get over it, eventually.)
6.2 DCE: EXPANDED VIEW
While I discuss data networks and switches in considerable detail in other chapters, this chapter is a convenient and meaningful place to pause and explore the concept and detail of several types of data communications equipment. Specifically, I want to examine modems, codecs, terminal adapters, CSUs and DSUs, and FEPs.
6.2.1 Modems
Modems mo dulate and demodulate signals. In other words, they change the characteristics of the signal in some way. Modems, as discussed in this chapter, are of several basic types: line drivers, short-haul modems, and conventional PSTN modems. The term also is used to describe a wide variety of other devices such as ISDN Terminal Adapters (TAs), ADSL modems, and cable modems used in CATV networks, each of which I explore in subsequent chapters.
6.2.1.1 Line Drivers
Line drivers actually are interface converters, rather than modems in the classic sense. Line drivers extend the distance of a digital connection, within limits, by converting the digital signal to a low-voltage, low-impedance signal that can transmit more effectively and over longer distances on dedicated, specially conditioned twisted-pair circuits. The Recommended Standard (RS) 232 specification [more correctly known as Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) 232], for example, generally limits the distance between devices to 50 ft at transmission rates of 56 kbps. At lower speeds, line drivers can reshape the digital pulses to extend that distance considerably. At speeds of up to 9.6 kbps, for example, line drivers can extend that limitation to 500–5000 ft over Category 3 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP). Line drivers can support speeds up to 19.2 kbps over distances up to 10,000 ft over good-quality Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) or Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP). You can extend the distance further through cascading line drivers. Note: Line drivers are unidirectional and work over simplex circuits. Bidirectional communications requires separate sets of line drivers operating over separate twisted-pair circuits.
6.2.1.2 Short-Haul (Limited-Distance) Modems
Short-haul modems are used where line drivers fail in terms of either capacity or distance. Short-haul modems can work at distances between 5000 and 10,000 ft, with distance sensitive to signaling speed; that is, the higher the speed, the shorter the allowable distance. Also known as limited-distance modems, they usually are used for private-line and hardwired links but can operate over nonloaded local loop facilities.
6.2.1.3 Conventional Modems
Conventional modems allow digital devices to communicate across an analog circuit, accomplishing the digital-to-analog conversion in order to resolve that dimension of incompatibility between the DTE and the network. AT&T set the original de facto standards for modems with the introduction of the DataPhone service in 1959 [5, 6]. Currently, the ITU-T sets modem standards at an international level. Those standards fall into the V series, which includes all standards recommendations for data communications over the telephone network. The digital input to the modem is in the form of a baseband signal of varying electrical voltage levels that represent binary 1s and 0s. The output from the modem is a modulated analog carrier wave, which can be modulated in terms of its amplitude, frequency, phase, or some combination thereof. Through this process, the 1s and 0s of the data stream output by a digital computer can be sent over an analog voice network. While a network that is digital from end to end is preferred for reasons that include error performance and bandwidth, there often are analog components or links involved. In developed countries, of course, the core of the carrier network generally is fully digital in nature. In consideration of lower costs and greater availability, however, the local loop often is analog in residential and small-business applications. If the local loop is analog, the network is presented to the computer as analog. As the lowest common denominator rules, so to speak, the high-speed digital computer must adjust to the voice-grade analog local loop, and that is done through a modem.
It certainly is worth mentioning, and even emphasizing, that modems are unique in the wired world in terms of their portability, as modems work virtually anywhere. Contemporary road warriors largely would be lost without the advantage of modem access to the Internet from hotel rooms, airports, and client sites. While the modem speed may be constrained by the internal processes of an intermediate PBX, the device is absolutely indispensable for remote access to e-mail and other applications through the Internet and World Wide Web. In the United States and many other developed countries since 2000 or so, broadband access has become widely available in hotels, airports, coffee shops, and other public and private places through either hardwired or wireless Ethernet LANs. However, conventional modem access is an essential backup technique in the event that those options are not available. So, I travel with a conventional international modem (the modem standards are the same, but the physical and electrical connections vary from country to country), an Ethernet adapter, and a wireless Ethernet modem.
Now, I want to consider the way conventional modems work by using a simplified example. While researching this book through the Web, sending drafts to various editors and to my publisher, and otherwise fooling around, I sometimes used a modem connection while on the road. To set up the remote modem connection to my Internet Service Provider (ISP), I click an icon and the modem card I have inserted in my laptop computer "goes off-hook," gets an internal dial tone from the hotel PBX, and dials the telephone number of the local ISP in partnership with my ISP back home. [Note: Conventional modems can be external or internal. They also can take the form of a PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) card, which fits into a slot on a laptop computer. Also note that the PCMCIA card generally is abbreviated as PC card.] The dialed number is preceded by a dial access code of 9 or 0, depending on the PBX convention in that particular country. As instructed by the dial access code, the PBX sets up an outside line, draws the dial tone from the local CO and dials the number of the ISP. The ISP's modem answers, and the two modems pass a set of control signals back and forth in a process known as handshaking, to negotiate the basis on which the communication will be conducted. Specifically, each modem identifies itself and its capabilities to the other through a set of data organized into a frame. The modems pass the frames simultaneously, in full-duplex mode, with one using a relatively high range of frequencies and the other a relatively low range. Each modem knows exactly the format of the data bits and fields within the frame, as each is based on standards in the form of ITU-T Recommendations. The data are passed at the rate of 2400 baud, which is the maximum expected available baud rate, internationally, over an analog network. Referring back to Chapter 1, baud rate is defined as the number of signal events, or signal transitions, per second and bit rate is defined as the rate of information transfer. Also referring back to Chapter 1, the baud rate cannot exceed the bandwidth of the channel, which in this case is nominally 3000 Hz. So, the rate theoretically could be as high as 3000 baud, but that would be extremely optimistic and would leave no margin for error. So, 2400 baud has been established as a reasonable level of maximum expectation for a voice-grade local loop anywhere in the world. Assuming that everything is just right in the network (i.e., the analog local loops are in good condition and there are no issues of interference at the moment), the modems then start to pass data at 2400 baud over the analog local loops by modulating the sine waves.
Note that modem networks are balanced and symmetrical. In other words and as illustrated in Figure 6.1, there must be two modems, either standalone or in modem pools, and they each must be able to communicate on the same basis in order to establish a connection. Note also that the highest common denominator always rules. In other words and in this case, the more capable modem must adapt to the capabilities of the lesser, and both must adapt to the condition of the local loop circuit, the processes of any intermediate PBX, and so on. So, the modems fall back, as necessary, to adjust to the line conditions and other factors, until they find a baud rate and a bit rate that satisfy their performance requirements. In this scenario, the modems agree that the maximum of 2400 baud works well, so they proceed. Modems variously employ three basic modulation techniques: Amplitude Modulation (AM), Frequency Modulation (FM), and Phase Modulation (PM). More sophisticated techniques include Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) and Trellis-Coded Modulation (TCM). Remember that each baud can support multiple bits, which qualifies a modulation technique as a compression technique, and some of them are quite extreme.
Figure 6.1: Conventional modem communications across the PSTN
6.2.1.3.1 Amplitude Modulation
Also known as Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK), Amplitude Modulation (AM) involves the modulation of the amplitude (i.e., strength or voltage) of the analog carrier sine wave. The transmitting computer outputs a baseband signal, which is the digital transmission of electrical pulses, with 1 bits and 0 bits defined as discrete voltage levels. (Note: A baseband signal is a signal in its original form, without being altered in any way, whether by modulation or conversion.) Using a (single-bit) AM technique, each 1 bit entering the transmitting modem is expressed as a relatively high-amplitude sine wave, or series of sine waves. Each 0 bit is expressed as one or more low-amplitude sine waves, as illustrated in Figure 6.2. The high and low levels are defined in terms of a reference level or by the relative difference between the levels. At 2400 baud, this unibit technique yields a transmission rate of 2400 bps, with one bit transmitted per baud. Note: A bit has one of two possible values, a 1 or a 0. To express one bit with each baud, therefore, there must be 21 = 2 possible signal states.
Figure 6.2: Amplitude modulation: unibit
It is possible to express two bits with each baud by defining 22 = 4 possible signal states. In a dibit (two-bit) coding scheme using AM, for example, the lowest level of amplitude represents a 00 bit pattern, the next highest a 01 bit pattern, the next a 10, and the highest a 11, as illustrated in Figure 6.3. In this fashion, two bits are impressed on each baud. Thereby, the speed of data transmission is doubled at the same analog line speed; that is, at 2400 baud, the transmission rate is 4800 bps. Thereby, the connection time is halved, and the cost of transmission is halved, or at least is reduced considerably. Amplitude modulation rarely operates independently because it is highly sensitive to the impacts of attenuation and line noise.
Figure 6.3: Amplitude modulation: dibit
6.2.1.3.2 Frequency Modulation
Also known as Frequency Shift Keying (FSK), Frequency Modulation (FM) is the sole technique used in low-speed, Hayes-compatible modems. FSK involves the modulation of the frequency of the analog carrier sine waves (Figure 6.4). When no bits are transmitted, the carrier is at a reference frequency of 1700 Hz. A unibit FM technique impresses one bit on each baud by shifting the carrier to 2200 Hz when transmitting a 1 bit and to 1200 Hz when transmitting a 0 bit. At 2400 baud, therefore, the transmission rate is 2400 bps. The benefits of dibit transmission can be realized by defining four frequencies, with each sine wave or set of sine waves representing a two-bit pattern (00, 01, 10, and 11). Thereby, at 2400 baud, the transmission rate is 4800 bps.
Figure 6.4: Frequency modulation: unibit
6.2.1.3.3 Phase Modulation
Phase Modulation (PM), or Phase Shift Keying (PSK), involves the carefully synchronized shifting of the position of the sine wave (Figure 6.5). Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) is a unibit technique in which the continuous sine wave pattern is interrupted and restarted at the baseline with a 180 ° phase shift to indicate a change in value (e.g., from a 1 bit to a 0 bit). Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK), also known as Quaternary Phase Shift Keying and Quadriphase Keying, yields dibit transmission and can be achieved by defining four phase shifts separated by 90 ° (0 °, 90 °, 180 °, and 270 °). Figure 6.5 provides several ways of looking at phase shift. The first illustration is of a 180 ° shift of an entire sine wave. The second illustration flips half of the sine wave horizontally, to represent a 180 ° shift. The third illustration represents the four degrees of phase shift as positions on a circle. The fourth illustrates the four degrees of phase shift as their signatures might appear on an oscilloscope.
Figure 6.5: Phase shift keying: unibit
Through the definition of eight phase shifts separated by 45 ° (0 °, 45 °, 90 °, 135 °, 180 °, 225 °, 270 °, and 315 °), contemporary modems can affect tribit transmission, achieving three bits of data per signal. (Note: 23 = 8.) Thereby, at a signaling rate of 2400 bps, the transmission rate is 7200 bps.
Differential Phase Shift Keying (DPSK) is a variation on the unibit PSK theme. With DPSK, as illustrated in Figure 6.6, each 1 bit triggers a 180 ° phase shift, but 0 bits have no effect. A great number of applications specify various PSK techniques. For example, Wi-Fi5 (802.11a) wireless LAN standards, which have nothing at all to do with the PSTN, call for BPSK at 6 Mbps and QPSK at 12 Mbps.
Figure 1.6: Differential PSK: unibit
6.2.1.3.4 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
High-speed modems combine multiple modulation techniques. Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM), for example, splits the carrier into two waveforms that are 90 ° out of phase and specifies two possible amplitude values for each of four phase shifts separated by 90 ° (0 °, 90 °, 180 °, and 270 °). This yields eight distinct signal states, as illustrated in the signal constellation graph in Figure 6.7. Thereby, each signal impulse, or symbol, carries one of eight possible signal combinations and represents three bits. (Note: 23 = 8.) At a signaling rate of 2400 baud, this tribit modulation scheme yields a transmission rate of 7200 bps.
Figure 6.7: Quadrature amplitude modulation
The ITU-T V.29 recommendation is for 16-QAM. This approach splits the carrier into two waveforms that are 90 ° out of phase and specifies two possible amplitude values for each of eight phase shifts separated by 45 ° (0 °, 45 °, 90 °, 135 °, 180 °, 225 °, 270 °, and 315 °), as illustrated in the signal constellation graph in Figure 6.8. Thereby, each symbol carries one of 16 possible signal combinations and represents four bits. (Note: 24 = 16.) At a signaling rate of 2400 baud, this quadbit modulation scheme yields a transmission rate of 9600 bps.
It is possible to achieve still higher modulation rates. A 64-QAM technique yields 64 possible signal combinations, with each symbol representing six bits (26 = 64). A 128-QAM technique yields 128 possible signal combinations, with each symbol representing seven bits (27 = 128). A 256-QAM technique yields 256 possible signal combinations, with each symbol representing eight bits (28 = 256). A 512-QAM technique yields 512 possible signal combinations, with each symbol representing nine bits (29 = 512). As the modulation technique increases in sophistication, the number of bits per symbol increases, and the transmission efficiency increases. However, the signal points are brought closer together, which increases the susceptibility to signal impairments such as line noise. A great number of standards specify the use of QAM. In the United States, 64-QAM and 256-QAM are used in digital CATV applications. Wi-Fi5 (802.11a) calls for the use of 16-QAM and 64-QAM. ADSL and Local Multipoint Distribution System (LMDS) standards also call for QAM.
6.2.1.3.5 Trellis-Coded Modulation
Trellis-Coded Modulation (TCM) uses the same modulation scheme as QAM but adds a sophisticated error correction technique known as Forward Error Correction (FEC) to overcome the increased susceptibility to signal impairments. TCM is so named because the plotting of the signal points resembles the latticework of a trellis such as that used in a rose garden, only four dimensional, which explains the lack of a figure accompanying this text. TCM employs a convolutional (i.e., error-correcting) coding scheme. The scheme involves adding an extra bit to every symbol for error control purposes. For example, recall that a 128-QAM technique yields 128 possible signal combinations, with each symbol representing seven bits (27 = 128). As TCM uses one bit for error control, only six payload bits remain (26 = 64). So, the modem accepts six bits at a time. The two Least Significant Bits (LSBs) are separated from the six-bit payload and are analyzed and a parity bit is added that describes the mathematical value (odd or even) of the sum of the LSBs. The resulting three bits and the other original four bits are recombined into a seven-bit symbol prior to transmission. The receiving modem reverses the process, analyzes the parity bit describing the LSBs, and accepts the data as correct, adjusts the data to correct for an error if possible, or requests a retransmission. The LSBs are the rightmost bits in value. As they change rapidly if the total value changes even slightly, they are highly sensitive to errors and very telling in the event that errors occur. As the symbols are plotted onto the logical trellis by the receiver, there are only 64 (26 = 64) legitimate states, or positions, plus the two for the error control bit, for a total of 66 states. If the indicated plot point is one of the other 62 (27 = 128-66 = 62), the received symbol is assumed to have been errored in transit. TCM was invented by Gottfried Ungerboeck, who published the theory in an article with the exciting title "Channel Coding with Multilevel/ Phase Signals" in 1982. In 1984, the ITU-T published modem standards incorporating TCM for speeds of 19.2 kbps and higher. ITU-T recommendations for dial-up modems (and maximum speeds) specifying TCM currently include V.32 (9600 bps), V.32bis (14.4 kbps), V.32ter (19.2 kbps), V.34 (28.8 kbps), and V.34bis (33.6 kbps), aka V.34+. (Note: The term bis comes from Latin, meaning second; in other words, the second and enhanced release of the standard. Third releases are designated ter, translated from Latin as third.) All of these modem standards provide for fully sym-metric data transfer, which is to say that the data transfer is at the same speed in both directions.
6.2.1.3.6 General Modem Characteristics
Conventional modems can be characterized along a number of dimensions, including asynchronous versus synchronous, compression, diagnostics, error control, equalization, gain control, and band limitation:
· Asynchronous and synchronous modems both are available. Asynchronous modems transmit one character at a time, with the receiving device relying on start and stop bits to separate transmitted characters. Synchronous modems are much faster, as the signal is synchronized (timed) at the bit rate of the connection by a Transmit Clock (TC) in either the transmit modem or the transmit terminal. The paired modems synchronize on that clocking pulse in order to distinguish between blocks of data being transmitted, rather than identifying each individual character in a transmission and surrounding it with a start and stop bit. Particularly when transmitting large amounts of data, synchronous modems increase the efficiency of data transfer, resulting in increased speed of transfer and lower associated transmission cost. Synchronous modems faithfully transmit any bit sequence, rather than just ASCII characters.
· Diagnostic modems can test their internal clock and transmit and receive circuits. Additionally, such modems may have the capability to monitor their performance and even diagnose certain conditions contributing to performance degradation. Further, they can respond to loopback tests and, therefore, are manageable through higher level Element Management Systems (EMSs). Such management systems typically are located remotely and are capable of managing large numbers of modems and modem pools (i.e., groups of modems to which access is shared among multiple users).
· Error correction capabilities are included in most contemporary modems. The proprietary Microcom Networking Protocol (MNP) was among the first to include error correction and subsequently was incorporated into the ITU-T V.42 standard. While proprietary error correction software remains embedded in certain modems, the ITU-T V.42 and subsequent generations of modems have standardized this function.
· Compression is a characteristic of high-speed modems. There are a wide variety of compression techniques. ITU-T Recommendation V.42bis, for example, eliminates unused bits in ASCII bytes used to express numerical values. Fax modems make heavy use of various run-length encoding algorithms to compress data prior to transmission, as discussed in Chapter 4. Sophisticated modulation techniques such as QAM are widely used to further improve on the efficiency of transmission. Lemple–Ziv (LZ) compression in some modems attains compression ratios of better than 5: 1 for some forms of text and numerical data. LZ compression allows the DTE to operate at speeds up to 128 kbps while the analog link between the modems remains at 38.4 kbps or less over a 4-kHz channel.
· Equalizers reduce frequency and phase distortion on a circuit by selectively introducing a small amount of delay to compensate for variations in attenuation and latency at different frequencies in the transmission band. Adaptive equalizers continuously monitor the signal and adjust the equalization process to optimize performance at all times.
· Automatic Gain Control (AGC) amplifiers serve to adjust for amplitude variations of the input signal and to ensure that the outgoing signal is of a constant strength. (Note: Gain is the opposite of attenuation. Gain defines an increase in strength between the incoming and the outgoing signals. Attenuation is a loss in signal strength.)
· Band-limiting filters improve error performance by managing the frequencies of the incoming signal, filtering out any extraneous frequencies.
· Dynamic rate adaptation enables modems to dynamically adjust the speed of data transfer to varying line conditions in order to ensure the integrity of the data stream. The actual transmission speeds that modems can realize in either direction depends on the attributes of the analog local loop and various transient interference issues. As the modem speed increases, the signal modulation techniques become more complex and the signal points are brought closer together, which increases the susceptibility to signal impairments such as line noise. The germane local loop characteristics include loop length, wire gauge and presence of mixed wire gauges, number and quality of splices, bridged taps (i.e., multiple appearances of the same cable pair, usually as a result of old and unused connections to other customer premises), bonding and grounding, and the integrity of cable sheathing and splice casings. Modem speeds are affected negatively if any of these attributes is outside acceptable parameters. Whether persistent or transient in nature, ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) caused by electrical storms, radio transmissions, electric motors, and other sources of electromagnetic energy also clearly impact modem performance. Additionally, high-speed services such as T1 and ADSL running on cable pairs in proximity within the same cable can cause difficulty. Such services involve relatively high frequencies and, therefore, radiate a relatively strong electromagnetic field, potentially causing interference and even crosstalk. Modem speeds are stated in terms of their maximums, assuming that conditions are optimal. Dynamic rate adaption enables fallback modems to negotiate a lower rate of transmission using a less sophisticated modulation technique and perhaps adjusting the baud rate when line conditions are less than optimum and to ratchet up the transmission rate when conditions improve. For example, V.34bis modems use QAM and can transmit at 33.6 kbps at 2400 baud when line conditions are optimal. If that is not the case, they can fall back to 31.2 kbps and then 28.8 kbps, if necessary, and ratchet back up as the opportunity presents itself.
6.2.1.4 56-kbps Modems: V.90 and V.92
Modem technology took a giant leap forward with the introduction of 56-kbps modems in the mid-1990s. US Robotics (now 3Com) was the first to develop 56-kbps technology with its proprietary x2, referring to the fact that the modems were about twice the speed of the then-current V.34 (28.8 kbps) modems. Lucent, Rockwell, Motorola, and others soon followed with equally proprietary K56flex (Kbps 56 flexible) modems. The two incompatible approaches were standardized in November 1998 with the ITU-T recommendation V.90. Generally, the modems are combined data/fax modems because they have the ability to emulate a fax machine. They also generally consist of a combination of firmware and hardware, although some are entirely software based. (Note that firmware is faster, but software is more flexible.) Both x2 and K56flex modems were upgradable to V.90 through a software downloads.
V.90 modems are asymmetric in nature, providing a maximum of 56 kbps downstream (i.e., from the network to the modem) and 33.6 kbps upstream (i.e., from the modem to the network). In order to achieve this level of performance, a 56-kbps modem configuration (Figure 6.9) requires that only one transmission link be analog. The end-user dial-up connection is through a V.90 modem over an analog local loop to the PSTN. The connection through the PSTN must be entirely digital, including the originating and terminating COs, all tandem offices, and all transmission facilities. At the terminating end (e.g., corporate intranet site or ISP), the local loop connection must be digital (e.g., T-carrier, E-carrier, or ISDN). Matching 56-kbps modem technology must be in place at the terminating device, typically in the form of an access server or router. This configuration limits the transmissions to only a single D-to-A-to-D (Digital-to-Analog-to-Digital) conversion process, which limits the amount of quantizing noise associated with the D-to-A process. This results in higher speed transmission without sacrificing error performance.
Figure 6.9: The 56-kbps modem configuration
The A-to-D conversion process in the PSTN uses the Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) algorithm, as specified in ITU-T recommendation G.711. As this standard for voice-grade, A-to-D conversion specifies a 64-kbps channel, the theoretical transmission rate for V.90 modems is 64 kbps, symmetric. In the United States, however, intrusive signaling and control are assumed to consume 8 kbps, thereby limiting the theoretical effective transmission rate to 56 kbps. (See Chapter 7 for detailed discussions of T-carrier, PCM, and bit robbing.)
The asymmetric nature of these modems is due to several factors. First, the upstream relationship between the modem and the network is not highly precise. In other words, the digital network cannot interpret the modulated sine waves without the introduction of some quantizing noise, which limits the effective throughput. Actually, it can be done; it is just that you need a more sophisticated (read more expensive) modem to do it. Therefore, asymmetry is less expensive. As the manufacturer makes its profits on end-user modems in volume, the price point is important. If enough end users are attracted to high-speed, inexpensive modems, the lower volume of the much more expensive software for 56-kbps servers yields profits as well. Second, the end user generally does not require full 56-kbps bandwidth on a symmetric basis, as most of the bandwidth is required downstream (i.e., downstream from the network). After all, the bandwidth-intensive graphics generally are downloaded from the Web or a corporate intranet site; upstream, the user often sends only a few mouse clicks or keyboard commands or, perhaps, a textual e-mail. If users need to send bandwidth-intensive files upstream, they are no worse off than with a V.34+ modem, which is exactly how the 56-kbps modem works upstream.
Notably, 56-kbps modems also are V.34+ modems. Assuming that the terminating modem is V.34+ or lesser, the 56 kbps modem "falls back" to that standard, which supports symmetric transmission at speeds up to 33.6 kbps. (Note that the lowest common denominator always determines the maximum level of performance.) Also notably, the fine print on the boxes of the 56-kbps modems indicates quite clearly that they currently are limited to 53.3 kbps because they cannot exceed FCC amplitude (signal strength) limitations. (Note, again, the highest common denominator rule, referring to the network, in this case.) The FCC established this limitation many years ago to minimize the likelihood that transmissions on a cable pair might cause interference on adjacent pairs in the same cable sheath. While the FCC is considering relaxing this restriction, it is clear that the modem manufacturers, rather than the FCC, are responsible for the fine print on the modem boxes [7–11].
It was fully anticipated that V.90 would be the last in a long line of modem standards, but modem technology got a boost with the ITU-T standardization of V.92 (November 2000). Based on work done at Hughes Network Systems for its DirecPC (now HughesNet) satellite Internet service, V.92 offers several key advantages over V.90:
· Faster Connection: QuickConnect is a feature that cuts the time required for handshaking approximately in half, to about 10–15 s. QuickConnect trains the modem on the first call and remembers the characteristics of the circuit. Assuming that the circuit is the same on the next call, the circuit characteristics do not have to be relearned, which results in faster connect times, which has obvious advantages to the end user. It also offers advantages to the ISPs, which may handle thousands, or even millions, of dial-up calls a day—the faster you connect, the faster you take care of your business and disconnect, the shorter the period of time you tie up an expensive port, and the quicker it is available for another user.
· Faster Upstream Speed: Upstream transmission speed is increased from 33.6 to 48 kbps under optimum conditions using a variation of PCM that allows the upstream data stream to use the same clocking source as the downstream data stream.
· Improved Compression: V.44 replaces the V.42bis compression algorithm used in V.90. The V.44 is a string-coding algorithm that offers compression in the range of 6: 1, improving throughput by 20–60 percent and as much as 200 percent for certain kinds of highly compressible data. That translates into theoretical downstream throughput rates as high as 300 kbps, compared with the maximum rates of 150–200 kbps possible with V.90 modems. (Note: These figures are highly optimistic. Actual performance can vary widely, depending on the type of files involved and the line conditions. Performance also depends on whether the ISP decides to turn on the compression option—many do not.)
· Modem on Hold (MoH): A V.92 modem can put a data session on hold when it detects a voice call, either incoming or outgoing, through a call waiting indication and gracefully resume that session when the voice call is terminated. Thereby, V.92 allows a single analog line to be used for both voice and data. MoH requires that the line be equipped with call waiting, a telco PSTN service.
The announcement of V.92 certainly is not as dramatic as that of V.90, which nearly doubled downstream transmission rates. It does, however, offer considerable advantages for dial-up users, including not only those without broadband access via ADSL, cable modem networks, or satellite but also those of us who use modem connections on the road or as a backup in the event of a broadband access failure. Essentially, that means that all users stand to benefit at one time or another once V.92 modems are widely available and widely supported by ISPs. Unfortunately, there seems to be no market driver significant enough to compel the ISPs to expend the capital necessary to upgrade V.90 servers to V.92. Some V.90 modems can be upgraded to V.92 via a network download [12–14].
6.2.2 Codecs
The reverse conversion of A-to-D is necessary in situations where analog information is to be sent across a digital circuit. Certainly, this often is the case in carrier networks where huge volumes of analog voice are digitized and sent across high-capacity digital circuits. This requirement also exists where high-capacity digital circuits connect premises-based, analog voice PBXs or Key Telephone Systems (KTSs) to Central Office Exchanges (COEs) or to other PBXs or KTSs.
The device that accomplishes the A-to-D conversion is known as a codec. Codecs code an analog input into a digital (data) format on the transmit side of the connection, reversing the process, or decoding the information, on the receive side to reconstitute the analog signal. Codecs are used widely to convert analog voice and video to digital format and to reverse the process on the receiving end. There exists a wide variety of codecs for use in wired and wireless networks of all descriptions. Many of those codecs are discussed in detail in subsequent chapters. [Note: In contemporary systems, a codec commonly is incorporated into a Digital Signal Processor (DSP).]
6.2.3 Terminal Adapters and NT-Xs
Terminal Adapters (TAs) are interface adapters for connecting one or more non-ISDN devices to an ISDN network. Also known as ISDN modems, TAs are ISDN DCE that performs protocol or interface conversion for equipment that is not ISDN compatible. Network Termination (NT), in ISDN networks, is a function accomplished through the use of programmed logic embedded in the carrier network and the user equipment. NT2 is an interface to an intelligent ISDN-compatible device (e.g., PBX or router) responsible for the user side of the connection to the network, performing such functions as multiplexing and switching. NT1 is responsible for interfacing to the carrier side of the connection, performing such functions as signal conversion and maintenance of the local loop's electrical characteristics. These functions resemble those provided by DSUs and CSUs.
6.2.4 Channel Service Units and Digital Service Units
Channel Service Units (CSUs) and Digital Service Units (DSUs) are devices that, in combination, serve to interface the user environment to an electrically based, digital local loop. In contemporary systems, CSUs and DSUs generally combine into a single device known variously as a CSU/DSU, CDSU, or ISU (Integrated Service Unit), which typically appears in the form of a chipset on a printed circuit board found under the skin of another device such as a channel bank, multiplexer (mux), switch, or router. They are used in a wide variety of digital voice and data networks, including DDS, T-carrier, and E-carrier, which I discuss in detail in Chapter 7.
6.2.4.1 Channel Service Unit
Channel service units are circuit-terminating equipment that provide the customer interface to the circuit, as illustrated in Figure 6.10. They also permit the isolation of the DTE/CPE from the network for purposes of network testing. CSU functions include electrical isolation from the circuit for purposes of protection from aberrant voltages, serving the same function as a protector in the voice world. Additionally, the CSU can respond to a command from the carrier to close a contact, temporarily isolating the DTE domain from the carrier domain. This enables the carrier to conduct a loopback test in order to test the performance characteristics of the local loop from the serving CO to the CSU and back to the CO. Many contemporary CSUs also have the ability to perform various line analyses, including monitoring the signal level. Such intelligent CSUs also often have the ability to initiate loopback tests, although arrangements must be made with the carrier in advance.
The CSU also serves to interface the DTE domain to the carrier domain in an electrical environment. Within the DTE, for example, 1 bits commonly are represented as positive (+) voltages and 0 bits as null (zero) voltages. The network requires that 1 bits be alternating positive and negative voltages and that the 0 bits be zero voltages. Further, the network requires assurance that 1s density is achieved. Depending on the carrier network, 15–80 zeros can be transmitted in a row as long as the density of 1s is at least 12.5 percent (1 in 8) over a specified interval of time. CSUs insert, or stuff, 1 bits on a periodic basis in order to ensure that the various network elements maintain synchronization.
The CSU also serves to provide signal regeneration and generates keep-alive signals to maintain the circuit in the event of a DTE transmission failure. Finally, the CSU stores various performance data in temporary memory for consideration by an upstream network management system.
Smart CSUs increasingly are positioned as Integrated Access Devices (IADs). These multiport devices support interfaces to voice, data, and video devices such as PBXs, routers, and videoconferencing units. The programmable IAD supports bandwidth allocation for the various devices, enabling them to share a single T1 or other digital facility.
6.2.4.2 Data Service Unit
Data service units convert the DTE unipolar signal into a bipolar signal demanded by the network. DSU functions variously include regeneration of digital signals, insertion of control signals, signal timing, and reformatting. Some of these functions can be ceded to either the CSU or the terminal equipment [15]. In any case, the functions must be performed, even though the CSUs and DSUs lose their identity.
6.2.5 Front-End Processors
Front-End Processors (FEPs) combine the functions of concentrators and message switches. In other words, they have the ability to concentrate and switch traffic between multiple terminals and among groups of terminals in order to share a single circuit for access to mainframe resources. They also serve as an interface to Wide Area Network (WAN) circuits to provide remote terminals access to mainframe resources. Most FEPs are midrange computers that have their own databases to support assigned functions such as error detection and correction, queuing, editing validation, and limited application processing. While the mainframe clearly could perform such tasks, it is more cost effective to apply a lower order computer to the performance of such mundane and highly repetitive tasks, thereby reserving the power of the mainframe for more difficult and demanding tasks in support of user-oriented applications.
In a more contemporary client/server environment there is no exact equivalent of an FEP. Although the same functions must be performed, they are spread across multiple and various devices such as an access router with a firewall for security purposes and a Remote Access Server (RAS) or Virtual Private Network (VPN) server for performance of security functions and granting of access privileges.
6.3 PROTOCOL BASICS
Protocols are rules of behavior. In the context of data communications, protocols are the procedures employed to ensure the orderly exchange of information between devices on a data link, data network, or system. Protocols comprise conventions that, at a basic level, commonly include the dimensions of line setup, transmission mode, code set, and non–data exchanges of information such as error control. Protocols have two major functions, handshaking and line discipline [16]:
· Handshaking is the sequence that occurs between the devices over the circuit, establishing the fact that the circuit is available and operational. The handshaking process also establishes the level of device compatibility and determines the speed of transmission by mutual agreement. Devices accomplish the process of handshaking by passing frames of data back and forth in order to negotiate the basis on which they will communicate, in consideration of the performance characteristics of the circuit. As always, the rule of the lowest common denominator applies and, therefore, communication is limited by the least capable device. Actually, the rule is more like the highest common capability of the least capable device determines the maximum level of performance.
· Line discipline is the sequence of network operations that actually transmits and receives the data, controls errors in transmission, deals with the sequencing of message sets (e.g., packets, blocks, frames, and cells), and provides for con-firmation or validation of data received.
Several hardware and software solutions are designed to specifically deal with protocol analysis and conversion:
· Protocol converters are software-based devices that translate from one native protocol into another [e.g., from ASCII to EBCDIC, from TCP/IP to IBM SNA/SDLC, or from PCM voice to VoIP].
· Gateways in ARPANET terminology, were packet-forwarding devices that, in contemporary data communications terminology, are referred to as routers. Contemporary gateways are hardware/software combinations that connect devices running different native protocols. In other words, gateways are packet-forwarding devices that run gateway protocols for purposes of protocol conversion, perhaps at all layers of the OSI Reference Model (i.e., from the Physical Layer to the Applications Layer). In addition to protocol conversion, gateways provide a point of physical interconnection between incompatible networks, with examples including X.25-to-Frame Relay (FR) gateways and T-carrier-to-E-carrier International Gateway Facilities (IGFs).
· Protocol analyzers are diagnostic tools for displaying and analyzing communi-cations protocols. Analyzers enable technicians, engineers, and managers to test the performance of the network to ensure that the systems and the network function according to specifications. LAN managers, for example, use protocol analyzers to perform network maintenance and troubleshooting and to plan network upgrades and expansions.
6.3.1 Line Set-Up: Connectivity
A very basic protocol issue involves the manner in which the circuit is set up between devices. There are three alternatives: simplex, Half DupleX (HDX), and Full DupleX (FDX), as illustrated in Figure 6.11 and defined below.
Figure 6.11: Simplex, HDX, and FDX transmission
6.3.1.1 Simplex Transmission
Simplex transmission is unidirectional. The information flows in one direction across the circuit, with no capability to support a response in the other direction. Simplex circuits are analogous to escalators, doorbells, fire alarms, and security systems. Contemporary applications for simplex circuits include remote station printers, card readers, and alarm systems (e.g., fire, smoke, and intrusion alarms). Generally speaking, simplex transmission is conducted across dedicated circuits of low capacity. An intrusion alarm, for example, requires very little bandwidth because the only information sent across the circuit indicates that an electrical contact has been broken. The intrusion alarm circuit must be dedicated from end to end (e.g., contact to central alarm station) to avoid the possibility that either failure or congestion in a switch or other intermediate device could prevent the alarm from being registered. The circuit must be simplex to prevent the alarm from being reset remotely, rather than investigated locally. Telephone company tariffs sometimes refer to simplex circuits as burglar alarm circuits. Broadcast TV and radio operate in simplex mode.
6.3.1.2 Half-Duplex Transmission
Half-duplex (HDX) transmission operates in both directions, although not simultaneously. A HDX circuit is perhaps best illustrated by a walkie-talkie, Citizens Band (CB), or other Push-To-Talk (PTT) radio link, over which the speakers must take turns talking. Many speakerphones operate in HDX. In data communications applications, HDX generally is used for relatively low-speed transmission, usually involving two-wire, analog circuits provided on a circuit-switched basis through the PSTN. As the circuit must be turned around in order to support the change in direction of the transmission, the line turnaround time tends to limit the speed of conversational data communications. HDX example applications include line printers, polling of remote buffers, and modem communications (many modems can support FDX as well). HDX is used extensively in transaction-based communications, such as credit card verification and Automatic Teller Machine (ATM) networks. Such applications are not impacted seriously by delays associated with line turnaround. In order to control the direction of the circuit, some sort of control mechanism must be employed to identify which device will transmit and which will receive. The most common approach involves a device sending a Request-To-Send (RTS) control signal. If the request is granted, the other device, or perhaps an intermediate switch or router, sends a Clear-To-Send (CTS) signal. Wi-Fi (802.11) Wireless Local Area Networks (WLANs) use this same approach to transmission over a radio channel. In Europe, a HDX circuit is com-monly referred to as a simplex circuit.
6.3.1.3 Full-Duplex Transmission
Full duplex (FDX) is a fully bidirectional transmission mode in which communication is supported in both directions simultaneously. The first working FDX communications circuit was invented by Joseph B. Stearns of Boston and installed in 1872 on a one-wire telegraph system using a ground return. This effectively doubled the traffic capacity of the network, and the duplex equipment could be purchased and installed at much lower cost than stringing another wire [1]. Human beings, including telegraph operators, are born fully equipped for FDX communications, but computers require software to enable this capability. While we would rarely employ a one-wire approach these days, there are several different ways to configure an FDX circuit.
· Physical Four Wire: The most commonsense FDX configuration involves a physical four-wire circuit with one pair of wires supporting transmission in one direction and another pair supporting transmission in the other direction. This approach is commonly used for high-capacity, dedicated circuits, of which most are multichannel in nature. T-carrier and E-carrier circuits traditionally were configured in this way. All wideband and broadband circuits are FDX in nature.
· Physical Two Wire: FDX modems use another approach in order to achieve FDX data transmission on a physical two-wire circuit. Modems cause a two-wire circuit to emulate a four-wire circuit through a split-channel approach, using Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) to create two frequency channels. This process allows the creation of two carrier waves that are then modulated using Frequency Modulation (FM). Figure 6.12 illustrates this technique over a voice-grade circuit. In this example, one channel uses an unmodulated carrier wave at 1170 Hz, modulating it at 1070 Hz to represent 0 bits and at 1270 Hz to represent 1 bits. The reverse channel uses an unmodulated carrier wave at 2125 Hz, modulating it at 2025 Hz to represent 0 bits and at 2225 Hz to represent 1 bits. Other modulation techniques can be used within these channels as well, including AM, PSK, and QAM.
Figure 6.12: FDX communications over a two-wire circuit via FDM and FM
· Optical: FDX transmission in optical fibers is achieved either by using separate fibers for transmission in different directions or by using Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM), which essentially is FDM at the optical level.
· POTS: This discussion of FDX begs the question as to how FDX is achieved over a physical two-wire circuit for Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS), that is, analog voice communications, since there is only one voice-grade channel of 4 kHz. Remember that there are two conductors and current flows in both directions across the circuit. So, signals can travel in both directions as well. Voice communications is not highly precise and, therefore, not highly demanding of the circuit, so a modest amount of signal distortion is acceptable—actually it is not even noticed.
FDX circuits sometimes are used to connect HDX terminals in order to avoid issues of line turnaround time. More typical examples of FDX applications include channel links between host processors, channel links between controllers/ concentrators and hosts, and other applications involving the interconnection of substantial computing systems. Carrier services that deliver FDX capabilities include DDS, E/T-Carrier, and broadband services such as Frame Relay, SMDS, and ATM. I discuss all of these in later chapters.
6.3.2 Transmission Mode: Transmission Method
There are two basic methods of data transmission: asynchronous and synchronous. As long as we are on the theme of timing, we will briefly explore the concepts of isochronous and plesiochronous communications as well.
6.3.2.1 Asynchronous
Asynchronous, or character-framed, transmission is a method that grew out of telegraphy and teletypewriting. From Latin and Greek, it translates as not together with time—in other words, not synchronous. Asynchronous transmission is a start–stop method of transmission in character mode that traditionally is used when keyboarding (nee typing). In this mode, characters are transmitted one at a time with variable intervals between characters, as determined by the timing of the fingers as they strike the keys. When no keys are being struck and the transmitter is sending no data, it sends a constant stream of signals in the mark, or 1, state. When the transmitter begins to transmit data, a character (letter, number, punctuation mark, or control character) at a time, each is preceded by a start bit at the 0, or space, level. The start bit alerts the receiving terminal to the transmission across the circuit of something worthy of its attention, which generally is presented in the form of an eight-bit byte. A stop bit at the mark, or 1, level, succeeds the transmitted computer value, advising the receiving terminal that the transmission of that set of information has ended. Some asynchronous protocols make use of two stop bits.
PCs, teletypes, and other devices that make use of asynchronous transmission frame, or surround, each byte of information with start and stop bits, which are interpreted by the receiving terminal and subsequently stripped away in order to get to the actual data payload. The inclusion of start and stop bits adds two or three bits of overhead to the transmission of each eight-bit byte. Additionally, asynchronous transmission commonly involves the addition of a parity bit as an error control mechanism, which happens to be relatively poor, as we shall see later in this chapter. The framing of the data with these three or four bits of control information yields an overhead, or inefficiency, factor of 20–30 percent.
Asynchronous transmission can be characterized as start-stop (not synchronized) transmission of one character at a time at a variable speed. Additionally, overhead is high and error control is poor. (Note: Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) also is asynchronous in nature, although in a much more complex manner than discussed in this baseline example. I discuss ATM in Chapter 10.)
6.3.2.2 Synchronous
From Latin and Greek origins, synchronous translates as together with time. Such transmission is message framed and overcomes the inefficiencies of asynchronous, start–stop transmission for high-speed data communications applications. Rather than surrounding each character with start and stop bits, a relatively large set of data is framed, or blocked, with one or more synchronization bits or bit patterns used to identify the beginning and end of a logical block of data. Both analog synchronous modems and digital DTE synchronize the receiving ter-minal on the rate of transmission of the data from the sending terminal. Through the receipt of the synchronizing bits, or clocking pulses, the receiving device can match its speed of data receipt to the rate of data transmission across the circuit. Thereby, each bit of data and control information can be distinguished at the physical layer. Higher layers sort out when to expect what information, in which data fields, and in what sequence, based on an agreed-upon protocol such as Frame Relay I P. Because only a few framing bits and synchronizing bits surround a large block of data, the overhead is much reduced, the efficiency of transmission is much increased, and the effective throughput is much improved. As stated in Wonders of the Universe (The Werner Company, 1899):
The Morse printing instrument … is a beautiful, but rather complicated piece of mechanism, for besides the printing and electric arrangements it is furnished with clockwork to keep the paper tape in motion whilst the message is being delivered. But lately these accessories have in many cases been dispensed with, and the operator depends upon his ear for the translation of the message sent.
Error control in synchronous communications protocols is quite sophisticated and reliable, involving statistical sampling techniques and mathematical calculations performed on the set of data. Synchronous transmission can be characterized as transmission of multiple characters at a time organized into character sets and presented in blocks or frames. The transmission bit rate is synchronized between transmitter and receiver and takes place at a predetermined and relatively high rate of speed. Further, error control is excellent and overhead relatively low.
6.3.2.3 Isochronous
Isochronous (Isoc) data are synchronous data transmitted without a clocking source. From the Greek isochronos, translating as equal in time, all bits are of equal importance and are anticipated to occur at regular intervals of time. Bits are sent continuously, with no start–stop bits for timing. Rather, timing is recovered from transitions in the received data stream, with a whole number of bit-length intervals between characters. Bit integrity is preserved, with no modifications (i.e., bipolar conventions). The transparent isochronous transmission does not recognize control characters. Some T-carrier nodes operate isochronously on the links, syncing up with several lines operating at slightly different speeds. Isoc often is used in secure military applications that require encryption.
Real-time, uncompressed voice communication is a type of isochronous data because human conversation is not synchronized and can be presented in a continuous stream. If voice were synchronous, we would all talk at a precise and common rate of speed and not overtalk each other. Similarly, real-time, uncompressed video communication is isochronous, or stream oriented. The traditional circuit-switched, PCM-based PSTN supports isochronous datastreams beautifully. This network, from end to end and in both directions, commits time slots to the real-time, uncompressed voice transmissions, whether sound or silence is being carried. Further, those time slots appear at regular, precisely timed intervals (i.e., every 125 μs, or every 8000th of a second). So, the native voice conversation is isochronous, but the network is synchronous. Any confusion created here will be sorted out in the discussions of PCM and digital carrier (i.e., T-carrier and E-carrier) in Chapter 7.
6.3.2.4 Plesiochronous
From the Greek plesio, meaning near, and chronos, meaning time, plesiochronous communications involves devices running at nominally the same rate. Plesiochronous networks comprise subnetworks and devices that are free running, although at approximately the same rate and within defined parameters of tolerance for variation. Much like clocks and watches run at approximately the same rate, devices in a digital network are free running, with some running at a slightly faster or slower pace. So, the network is almost, but not perfectly, synchronized across all devices.
The Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) is the digital network hierarchy of T-carrier and E-carrier systems. Originally, the PDH involved a master clocking source in the form of a highly precise master clock off of which all digital network elements slaved in a hierarchical fashion to sync up, that is, take their initial timing, after which time they ran independently. In the United States, Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) and IntereXchange Carrier (IXC) networks took their initial timing from a master Stratum 1 clock, which, as best I recall, was positioned in St. Louis, which is roughly the center of the country. Those clocking pulses were passed down the hierarchy to the regional and local networks of switches and T3 subnetworks that included multiple T3 and T1 links. Roughly in the 1980s, multiplexers also had the option of mutual synchronization, in which a pair of free-running muxes would simply sync up independently of the network. In either case, it was virtually ensured that there would be some level of slippage, or lack of synchronization. In order to adjust for that slippage and thereby resolve minor timing issues in order to allow multiple T1s to be multiplexed into a T2, multiple T2s to be multiplexed into a T3, and so on, stuff bits were added to the overhead at each higher level. The same logic was used in E-carrier and J-carrier networks. In contemporary T/E/J-carrier networks, the switches and muxes sync up with a Global Positioning System (GPS) master clock. As a result, timing issues are relatively modest, although they still exist and some small number of stuff bits remain used to resolve those issues.
6.3.3 Code Sets
Analogous to alphabets, code sets, or coding schemes, are employed by all computer systems to create, store, and exchange information. While code sets vary, they all rely on a specific combination of 1s and 0s of a specific total length in order to represent something of value, such as a letter, number, punctuation mark, or control character (e.g., carriage return, line feed, space, blank, and delete). Contemporary standard coding schemes include Baudot, ASCII, EBCDIC, and Unicode.
The first widely accepted standard coding scheme was Morse code, invented by Samuel Morse sometime prior to 1844 for use in telegraphy, which, of course, is a human-to-human digital data communications method. Friedrich Clemens Gerke invented the International Morse Code in 1848 out of necessity, as some of the spaces in letters created difficulty in radiotelegraphy. The international version was standardized by the International Telegraph Union (ITU) in 1865 and is still used today by amateur radio operators, or hams. Morse code uses series of short and long marks in the form of dots (short marks) and dashes (long marks), with spaces between them, to represent letters, numbers, punctuation marks, and procedural signals (prosigns). The length of the spaces varies, with a short space between letters, a longer space between characters, a longer space between words, and a still longer space between sentences. In order to speed transmission, the fewest number of dots and dashes represent commonly used letters (e.g., E is •, T is –, A is • –). Commonly used words are abbreviated (e.g., calling is abbreviated CG, or – • – • – – •, as are commonly used phrases (e.g., love and kisses is abbreviated 88, or – – – • • – – – • •. Table 6.1 provides the International Morse Code for English letters, numbers, and select punctuation marks and prosigns. (Note: The terms ham and plug originated in tele graphy to describe a telegraph operator lacking in proficiency [2]. Ham alludes to a ham-fisted operator.)
|
Table 6.1: International Morse Code Character Set Open table as spreadsheet |
|||||||
|
Letter |
Code |
Letter |
Code |
Number |
Code |
Punctuation, Prosigns |
Code |
|
A |
• – |
N |
–• |
1 |
•–––– |
Period (.) |
•–•–•– |
|
B |
– • • • |
O |
––– |
2 |
• •––– |
Comma (,) |
–– • • –– |
|
C |
– • – • |
P |
• –– • |
3 |
• • • –– |
Question (?) |
• • –– • • |
|
D |
– • • |
Q |
–– • – |
4 |
• • • • – |
Colon (:) |
–––• • • |
|
E |
• |
R |
• – • |
5 |
• • • • • |
Semicolon (;) |
–•–•–• |
|
F |
• • – • |
S |
• • • |
6 |
– • • • • |
Hyphen (-) |
–••••– |
|
G |
–– • |
T |
– |
7 |
–– • • • |
Dollar ($) |
•••–••– |
|
H |
• • • • |
U |
• • – |
8 |
–––• • |
At sign (©) |
• –– • – • |
|
I |
• • |
V |
• • • – |
9 |
––––• |
Stop |
• – • – • |
|
J |
•––– |
W |
• –– |
0 |
––––– |
Wait |
• – • • • |
|
K |
– • – |
X |
– • • – |
|
|
Invitation to |
– • – |
|
L |
• – • – |
Y |
– • –– |
|
|
transmit |
• – • |
|
M |
–– |
Z |
–– • • |
|
|
Received |
|
6.3.3.1 Baudot Code (ITA 2)
Morse code was the primary communication code for many years, until Emile Baudot invented the Baudot Distributor in the 1870s. That device provided for the transmission of values in a five-bit coding scheme over a line between two synchronized electromechanical devices. The Baudot Distributor soon gave way to the teletype, which also was based on the Baudot coding scheme, subsequently known as International Telegraph Alphabet 2 (ITA 2). Telephone Devices for the Deaf (TDDs) still use ITA 2.
Baudot code, updated in 1930, is limited to 32 (25) characters. Considering that each bit has two possible states (1 or 0), five bits in sequence yield 25 (32) possible combinations. Because 32 values is not sufficient to represent all 26 characters in the English alphabet, plus the 10 decimal digits, necessary punctuation marks, and the space character, the shift key operates to shift between letters and other characters. An arrow pointing down represents letters (LTRS). Lowercase (LTRS shift) means that all following characters are alpha characters (LTRS). An arrow pointing up represents figures (FIGS). When a FIGS character is recognized, all succeeding characters are recognized as FIGS numbers and special characters until the shift key activates another arrow [16, 17].
Baudot employs asynchronous transmission, as start and stop bits separate characters. Error detection and correction require human editing. Therefore, Baudot is a human-to-human, rather than a machine-to-machine, communication technique. Detected errors must be corrected through retransmission.
Clearly, Baudot is a highly limited coding scheme. The limited range of letters expression, at 32 characters, is barely enough to accommodate the relatively simple English, French, and Spanish alphabets. To stay within that range, all letters must be in uppercase, which is just as well, as the shift key is used for other purposes. The shift key provides another 32 characters for numbers and control characters, but Baudot is still very limited in its range of expression. Additionally, the asynchronous requirement for start and stop bits makes Baudot overhead intensive. Finally, the error detection and correction technique is far less than desirable. As a result, Baudot currently is limited to use in teletypewriters and very old telex machines.
As a footnote, limited coding schemes are not necessarily overly limiting. Proprietary five-and six-bit codes, for example, have been used in the airline reservation systems (e.g., American Airlines' SABRE System and United Airlines' APOLLO) for many years. The airlines still use the IBM Airline Control (ALC) protocol, or the Unisys version, P1024B, both of which used a six-bit coding scheme. Such applications involve a limited character set that is easily accommodated by a six-bit code; in fact, a seven-or eight-bit coding scheme would be excessive and inefficient.
6.3.3.2 Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code
Developed by IBM in 1962, Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code (EBCDIC) was the next standardized code used extensively. An improvement over earlier (1950) Binary-Coded Decimal (BCD) and (1951) extended BCD, EBCDIC was developed to enable different IBM computer systems to communicate based on a standard coding scheme. Although EBCDIC is standardized today, users have the ability to modify the coding scheme [16].
EBCDIC involves an eight-bit coding scheme, yielding 28 (256) possible combinations and, thereby, significantly increasing the range of expression. As a result, more complex alphabets can be supported, as can upper-and lowercase letters, a full range of numbers (0–9), and all necessary punctuation marks. Equally importantly, if not more so, the eight-bit coding scheme supports a large number of control characters, which is critical in the coordination of communications between complex mainframe computers.
The EBCDIC-based machines communicate on a synchronous basis, thereby improving on the speed of transmission. Since start and stop bits do not surround each character, overhead reduces, efficiency of transmission improves, and more payload bits can transmit per unit of time. Further, a more complex, machine-to-machine error detection and correction technique yields improved performance in that regard. Detected errors may require retransmission, although forward error correction is often employed, with the receiving system identifying, isolating, and correcting the errored bits.
6.3.3.3 American (National) Standard Code for Information Interchange
Developed in 1963, the American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ANSCII or ASCII) was specifically oriented toward data processing applications. It was modified in 1967 by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) to address modifications found in contemporary equipment; that version, originally known as ASCII II, is now known simply as ASCII [16].
ASCII employs a seven-bit coding scheme, supporting 128 (27) characters, which is quite satisfactory for the English alphabet, Arabic numerals, punctuation marks, a reasonable complement of special characters, and a number of control characters, as displayed in Table 6.2. (Note: Actually, the Indians invented numbers 1–9. The Arabs invented only 0 but introduced 0–9 to Europe.) As ASCII was designed for use in asynchronous computer systems (non-IBM, in those days), fewer control characters were required, making a seven-bit scheme acceptable.
|
Table 6.2: ASCII Character Set with Definitions of Example Control Characters Open table as spreadsheet |
||||||||
|
|
Bit Positions 5-7 |
|||||||
|
Bit positions 1–4 |
000 |
100 |
010 |
110 |
001 |
101 |
011 |
111 |
|
0000 |
NUL |
DLE |
SP |
0 |
© |
P |
‘ |
p |
|
1000 |
SOH |
DC1 |
! |
1 |
A |
Q |
a |
q |
|
0100 |
STX |
DC2 |
“ |
2 |
B |
R |
b |
r |
|
1100 |
ETX |
DC3 |
# |
3 |
C |
S |
c |
s |
|
0010 |
EOT |
DC4 |
$ |
4 |
D |
T |
d |
t |
|
1010 |
ENQ |
NAK |
% |
5 |
E |
U |
e |
u |
|
0110 |
ACK |
SYN |
& |
6 |
F |
V |
f |
v |
|
1110 |
BEL |
ETB |
|
7 |
G |
W |
g |
w |
|
0001 |
BS |
CAN |
( |
8 |
H |
X |
h |
x |
|
1001 |
HT |
EM |
) |
9 |
I |
Y |
i |
y |
|
0101 |
LF |
SUB |
* |
: |
J |
Z |
j |
z |
|
1101 |
VT |
ESC |
+ |
; |
K |
[ |
k |
{ |
|
0011 |
FF |
FS |
, |
< |
L |
\ |
l |
| |
|
1011 |
CR |
GS |
- |
= |
M |
] |
m |
} |
|
0111 |
SO |
RS |
· |
> |
N |
~ |
n |
∼ |
|
1111 |
SI |
US |
/ |
? |
O |
— |
o |
DEL |
|
Abbreviations: · NUL: Null character. A transmission control character used to serve a media-fill or time-fill requirement, i.e., a stuff character or padding character. · SOH: Start Of H eader. A transmission control character indicating the start of a message heading. STX: S tart of T eXt. A transmission control character to start the reading, transmission, reception, or recording of text. · ETX: E nd of T eXt. A transmission control character to terminate the reading, transmission, reception, or recording of text. · EOT: End Of T ransmission. A transmission control character to terminate a transmission that may have included one or more texts or messages. · ENQ: EN Quiry. A transmission control character used to request a response from a station to which a connection has been established. The request may be for the station identification, type of equipment, and station status. · NAK: Negative AcKnowledegment. A transmission control character sent by the receiving device to the transmitting device to indicate that a received block of data contained one or more errors. A NAK will trigger the transmitting device to retransmit that errored block. · AC K: ACK nowledgment. A transmission control character sent by the receiving device to the transmitting device to indicate that a received block of data contained no errors. · BEL: BEL l. A transmission control character that causes a bell to ring or activates some other audio or visual device to gain the attention of the operator at the receiving station. · ETB: E nd of Transmission B lock. A code extension character used to indicate the end of the transmission of a block of data. · CAN: CAN cel. A transmission control character indicating that the associated data are in error or are to be ignored. · EM: E nd of M edium. The physical end of a data storage medium, or the usable portion of the medium. · SUB: SUBstitute. Used in place of a character that is known to be invalid, i.e., in error. Also used to indicate a character used in place of one that cannot be represented on a given device, e.g., e may be used in place of ε (epsilon) or d may be used in place of δ (delta). · ESC: ESC ape. A code extension character used to indicate a change in code interpretation to another character set, according to some convention or agreement. This is much like the use of the shift key in Baudot code to indicate a shift between figures and characters. · CR: Carriage R eturn. A format control character that causes the print or display position to move to the first position, or left-hand margin, of the screen or print medium. Now often associated with an LF (Line Feed), which moves the print position down to the next line. |
Figure 6.13 illustrates ASCII in the context of asynchronous communications, with start and stop bits framing each character, without employing synchronization bits. Asynchronous transmission makes use of a simple error detection and correction scheme known as parity checking, also illustrated in Figure 6.13. Parity checking is error prone with detected errors often going unnoticed or requiring retransmission, although forward error correction may be employed.
Figure 6.13: ASCII example of the number 8, in asynchronous mode with character framing
6.3.3.4 Universal Code
Universal Code (Unicode) is an attempt by the Unicode Consortium to standardize coding schemes, of which there are a great number, worldwide. Further, there are duplicate numerical codes for different characters, depending on the scheme involved. Unicode provides a unique numerical code for every character, regardless of the computing platform, the application program, or the language, whether human or machine. The Unicode Consortium developed the original standard, UTF-16 (Unicode Transformation Format 16), in 1991 as a standard encoding scheme to support complex alphabets such as Chinese, Japanese, and Korean. In the Japanese language, for example, even the abbreviated Kanji writing system contains well over 2000 written ideographic characters; Hatakana and Katakana alphabets are also used, further adding to the complexity. As seven-and eight-bit coding schemes cannot accommodate such a complex alphabet, computer manufacturers traditionally have taken proprietary approaches to this problem through the use of two linked eight-bit values. UTF-16 supports 65,536 (216) characters, in what is known as the Basic Multilingual Plane (BMP), which accommodates the most complex alphabets; in fact, multiple alphabets can be satisfied simultaneously. Further, Unicode standardizes the coding scheme so computers of disparate origin can communicate information on a standard basis. Since the transfer of Unicode data does not require translation of proprietary coding schemes, speed of transfer is improved, errors are reduced, and costs are lowered.
Unicode accommodates preexisting standard coding schemes using the same byte values for consistency. In Unicode terms, ASCII, for example, is known as UTF-7. There even is a UTF-EBCDIC, specifically for IBM mainframes. UTF-8 supports any universal character in the Unicode range using one to four octets (eight-bit bytes) to do so, depending on the symbol. UTF-32 uses four octets for each symbol but is rarely used due to its inherent inefficiency. The Unicode standard has been adopted by companies such as Apple, H P, IBM, Microsoft, Oracle, SAP, Sun, Sybase, and Unisys. Unicode is required by modern standards such as CORBA 3.0, European Computer Manufactures Association ECMAScript (JavaScript), Java, Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP), Wireless Markup Language (WML), and eXtensible Markup Language (XML).
Unicode is developed in conjunction with the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). ISO 10646 defines the Universal Character Set (UCS), into which the UTF code sets map. UCS-4 is a four-octet code set into which UTF-32 maps and UCS-2 is a two-byte code set into which UTF-16 maps. UCS-1 encodes all characters in byte sequences varying from one to five bytes.
6.3.4 Data Format
Data formatting is a critical part of a communications protocol. Data formats enable the receiving device to logically determine what is to be done with the data and how to go about doing it. Data formats include code type, message length, and transmission validation techniques. A data format generally involves a header, text, and a trailer (refer to Figure 6.14 and the bulleted list that follows shortly), with the actual data content contained within the text field. While the header and trailer are overhead, they serve critical functions in support of the successful transfer of the data content. Generally, both a header and trailer frame the data content, or text. In total, the header, text, and trailer comprise what is known variously as a packet, block, frame, or cell, with the specific terminology being sensitive to the specific protocol involved. (Note: Some protocols, such as ATM, do not involve a trailer.)
· Header: A communications header precedes the data to be transmitted, often serving to establish the fact that the transmission link exists both physically and logically. The header may include synchronization bits that provide for synchronization between the devices and the link. Address fields in the header often include both source address and destination address. The source address identifies the originating device so that a response can be directed correctly and so that a retransmission can be requested if the data suffer errors during transmission. The destination address enables the receiving device to identify data intended for it and enables intermediate devices (e.g., switches and routers) to route the data correctly. Certain data protocols also use fields in the header to identify the length of the text field and the type of data, to indicate the level of tolerance for delay or loss during network transit, and any optional headers that might follow. The user header includes user-definable information such as system access (password), organization or department ID, operator ID, terminal ID, database or application ID, destination address, message sequence number, date/time ID, and message priority.
· Text: The text portion of the data set is the information to be communicated. It may contain either a fixed or a variable amount of information, depending on the specific protocol involved. The text may be preceded by Start-of-TeXt (STX) and succeeded by End-of-TeXt (ETX) control characters so the receiving device can determine the location of the message data. The text field also is known generically as the data field, or the payload.
· Trailer: The trailer, tail, or trace portion of the data set contains information relative to the analysis of the message, including message tracking and diagnostics. Trailing the text, the trailer information may contain the originating ID, the data block number and total number of blocks being transmitted, and identification of system processing points involved in the transmission. The trailer often includes an error detection and correction mechanism to manage the integrity of the transmitted data.
Figure 6.14: Generic data format, with header, text, and trailer
6.3.5 Error Control: Data Transmission Integrity
The integrity of the transmitted data is of prime importance. Several techniques exist for error detection and, ideally, correction. The three basic modes of error control are recognition and flagging, recognition and retransmission, and recognition and forward error correction:
· Recognition and flagging provide for no automatic means of correction of errors. Used primarily in networks involving dumb terminals with no means of buffering or retaining information transmitted; retransmission of errored data is not possible. Detected errors simply are flagged (identified) as such by the receiving device; error correction requires a human-to-machine request for retransmission. Parity checking is an example of recognition and flagging.
· Recognition and retransmission are used in more sophisticated networks where the transmitting device has buffer memory and, therefore, can retransmit a set of data that a receiving device, or perhaps an intermediate router or other intelligent network node, has determined to have been errored in transit. Serious failures in the devices and/or the circuit can result in repeated errored retransmissions, which lower the throughput of the communication link. In other words, recognition and retransmission are network intensive. Recognition and retransmission commonly are used in wireline networks where circuit quality is good and bandwidth is highly available. Some protocols, such as X.25 (Chapter 7), make use of recognition and retransmission on a link-by-link basis where circuit quality is poor and error performance is critical. Block parity is an example of recognition and retransmission.
· Recognition and forward error correction involve the addition of enough information that the receiving device can make the required corrections without requiring retransmission. While the addition of this redundant information automatically increases overhead relative to the data and, therefore, has a negative effect on the efficiency with which the network resources are used, it enables the receiving device to correct for most errors without requesting a retransmission—which might also be errored. FEC, however, places a load on the computational resources of the receiving device. FEC can be characterized as system intensive, rather than network intensive. FEC often is used in networks where link quality is poor and bandwidth is limited or where latency is high. FEC is used, for example, in cellular and other wireless networks in support of e-mail and Internet access to the Web. Satellite communications often make use of FEC, as the quality of the link is uncertain, bandwidth is limited, and latency is definitely an issue.
6.3.5.1 Echo Checking
Echo checking is one of the earliest means of error detection and correction. The receiving device echoes the received data back to the transmitting device. The transmitting operator can view the data as received and echoed, making corrections as appropriate. But errors also can occur in the transmission of the echoed data, making this approach highly unreliable.
You can characterize echo as very slow and overhead intensive because characters are transmitted one at a time, in asynchronous mode; therefore, the process is bandwidth intensive as well. Further, the error detection and correction process is manual (human to machine) and decidedly unreliable. As a result, contemporary data communications seldom use echo checking.
6.3.5.2 Parity Checking
Parity checking is by far the most commonly used method for error detection and correction because it is used in asynchronous devices such as PCs. Parity refers to the number of marks, or 1 bits, in a character. The network can be set for either odd parity or even parity. Once set, the networked devices always create odd or even data values, character by character or set by set. This less than ideal approach is implemented easily and offers reasonable assurance of data integrity. Parity checking has two dimensions: Vertical Redundancy Checking (VRC) and Longitudinal Redundancy Checking (LRC).
Vertical redundancy checking entails the appending of a parity bit at the end of each transmitted character or value to create an odd or even total mathematical bit value. The letter C, for example, in ASCII, is coded as a bit sequence of 1100001, which is an odd number of marks, or 1 bits. So the parity bit would be a 0 if the network or link is set for odd parity, as that would create an eight-bit byte with the sequence 11000010, thereby retaining the odd parity value. Alternatively, the parity bit would be a 1 if the network is set for even parity, as that would create an eight-bit byte with the sequence 11000011, thereby creating an even parity value. The receiving device executes the same mathematical process to verify that the correct total bit value was received—hence the use of the terms redundancy and checking. Speaking in terms of the logical manner in which humans add numbers physically positioned in columns, the two devices sum the bit values vertically, as represented in Figure 6.15—hence the use of the term vertical. While inexpensive and easily implemented in computers employing asynchronous transmission, this approach is highly unreliable, as two errored bits in a character can yield an undetectable error in a character. Further, VRC provides no inherent means of error correction; VRC often is characterized as send and pray. According to Maria Price La Touche (1824–1906):
There is no greater mistake than to call arithmetic an exact science. There are … hidden laws of number which it requires a mind like mine to perceive. For instance, if you add a sum from the bottom up, and then again from the top down, the result is always different.
Figure 6.15: Example ASCII with VRC and LRC odd parity checking
Longitudinal redundancy checking, or Block Checking Character (BCC), adds another level of reliability because data are viewed in a block or data set. Again, this approach is characterized in terms of the manner in which human beings add numbers in rows across columns, as though the receiving device were viewing the data set in a matrix format. This additional technique of checking the total bit values of the characters on a longitudinal (i.e., horizontal) basis employs the same parity (i.e., odd or even) as does the vertical checking technique (Figure 6.15). While remaining relatively inexpensive and easily implemented in devices employing asynchronous transmission, LRC/BCC adds a significant measure of reliability. Still, it is less than completely reliable, as compensating errors still can occur in nonadjacent characters. Also known as checksum, the LRC is sent as an extra character at the end of each data block [17].
6.3.5.3 Block Parity
The technique of block parity improves considerably on simple parity checking. While Spiral Redundancy Checking (SRC) and interleaving improved on the detection of errors due to increased transmission speeds and more complex modulation techniques, they gave way to Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC), which is commonly employed today.
CRC validates transmission of a set of data, formatted in a block or frame, through the use of a statistical sampling process and a unique mathematical polynomial, both of which are known to the transmitter and receiver. The transmitting device statistically samples the data in the block or frame and applies a 17-bit generator polynomial based on an Euclidean algorithm. The result of that calculation is a description of the text field, which is appended to the block or frame or text as either a 16-or 32-bit value. The receiving device executes the identical process, comparing the results of its process to the CRC value appended to the data block. The result is an integrity factor of 10-14; in other words, the possibility of an undetected error is 1 in 100 trillion. By way of example and at a transmission speed of 1 Mbps, one undetected error is expected approximately every 30 years!
An unerrored block or frame is ACKnowledged by the receiving device through the transmission of an ACK, whereas an errored block or frame is Negatively AcK-nowledged with a NAK. A NAK prompts the transmitting device to retransmit that specific block or frame, which has been stored in buffer memory. The transmission of an ACK by the receiving device cues the sending device that the block or frame of data can be erased from buffer memory and the next block or frame of data then can be sent.
CRC is relatively memory and processor intensive, but it is easily accommodated in high-order computers that benefit from synchronous transmission techniques. As CRC ensures that data transmission is virtually error free, it is considered mandatory in most sophisticated computer communications environments.
6.3.5.4 Forward Error Correction
Forward Error Correction (FEC) involves the addition of redundant information embedded in the data set so the receiving device can detect errors and correct them without requiring a retransmission [18]. The two most commonly employed techniques are Hamming and BCH (Bose, Chaudhuri, and Hocquengham).
While even more memory and processor intensive than CRC, the costs of CPU cycles and gigabytes of memory are so low in contemporary computers that FEC really is not much of a cost issue. FEC enables the receiving device to correct for errors in transmission, thereby avoiding most requirements for retransmission of errored blocks or frames of data. As a result, FEC improves the efficiency, or throughput, of the network, reducing transmission costs in the process, and without sacrificing data integrity. So, FEC is used in applications where bandwidth is at a premium and errors are common, with text messaging over cellular networks being a prime example.
6.3.6 Data Compression
As the length of the data sets increases, the distances over which they travel increase, and the likelihood of errors in transmission increases accordingly, data compression becomes sensible. Additionally, data compression can significantly reduce the bandwidth required to transmit a set of data. Regardless of the level of bandwidth available in even the most capable networks, bandwidth always has an associated cost. Data compression techniques can include formatting, redundant characters, commonly used characters, and commonly used strings of characters:
· Formatting of the data need not be transmitted across the network. In a basic example, data compression might involve the removal of formatting from a commonly used form, such as an expense report. Such formatting can involve a large amount of redundant data because the receiving device can reformat the data easily, placing the various fields of data in the appropriate places on the form, which resides in memory. An excellent example is that of access to the Internet and the Web through client/server software such as America Online, Netscape Navigator, or Microsoft Internet Explorer. In each case, many of the graphic-intensive screens are stored on the client workstation. When accessing the various Internet portals, therefore, you do not need to download the full set of graphics. This process is extremely bandwidth intensive and, therefore, ultimately translates into long delays and higher costs. Rather, only the updated information must be downloaded.
· Redundant data can be identified easily by the transmitter and communicated to the receiver. This approach is also known as string coding, yielding compression factors of as much as 4: 1. An excellent example is that of fax modem compression algorithms, which use various methods of run-length encoding. As transmitting fax modems scan a document from left to right and from top to bottom, they can quickly sense a run of whitespace. Then, the transmitting modem notes that "nothing" is being transmitted and notes the length of the run of nothing, all in a few bits stored in an internal buffer. Once some "real" data appear, the modem notes this fact and begins to send corresponding bits to the internal buffer. After a specific number of bits are stored in the buffer, the modem packs them into a frame that it transmits. As runs of nothing and runs of real data reoccur, the modem recognizes that fact and adjusts accordingly. Very quickly, therefore, the transmitting modem can transmit a document with lots of whitespace, with that transmission requiring very little bandwidth through the supporting network. (Try faxing a white sheet of paper. Then try faxing a document of very dense text. You will immediately see the difference in transmission time.)
· Commonly used characters are easily identified and abbreviated through the use of an identifier and a smaller set of bits, similar to the technique used by Samuel Morse in the development of Morse code. Huffman coding is commonly used in this instance, yielding compaction factors of 2:1 or 4:1.
· Commonly used strings of characters similarly can be identified and transmitted in abbreviated form. Such an approach relies on the probability of character occurrence following a specific character (e.g., Q is generally followed by U). Markov source and other techniques address this potential.
6.3.7 Asynchronous Data Link Control Protocols
Asynchronous Data Link Control (DLC) protocols are used primarily for low-speed data communications between PCs and other very small host computers. Framing occurs at the byte level, with each byte surrounded by a start bit (a 0 bit) and a stop bit (a 1 bit). A parity bit often accompanies each character as well. Telex transmission incorporates an additional stop bit.
Kermit and XMODEM are asynchronous protocols, organizing information into 128-byte packets. Kermit also uses CRC error control. The data also can be blocked at the application level, and adding the technique of LRC can complement VRC for improved error control.
6.3.8 Bit-versus Byte-Oriented Synchronous Protocols
Two general types of data communications protocols exist—byte oriented and bit oriented. While the performance characteristics of byte-oriented protocols are acceptable for many applications, bit-oriented protocols are much more appropriate for communication-intensive applications in which the integrity of the transmitted data is critical.
Byte-oriented protocols require an entire byte to communicate a command signal to the target station. Byte-oriented protocols communicate value strings in byte formats, generally of eight bits per byte. Control characters are embedded in the header and trailer of each byte or block of data. As byte-oriented protocols are overhead intensive, they are used exclusively in older computer protocols at the second layer, or link layer. Byte-oriented protocols generally are asynchronous and HDX, operating over dial-up, two-wire circuits. One example includes Binary Synchronous Communications (Bisync, or BSC).
Bit-oriented protocols can change a single bit with a frame control byte to send a different command to a target station. Bit-oriented protocols transmit information in a much larger bit stream, with opening and closing flags identifying the separation of the text from the control information, which addresses control issues associated with the entire data set. The much less overhead-intensive, bit-oriented protocols are usually synchronous and FDX and operate over dedicated, four-wire circuits. Examples include IBM's Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) and the ISO's High-level Data Link Control (HDLC).
6.3.8.1 Binary Synchronous Communications
IBM developed Bisync in 1966 as a byte-oriented protocol that frames the data with control codes that apply to the entire set of data. Bisync organizes data into blocks of up to 512 characters, which are sent over the link sequentially (one at a time). An ACK or a NAK is transmitted from the receiving terminal to the transmitting device following the receipt of each block. Error control is based on a Block Checking Character (BCC) that is transmitted along with the data; the receiving device independently calculates the BCC and compares the two calculations.
The Bisync block consists of synchronizing bits, data, and control characters sent in a continuous data stream block by block. While there are six basic Bisync block formats, the elements of a generic Bisync block, as illustrated in Figure 6.16, are as follows and in sequence [19–21]:
· PAD: A PA D ding character (hexadecimal 55) may be sent as the first character to alert the receiving device of the transmission of a block of data and to ensure that the receiving device is in step with the data bits.
· SYN: SYN chronizing characters (usually two) establish character synchronization between the transmission and the receiving devices. There must be enough bit transitions to allow the receiver to confirm the bit rate.
· SOH: A Start-Of-H eader control character precedes the routing information.
· Header: The Header field contains one or more octets of information indicating the address of the transmitting device.
· STX: A Start-of-TeXt control character indicates the beginning of the data.
· Text: The Text field, aka payload, is the data being transmitted. This field can be up to 512 octets in length.
· ETX: An End-of-TeXt control character indicates the end of the data.
· BCC: Block Check C haracters detect errors. There are one or two BCCs.
· EOT or PAD: An End Of T ransmission character or PADding character (hexadecimal FF) character trails the transmission to ensure the receipt of all previous characters and to indicate the end of the block.
In terms of raw efficiency, Bisync is approximately 98 percent efficient if the text field is fully packed with 512 octets of data, as there are only 10 or so octets of control information. As Bisync is a HDX protocol, however, it is considered to be very inefficient by today's FDX standards due to the turnaround times involved.
6.3.8.2 Synchronous Data Link Control
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC), developed in the mid-1970s, is at the heart of IBM's System Network Architecture (SNA). SDLC is a bit-oriented, point-to-point protocol that uses bit strings to represent characters. SDLC uses CRC error correction techniques—specifically known as Frame Check Sequence (FCS) here. SDLC supports high-speed transmission and generally employs FDX, dedicated circuits. SDLC works either in HDX or FDX, supports satellite transmission protocols, and works in point-to-point or multipoint network configurations.
Up to 128 frames can be sent in a string, with each frame containing up to seven blocks, each up to 512 characters. Each block within each frame is checked individually for errors. Errored blocks must be identified as such to the transmitting device within a given time limit or they are assumed to have been received error free. As a carefully timed, point-to-point protocol, SDLC depends on high-performance circuits, usually in the form of dedicated leased lines.
The SDLC frame consists of synchronizing bits, data, and control characters sent in a continuous data stream frame by frame. The specific elements of the SDLC frame (Figure 6.17) are as follows and in sequence [19–21]. The same format applies to High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) frames and X.25 packets:
· Flag (F): Flag bits, in a specific eight-bit pattern, alert the receiving device to the transmission of the frame, thereby initiating the error-checking procedures. The most commonly used flag character is 01111110 (7E in hexadecimal).
· Station Address (A): This address field of eight bits identifies the specific target device for which the frame is intended, a group address for multiple target terminals, or a broadcast address to all terminals. This field also can be used to distinguish commands from responses.
· Control (C): The eight-bit control field identifies the type of frame being transmitted. An information frame is used for the transfer of messages, frame numbering of contiguous frames in a message, and so on. A supervisory frame is used for purposes such as to indicate a detected error in transmission, acknowledge that frames have been received without error, request the transmission of specified frames, and order the transmitting device to stop sending.
· Information (I): This text field (aka, message field, data field, or payload) of variable length contains the information (data) or request being transmitted. This field also can include a format identifier, logical channel group number, packet-type identifier, and packet sequence numbers. In total, the information field can contain as many as seven blocks, each of which can contain as many as 512 octets of data, for a total of 4096 octets.
· Frame Check Sequence: This 16- or 32-bit field contains the CRC character sequence used to check the integrity of the transmitted address and control information as well as the data.
· Flag (F): Flag bits, in a specific eight-bit pattern, alert the receiving device to the end of transmission of the frame, thereby terminating the error-checking procedures. The most commonly used flag character is 01111110 (7E in hexadecimal).
Considering that the information field can contain as many as 4096 octets of payload and that the control fields involve only 6 or 8 octets (8 at full payload), the SDLC frame can be as much as 99.8 percent efficient, at least theoretically. There is some overhead in the information field, of course, but even then the SDLC frame is 95–97 percent or so efficient, which is remarkable.
6.3.8.3 High-Level Data Link Control
The ISO developed HDLC as a superset of IBM's SDLC and the U.S. National Bureau of Standards' (NBS) (now National Institute of Standards and Technology, or NIST) Advanced Data Communications Control Procedures (ADCCP). A version of HDLC is the Link Access Procedure—Balanced (LAP-B), which is used in packet-switched networks conforming to the ITU-T X.25 Recommendation. While HDLC was built on SDLC and is very similar, the two generally are not compatible, depending on the framing conventions in the specific HDLC implementation.
6.4 NETWORK ARCHITECTURES
A network architecture defines the communications products and services that ensure the various components can work together. Early on, even the various systems of a given manufacturer did not interoperate, let alone afford connectivity with the products of other manufacturers. While IBM's Systems Network Architecture (SNA) and the Digital Equipment Corporation's Digital Network Architecture (DNA), aka DECnet, architectures solved these internal problems, they still did not interoperate. Truly open-system architectures still remain in the distant future, although great strides have been made in this regard through the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model fostered by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO).
A number of standard computer network architectures have been defined, many of which segregate various functions into discrete layers of responsibility for ease of development and management. In addition to SNA and DECnet, network architecture examples include Xerox Networking System (XNS); Advanced Research Projects Agency Network (ARPANET), the U.S. government–sponsored predecessor to the commercial network we now call the Internet; U.S. Department of Defense's Defense Data Network (DDN); and the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model.
Layered models serve to enhance the development and management of a network architecture. While they primarily address issues of data communications, they also include some data processing activities at the upper layers. These upper layers address application software processes, presentation format, and establishment of user sessions. Each independent layer, or level, of a network architecture addresses different functions and responsibilities. The layers work together, as a whole, to maximize the performance of the process. The various functions address the functions of data transfer, flow control, sequencing, error detection, and notification.
Data transfer enables the transfer of data from one node to another. Included are such issues as normal or expedited data flow; packet, block, or frame sizing; and data assembly and segmentation. Flow control controls the pace of packets through the network to prevent a device or link from being overwhelmed with data and to reduce congestion and the resulting degradation of network performance. Sequencing of the data packets is required where packets may take different routes between nodes. Error detection is required to ensure data integrity. Notification provides for the advice from receiver to transmitter of the receipt of packets and their condition.
6.4.1 Systems Network Architecture
Developed in 1974 by IBM, SNA was a five-level design architecture that has grown into a seven-layer model. Although similar, SNA is not compatible with the OSI model. SNA comprises software and hardware interfaces that permit various IBM systems and software to communicate. SNA includes network nodes, physical units, and logical units:
· Nodes are physical devices in the SNA network. Nodes can include computers, communications processors (e.g., FEPs), terminal controllers, and terminals.
· Physical Units (PUs) manage the communications hardware and software, participating in the controlling and routing of network communications. All physical devices are assigned a PU type (1, 2, 3, or 5) that identifies the level of the device (i.e., terminal, controller, communications processor, or host node) and its origin (i.e., IBM/SNA or non-IBM/SNA).
· Logical Units (LUs) manage communications software for communications with end users. A logical unit session is an end-to-end communication between an end-user terminal and the originating application residing in the host. LU 6.2, for example, supports peer-to-peer communications between intelligent devices, without requiring the host to assume responsibility for communications support activities. LU 6.2 is also known as Advanced Program-to-Program Communications (APPC).
6.4.2 Open Systems Interconnection Model
The OSI Reference Model is a layered architecture (see Figure 6.18) consisting of a set of international networking standards known collectively as X.200. Developed by the ISO, the basic process began in 1977 and was completed in 1983. Note: At that point the ISO heavily promoted the model as a full standard. The U.S. government spent billions of dollars on Government Open Systems Interconnection Profile (GOSIP), a specification that essentially required all government networking products to be OSI compliant. Digital Equipment Corporation, IBM, Unisys, and other large and reputable organizations invested billions of dollars in total to gain OSI compliance. Despite all the time, money, and energy devoted to OSI, the standard never gained any real traction. At that point, DECnet, SNA, TCP/IP, and a few other standards seemed to have satisfied most people's appetite for standards initiatives. The Europeans were certainly an exception, however. The European Computer Manufacturers Association (ECMA) was very instrumental in the development of the OSI model, in large part because of the fact that the multinational nature of Western Europe had led to substantial difficulty in the interconnection of computers and computer networks. Not only was the OSI model seen as a solution to this problem, but the European Union (EU) actually legally imposed the model for some applications. Eventually, TCP/IP pushed OSI aside as a standard, but the reference model remains valuable.
Figure 6.18: OSI Reference Model
The OSI model defines a set of common rules that computers of disparate origin can use to exchange information (communicate). As is the case with SNA and other such proprietary architectures, the model is layered to segment software responsibilities, with supporting software embedded in each node to provide an interface between layers. Specific levels of service can be negotiated between nodes.
The transmitting device uses the top layer, at which point the data are placed into a packet, prepended by a header. The data and header, known collectively as a Protocol Data Unit (PDU), are handled by each successively lower layer as the data move across the network to the receiving node. At the receiving node, the data work way up the layered model; successively higher layers strip off the header information. The seven layers of the OSI Reference Model are as follows:
· Layer Seven (Application Control): Provides support services for user and application tasks. File transfer, interpretation of graphic formats and documents, and document processing are supported at this level. X.400 e-mail messaging, for example, takes place at Layer Seven. TCP/IP application protocols such as Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), Telnet, and File Transfer Protocol (FTP) also take place at layer 7.
· Layer Six (Presentation Control): Performs functions related to the format and display of received data by terminals and printers. Functions herein include data formatting, code set (e.g., Baudot, ASCII, EBCDIC, and Unicode), code set conversion [e.g., HTML to ASCII], text compression and decompression (e.g., WinZip), and encryption (e.g., DES).
· Layer Five (Session Control): Formats the data for transfer between end nodes, provides session restart and recovery and general maintenance of the session from end to end. This layer is considered by some to be of little or no consequence and is often disregarded and considered to be a function of layer 6.
· Layer Four (Transport Control): Responsible for maintaining the end-to-end integrity and control of the session. Data are accepted from the Session Control layer and passed through to the Network Control layer. Long message blocks are divided into shorter message blocks for transmission, sequence numbers are added, checksums are calculated and appended, retransmissions are generated in the event of errored message blocks or timeouts, and security is added. Example protocols that can be used at this layer include Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), User Datagram Protocol (UDP), and the five classes of the OSI Transport Protocol (TP). These protocols ensure end-to-end integrity of the data in a session. The X.25 packet-switching protocol operates at layers 1–4.
· Layer Three (Network Control): Comprises software that addresses and sequences the PDUs and transports them to the ultimate destination, setting up the appropriate paths between the various nodes. At this layer, message routing, error detection, and control of internodal traffic are managed. The Internetwork Protocol (IP) operates at this layer.
· Layer Two (Data Link Control): Establishes the communications link between individual devices over a physical link or channel. At this level, framing, error control, flow control, data sequencing, timeout levels, and data formatting occur. HDLC, LAP-B, LAPD are at this level. Frame Relay is a layer 2 protocol. LANs operate at layers 2 and 1, and Network Interface Cards (NICs) cut across portions of these two layers.
· Layer One (Physical Control): Defines the electrical and mechanical aspects of the interface of the device to a physical transmission medium, such as twisted pair, coax, or fiber. Communications hardware and software drivers are found at this layer, as are electrical specifications such as EIA/TIA-232 (nee RS-232). T/E-carrier runs at layer 1. Synchronous Optical NETwork (SONET) and Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) run at layers 1 and 2.
6.5 SECURITY
The only secure computer is one that is turned off, locked in a safe, and buried 20 feet down in a secret location … and I'm not completely confident of that one either.
Beruce Schneier, security technologist and author
Security is an issue of prime importance across all dimensions of communications and networks, but perhaps most importantly in the world of data communications. In the traditional data world of mainframes in glass houses, security was controlled very tightly. In the contemporary world of distributed processing and networked computer resources, security is much more difficult to develop and control. Perhaps the greatest strength of networks is that they enable information to be shared; perhaps the greatest weakness of networks is that they enable information to be shared. The trick, of course, is to permit only legitimate users to share. Security encompasses a number of dimensions, including physical security, authentication, authorization, port security, transmission security, and encryption.
6.5.1 Physical Security
Physical security involves access control, that is, control over the individuals who have access to the facilities in which the systems reside. Methods of access restriction include security guards, locks and keys, electronic combination locks, and/or electronic card key systems that require additional input, such as a Personal Identification Number (PIN). The latter is preferable because the system can maintain a record of specific access. Physical security also entails some decidedly low-tech tools such as document shredders and burn bags, which jointly serve to make paper documents and electronic media unusable after they serve their purposes.
6.5.2 Authentication
Authentication provides a means by which network managers can validate the identity of those attempting access to computing resources and the data they house. Authentication consists of password protection and intelligent tokens. Password protection can restrict individuals on a site, host, application, screen, and field level. Passwords should consist of an alphanumeric value of reasonably long length and should be changed periodically. A current trend points toward the use of dedicated password servers for password management. Intelligent tokens are one-time pass-words generated by hardware devices and verified by a secure server on the receive side of the communication. They often work on a cumbersome challenge–response basis.
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a highly popular public network authentication service. Developed by Livingston Enterprises and based on a model defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF), RADIUS comprises an authentication server installed on the user's host computer and client protocols. Remote users are authenticated through a series of encrypted communications between the remote client and the centralized server. RADIUS is an open approach that can be modified easily to work with any security system and virtually any communications device. Access via a RADIUS Remote Access Server (RAS) commonly not only requires a password but also the remote computer must be equipped with a smart card reader into which a smart card must be inserted. The smart card must match the password, user ID, and a PIN before access is granted.
6.5.3 Authorization
Authorization provides a means of controlling which legitimate users have access to which resources. Authorization involves complex software that resides on every secured computer on the network; ideally, it provides single sign-on capability. Authorization systems include Kerberos, Sesame, and Access Manager:
· Kerberos, the best-known authorization software, makes use of private-key authentication. Developed by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT), Kerberos is available free, although commercial versions exist. IBM's Kryptoknight, for example, is a Kerberos variant. Kerberos was named for the three-headed dog, Cerberus, that guarded the gates of Hades in Greek mythology.
· Sesame (Secure European System for Applications in a Multivendor Environ-ment) was developed by the ECMA (European Computer Manufacturers Association). It is flexible, open, and intended for large, heterogeneous network computing environments. It also is highly complex and not effective for smaller applications.
· Access Manager uses an API for applications, employing scripting. Scripting involves a process of mimicking the log-on procedures of a program, providing basic levels of security for small networks.
6.5.4 Port Security
Port security is essential to deny unauthorized remote access. Passive devices report on unauthorized access, usage anomalies, and so on. Active devices, which are preferable, act to deny access to unauthorized users and disable ports if user-definable parameters (e.g., number of access attempts) are exceeded.
6.5.5 Transmission Security
Transmission security is critical to ensure that unauthorized entities are not permitted to intercept the information as it traverses the network. Transmission of data is especially insecure over analog links because analog transmission does not lend itself to encryption, although encryption can be performed in the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE). Wireless transmission is inherently insecure, although digital wireless systems generally support signal encryption. Transmission security is virtually ensured over coaxial cable and other shielded and screened copper media and, especially, over fiber-optic cable because these media cannot easily be tapped. In order to maximize security, however, it is necessary that the data be encrypted.
6.5.6 Encryption
Encryption involves scrambling and perhaps compressing the data prior to transmission; the receiving device is provided with the necessary logic to decrypt and decompress the transmitted information. Encryption logic generally resides in firmware included in stand-alone devices, although it can be built into virtually any device. Encryption logic, for example, often is incorporated into routers, which can encrypt data on a packet-by-packet basis. Encryption comes in two basic flavors: private key and public key. Private key is a symmetric encryption method that uses the same key to encrypt and decrypt data and requires that the key be kept secret. Public key is an asymmetric encryption method with two keys—an encryption (encoding) key that can be used by all authorized network users and a decryption (decoding) key that is kept secret. Data encryption standards include Data Encryption Standard (DES), Triple DES, and Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).
6.5.7 Firewalls
Firewalls comprise application software that can reside in a communication router, server, or some other device. That device physically and/or logically is a first point of access into a networked system. On an active basis, the device can block access to unauthorized entities, effectively acting as a security firewall. Firewalls can use one or more basic approaches to access control. A packet-filtering firewall examines all data packets, forwarding or dropping individual packets based on predefined rules that specify where a packet is permitted to go and in consideration of both the authenticated identification of the user and the originating address of the request. Proxy firewalls act as intermediaries for user access requests by setting up a second connection to the resource. That second connection can be established at the application layer (layer 7) by an application proxy or at the session (layer 5) or transport (layer 4) layer by a circuit relay firewall. A stateful inspection firewall examines packets, notes the port numbers that they use for each connection, and shuts down those ports once the connection is terminated. Firewalls are the subject of much continuing interest, especially as organizations seek to protect their data from the ravages of hackers and other less than honorable creatures that prowl the Internet [22, 23].
Chapter 7: Conventional Digital and Data Networks
OVERVIEW
In 1816, Mr. Ronalds (afterwards Sir Francis Ronalds) showed that an electric telegraph was possible, and endeavoured to persuade the Government of the importance of his system. The official reply to his appeal was as follows "Mr. Barrow presents his compliments to Mr. Ronalds, and acquaints him, with reference to his note of the third instant, that telegraphs of any kind are now wholly unnecessary, and that no other but the one now in use will be adopted. Admiralty Office, Aug. 5, 1816." The "one in use," here indicated, was the semaphore, … which, it may be mentioned, was quite useless during the night, or when fog prevented the signals being seen.
Wonders of the Universe, The Werner Company, 1899
Data communications began in 1835 with the invention of the first practical telegraph by Samuel F. B. Morse and with his first long-distance message, What hath God wrought! sent from Baltimore, Maryland, to Washington, D.C., in 1844. This simplex (in this context, simplex means one-way, single-channel) device used start and stop signals of varying lengths over uninsulated iron, and later copper, wire. Subsequently, the technology improved to diplex (one-way, two-channel) and qua-traplex (one-way, four-channel). In 1850, there were over 12,000 miles of line operated by 20 different companies offering commercial telegraph service [1]. Western Union dates to 1851 through its predecessor, the Mississippi Valley Printing Telegraph Company, which became the Western Union Telegraph Company in 1856 through a series of acquisitions. Telegraphy enjoyed a monopoly on electronic communications until 1877, when the first telephone networks appeared. Telegraph networks were not only the first data networks but also the only telecommunications networks for 30 years or so. Western Union had the opportunity to acquire American Bell, Alexander Graham Bell's original telephone company, and all its patents for $ 100,000 in 1876 but did not see the value of them. When presented with the opportunity, William Orton, president of Western Union at the time, asked what must most certainly be one of the least profound business questions of all time, What could this company make of an electrical toy? [2]. (Note: I figure that $ 100,000 at an annual interest rate of 3 percent, compounded monthly is $ 4,916,260.18 in 2006 dollars, which is a bargain. At 6 percent, that $ 100,000 investment would be worth $ 239,362,685.57 today, which, although a considerable sum of money, is still a bargain.)
According to the minutes of a Western Union meeting (ca. 1876):
Bell expects that the public will use his instrument without the aid of trained operators. Any telegraph engineer will at once see the fallacy of this plan. The public simply cannot be trusted to handle technical communications equipment. Bell's instrument uses nothing but the voice, which cannot be captured in concrete form … we leave it to you to judge whether any sensible man would transact his affairs by such means of communications. In conclusion, the committee feels that is must advise against any investment whatever in Bell's scheme.
After all, the telephone was far too technical for the average person. Somehow, the average person was able to overcome that obstacle, and the telephone networks quickly overtook the telegraph networks in terms of size, traffic, revenue, and virtually every other measure. But the telephone networks were limited to voice, and the telegraph networks carried all the data traffic—at least for 100 years or so.
Bell's invention proved itself and his company thrived over the next few years. Western Union continued to lease telegraph lines and supplied its customers with various kinds of telegraph keys, printing telegraphs, and dial telegraphs, some of which could transmit 60 words a minute. Western Union believed that these instruments could never be replaced by a scientific oddity such as the telephone until the Gold and Stock Company, one of its subsidiaries, reported that several of its instruments had been superseded by telephones. Western Union quickly realized its mistake, challenged Bell's patents in court, and formed the American Speaking-Telephone Company. Western Union announced that it had "the only original telephone" and was ready to supply "superior telephones with all the latest improvements made by the original inventors" (Dolbear, Gray, and Edison). Those ridiculous statements lifted Bell's invention from the status of scientific toy to article of commerce as businesses began to take the telephone seriously [2]. Western Union's patent attorney finally convinced the company that it could not win the lawsuit and encouraged them to settle out of court. In the final treaty (1879) between the two companies, Western Union agreed to admit that the Bell patent was the original, to admit that his patents were valid, and to retire from the telephone business. The Bell Company agreed to buy the Western Union telephone system (56,000 telephones in 55 cities), to pay the Western Union a royalty of 20 percent on all telephone rentals associated with that system, and to keep out of the telegraph business. The agreement remained in force for 17 years [2].
As noted in Chapter 6, Western Union first offered teletypewriter service in 1923 and telegraph companies introduced rotary dial telex services in 1935. AT&T introduced TetetypeWriter eXchange (TWX), a high-speed dialup telex service in 1930. Telegraph, telex, and TWX networks were all separate and distinct from, or at least were distinct physical partitions of, the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). That approach worked well for a number of years. After all, there were not a lot of computers and certainly not much need to network them. In 1943 Thomas Watson, Sr., Chairman of IBM, said, "I think there is a world market for maybe five computers." Although his vision of the future might have occasionally been blurred and the quotation is questionable, Thomas Watson clearly was an extraordinary businessman. He and later his son, Thomas Watson, Jr., led IBM to a position of leadership in the data processing industry, worldwide—and they sold a lot more than five computers. Increasingly, it became necessary to network those computers, and the PSTN seemed a logical way to do that. At this point, it is appropriate to revisit the PSTN and reexamine its characteristics, particularly as they relate to its application to data communications in the 1950s:
· Voice Oriented: The PSTN was designed for voice, only. Although data communications precedes voice, telegraphy (and later telex and TWX) always took place over separate networks, or at least separate physical network partitions. Early data communications relied largely on having a solid copper path for the entire length of the circuit, so the end devices could use the loop current. As voice over the PSTN might be amplified or go through transformers or other devices, there might not be a hard copper path end to end. So, any data communications taking place over the PSTN would have to make some adjustments.
· Analog: The PSTN was entirely analog in nature. Although the first digital computer, the complex-number calculator, was invented in 1939, digital transmission systems were not invented and trialed until the 1950s and not placed into commercial use until 1962. Analog transmission and switching systems are error prone and relatively slow in data communications applications as compared to digital systems.
· Voice Grade: Bandwidth was limited in the PSTN, with the entire network oriented to voice-grade communications in channels 4 kHz wide.
· Transmission Media: Copper predominated in the PSTN of the 1950s. Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) was widely used in the local loop, coaxial cable was heavily used for interoffice and long-haul trunking, and some amount of analog microwave was used in long-haul applications. Neither fiber optics nor Free-Space Optics (FSO) were available at the time.
· Duplex: The PSTN was Full-Duplex (FDX) in nature, which is consistent with the requirements of conversational voice. Certainly, not all data communications applications took advantage of FDX or even Half-Duplex (HDX) transmission mode in the 1950s, but they certainly did not suffer from the network's ability to support it. The core of the network was four-wire and the local loop largely two-wire, much as it is today.
· Circuit Switched: The PSTN was entirely circuit switched at the time, with the exception of leased lines, of course. Circuit switching is entirely appropriate for uncompressed, real-time voice communications and for data communications applications such as large file transfers that involve continuous circuit usage for long periods of time.
· Ubiquitous and Affordable: Since the Federal Communications Act of 1934, the PSTN rate and tariff structure in the United States has included a complex set of cross-subsidies to ensure that basic telephone service is available almost universally and at reasonable cost, even in remote, rural, and high-cost areas. So, the PSTN in the United States is virtually ubiquitous and was so in the 1950s. The PSTN was widely available in many other developed countries as well.
· Interconnected: Interconnection is fundamental to the PSTN, which provides for flexible connection between voice terminals, virtually regardless of location. Local Exchange Carriers (LECs), IntereXchange Carriers (IXCs), and inter-national carriers all have been interconnected for many years. Many data net-working applications do not demand full interconnection at this level but do not suffer because of it, issues of security aside.
In the late 1950s, large organizations (initially in North America) desired the ability to move data over telephone lines. This was first accomplished with a variation of the IBM 729 tape drive, which interfaced with the analog PSTN through a matched pair of Bell datasets (1957) [3], or DataPhones (1959) [4], via acoustic couplers and telephone sets. These early modems operated over the analog PSTN at 300 bps and, later, 1200 bps, which was incredibly fast at the time. At that point, voice and data networks began to merge. Datasets quickly spread around the world, rented by the telcos and PTTs to end users until deregulation afforded users the option of acquiring and interconnecting such equipment. The original datasets connected to the PSTN through a Data Access Arrangement (DAA) device that served as a coupler, or protector, to protect the network from high signal levels, out-of-band frequencies, and aberrant voltages. This protection is incorporated into contemporary modems and other devices, which are standardized and regulated by the ITU-T on an inter-national basis and by the U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and other national and regional regulatory bodies.
The telcos began to digitize their networks in the 1960s, as digital technology became reliable and inexpensive enough to support telecommunications applications and as the requirement surfaced for increased bandwidth in the carrier networks. Digital transmission facilities, in the form of T-carrier (North America) and E-carrier (Europe), increased the traffic capacity of existing facilities. In the 1970s, analog Electronic Common Control (ECC) switches began to be replaced with fully digital switches. Data transmission at relatively high speeds and over fully digital networks became a reality, although a number of years passed before such capability became widely available.
Clearly, digital transmission offers significant advantages, especially for data transmission. Those advantages include increased bandwidth and bandwidth utilization, improved error performance and increased throughput, and enhanced management and control. This chapter focuses on conventional digital data networking options, which include dedicated leased lines, circuit switching, and packet switching. Specifically, those technologies and service offerings include Dataphone Digital Service (DDS), Switched 56, classic Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) on the PSTN, digital carrier systems (T-carrier and E-carrier), X.25 and packet switching, and Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN). In later chapters I provide a detailed introduction into more recent data networking options, including Frame Relay (FR), Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), and Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
7.1 DATAPHONE DIGITAL SERVICE
AT&T introduced Dataphone Digital Service (DDS), also known as Digital Data Service and SubRate Digital Loop (SRDL), in 1974 [3], in response to the increasingly obvious need to interconnect mainframe computers over a wide area. The term DDS now is used generically to describe an end-to-end, fully digital, dedicated service provided by most incumbent carriers. DDS is widely deployed in the United States and Canada and many other developed countries and is intended for relatively high speed data transport applications between purely digital devices (i.e., computers). Employing specially conditioned, dedicated, leased-line circuits provided to user organizations by the carriers, a DDS configuration may be either point to point or multipoint. In either event, all network control is the responsibility of a designated head-end system. The head end, traditionally in the form of a Front-End Processor (FEP) or, in more contemporary terms, a communications server, controls all access to the network through a process of polling the remote devices. Additionally, all communications must pass through the head end; in other words, devices cannot communicate directly as they can in a mesh network, where all locations are interconnected directly.
DDS is intended for FDX synchronous communications provided over four-wire circuits between computing systems that communicate intensively (i.e., frequently and passing significant volumes of data). The DDS network provides network timing and synchronization through a master clock, which ensures that all clocks in all slaved network nodes operate at the same bit rate, or clock speed, and at the same clock phase. The Data Communications Equipment (DCE) extracts timing from the received signal. DCE is in the form of a Data Service Unit/Channel Service Unit (DSU/CSU) that operates at the full line rate or on a subrate basis (lower speed), as required. Note: While the DDS circuit operates in FDX, HDX and simplex applications are supported. In fact, a large percentage of the DDS applications were for HDX polling.
Transmission rates vary, within limits, according to the user organization's requirements. Bandwidth generally is available at line rates of 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19.2 kbps, 56 kbps, or 64 kbps and digital carrier rates of 1.544 Mbps (T1) and 2.048 Mbps (E-1). Note here that the DDS signals actually are carried inside T-carrier or E-carrier channels in the backbone carrier networks. (I discuss T-carrier and E-carrier later in this chapter.)
While the cost of DDS circuits varies according to specific carrier tariffs and pricing strategies, cost is sensitive to both the distance between the points of termination and the level of bandwidth. Such is the case with all dedicated leased-line services. A traditional rule of thumb is that DDS generally is cost effective in applications that require communications between two locations, for a total of one hour per day or more, at a rate of 56 kbps. That equation clearly is sensitive to local rates and the availability of alternative services, such as Frame Relay.
The cost equation changes, of course, where there is a requirement to interconnect multiple locations in a multipoint network configuration. A multipoint circuit also is known as a multidrop circuit in telco parlance because local loop connections historically are dropped from poles. Multipoint circuits also are referred to as fantail circuits because they fan out at the tail end, that is, the end distant from the head end. As noted in Figure 7.1, a headquarters data center in New York might be connected to a regional data center in Seattle, some 2500 miles west of New York. Field offices in Everett (approximately 30 miles north of Seattle) and Tacoma (approximately 30 miles south of Seattle) can take advantage of the same coast-to-coast circuit very cost effectively, since the incremental circuit mileage is short and the associated cost of those additional drops therefore, is low. [Note: The circuits are interconnected in Central Offices (COs) but bypass the CO switches, as the service is dedicated, rather than switched. DDS and other dedicated services use these COs simply as wire centers rather than switching centers.]
Figure 7.1: DDS leased lines connecting data centers in New York and Seattle, with drops to Everett and Tacoma
In such a multipoint network, the head end addresses each remote system con-nected to the circuit on the basis of a unique logical address and in a user-definable and variable polling sequence. The target device recognizes its address and responds across the network, while all other devices remain silent. At that point, the two computer systems conduct a dialog until such time as either the data transfer is complete or the head end truncates the communication in order to address other devices according to its programmed polling schedule. Automatic teller machines traditionally were connected to the central bank in such a manner, and many such networks remain in place. In a typical scenario, the central computer polls the individual automatic teller machines, downloads the user's request for a cash with-drawal, and matches the account number and PIN for authentication purposes. It then queries the centralized database to determine the assigned level of withdrawal privileges and the current account balance and authorizes or denies the cash withdrawal.
DDS provides excellent reliability, which generally is in the range of five nines, that is, 99.999 percent. You should note, however, that all dedicated services are susceptible to catastrophic failure from such causes as cable-seeking backhoes. Therefore, network redundancy must be considered in the form of either backup DDS circuits or some alternative network service such as modem dial-up, Switched 56, or ISDN.
From an applications perspective, DDS is used for relatively intensive data-only communications applications between devices at fixed physical addresses. In such an environment, it can be highly cost effective since usage charges do not apply to network traffic over dedicated circuits. Typical applications include connecting data centers for purposes of file transfer or data backup. Image transfer and other bandwidth-intensive applications such as Computer-Aided Design (CAD) can make cost-effective use of DDS circuits, also benefiting from the bandwidth and excellent error performance offered by the dedicated digital circuits. DDS also serves to connect e-mail and Group IV facsimile servers in a messaging network. DDS traditionally is used in intensive transaction processing environments, as in the automatic teller machine example stated earlier. Department store chains traditionally deployed extensive DDS networks to support transaction processing applications between the centralized data processing center and the retail stores. Many of those networks remain in place. Similarly, oil companies traditionally had large and complex DDS networks in place at gas (petrol) stations with pay-at-the-pump options, with the tail circuits connecting large numbers of retail outlets to a long-haul circuit that terminated in the data center. The oil companies still commonly make use of short-haul, multidrop circuits to connect multiple outlets to a central retail outlet that is equipped with a satellite dish. The long-haul portion of the connection to the data center is provided over satellite facilities.
7.2 SWITCHED 56
Switched 56 (kbps service) is the popular term for Digital Switched Access (DSA), even though 64-kbps service is available in some areas. Switched 56 is a circuit-switched digital service intended generally for the same applications as is DDS, although it is more cost effective for less intensive communications. Although the service is switched, rather than dedicated, most of the general characteristics and all of the components closely resemble those of DDS, with the exception that digital COs are involved in setting up the DSA connections. Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) is in the form of computer systems, which connect to digital local loops through DCE in the form of a DSU/CSU. Digital exchanges serve to switch the connections (see Figure 7.2), which are provided through digital carrier transmission facilities on the basis of special routing logic.
Figure 7.2: Switched 56-kbps service
The key difference between DDS and Switched 56 is that the calls are switched between physical locations on the basis of a logical address, which is the computer equivalent of a voice telephone number. In fact, Switched 56 is the digital data equivalent of a circuit-switched voice call through the PSTN. Based on specific routing instructions contained in programmed logic, the Public Data Network (PDN) switches establish the end-to-end connection over entirely digital circuits. (Note: In this case, the PDN really is just a physical and logical partition of the PSTN.) The call is set up, maintained, and torn down much like a voice call. Further, the call is priced similarly. In other words and depending on the pricing strategy of the carrier, the cost of the call either is priced on a blended, flat-rate basis or is priced sensitive to distance, duration, time of day, and day of year. As the carriers' Switched 56 service networks typically are not interconnected, calling generally is limited to each specific carrier domain unless the user has made arrangements otherwise.
While DDS is more cost effective for applications in which communications are intensive between specific physical locations, Switched 56 service is more cost effective for communications between locations that communicate less frequently or communicate lesser volumes of data. As Switched 56 calls are switched through the highly redundant carrier networks, rather than relying on vulnerable dedicated circuits as with DDS, Switched 56 services traditionally were employed as a backup to DDS facilities. They are still used for this purpose in some situations, although alternatives such as ISDN are more common in a contemporary context.
7.3 VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS: IN THE CLASSIC SENSE
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs), also known as Software-Defined Networks (SDNs) and Software Defined Data Networks (SDDNs), grew out of the voice world, as did the majority of network technologies. In a purely data context, VPNs are incumbent IXC offerings (e.g., AT&T, Cable & Wireless, and Verizon) that operate much like a voice VPN or Switched 56, although the level of bandwidth provided can be much greater in support of intensive data communications, videoconferencing, or multimedia conferencing. Depending on the carrier, VPNs support the following bandwidth levels on a circuit-switched basis:
· 56/64kbps
· N × 64kbps
· 384kbps
· 768kbps
· 1.544 Mbps (T1) or 2.048 Mbps (E1)
· 44.736 Mbps (Ts) or 34.368 Mbps (E3)
Access to a VPN can take a number of forms, including dedicated digital loops, Switched 56, and ISDN. The IXC VPN service provides priority access and data transport between privileged sites on the basis of a private dialing plan. A wide variety of features are supported, including managed security at the network level. A VPN provides performance similar to that of a dedicated leased-line network, with the additional advantages of flexibility and redundancy. In other words, a Virtual Private Network is not a private network but is virtually so, at least in some respects. These classic VPNs are rapidly being replaced by IP VPNs, which I discuss in later chapters.
7.4 DIGITAL CARRIER SYSTEMS AND NETWORKS
As far back as 1882 Mr. Frank Jacob, Technical Adviser of Messrs. Siemens Bros., designed a plan by which the principle of the Wheatstone Bridge is utilized…. The wires forming the metallic loop should also balance in conductivity, insulation, and capacity. When these conditions are attained, T may speak to T′, and TT to T′T′, without the faintest sound of overhearing being apparent.
William Henry Preece and Juius Maier, The Telephone, Whitaker & Co., 1891
Carrier systems are defined as systems that derive multiple logical channels from a single physical communications path, thereby supporting multiple communications. Initially developed for use within public carrier (i.e., LEC and IXC) networks, the systems provided increased traffic capacity between exchanges without requiring additional transmission facilities. As voice traffic grew dramatically in the post–World War II period, new generations of Central Office Exchanges (COEs) were developed to relieve the strain, and digital carrier systems were developed to relieve the strain on the transmission facilities connecting them [4]. Before exploring digital carrier, we now dedicate a little ink to the history of analog carrier, just to put things in context.
Analog carrier systems first appeared in telephone networks many years before digital carrier systems and actually appeared in telegraph networks years before that. Alexander Graham Bell had been experimenting with the multiple telegraph, or harmonic telegraph, as early as 1872. In 1874, that work led to his interest in electric speech and to the relationship with Thomas A. Watson, his able assistant. The concept of using different tones (i.e., frequencies) for sending different signals simultaneously across the same wire was well appreciated as early as the 1870s, and a number of schemes for accomplishing this were suggested by Bell, Edison, and others. At about the same time in the early 1890s, three different inventors developed practical analog carrier systems for telegraphy based on what we now term Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM). Early work on analog carrier multiplexing for telephony networks was done in the laboratories at American Bell Telephone Company, the predecessor to AT&T, as early as 1894. The first commercial carrier system was installed between Baltimore, Maryland, and Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, in the United States, in 1918. This Type A system provided four carrier channels above the 4-kHz voice band on short-haul open-wire circuits in the frequency range from 5 to 25 kHz and used the same frequency for transmission in both directions, which caused some amount of crosstalk. Type B (1920) systems reduced the number of channels to three above the voice band and used different frequencies for transmission in different directions over short-haul open-wire loops, thereby reducing crosstalk. This Type B system used equivalent four-wire transmission; that is, it was physical two-wire and logical four-wire. Type C (1924) carrier systems increased the bandwidth to support more channels and repeaters could be spaced as far as 120–125 miles, making them the first long-haul carrier systems. Type D (1926) systems were short-haul systems developed for inexpensive rural open-wire applications in support of one two-way channel above the voice band. Type E (1928) systems were developed for voice communications over commercial power lines. This early version of PowerLine Carrier (PLC) proved unreliable, although a few of them were employed by the power utilities for their internal use. Type F systems never made it into commercial application, but Type G (1936) and Type H (1937) systems were developed for various other open-wire applications [5].
The original N-carrier system (1950) was a short-haul carrier system that employed four-wire twisted-pair cable to deliver groups of 12 frequency division multiplexed voice-grade channels for connecting CO exchanges. ON1-and ON2-carrier systems later provided 16 and then 24 channels, respectively. Technology developed further to provide supergroups of 60 channels and master groups of 600 channels [3, 6, 7].
Type J (1938) systems were intended for long-haul open-wire circuits. Type K (1937) systems were the first long-haul systems developed for cable, rather than open wire; nominal repeater spacing was 17 miles.
L-carrier (1941) was quite an improvement, employing coaxial cable and an analog transmission scheme. L5E (1978), the last L-carrier system, used 22 coaxial tubes, in pairs, to carry a total of 132,000 simultaneous voice-grade conversations. Although this was an impressive improvement over N-carrier, the inherent problems of analog transmission were still present. Additionally, the coax cables were expensive and bulky, and the analog Radio Frequency (RF) amplifiers were expensive and prone to failure [3, 6]. At that point, it seemed as though Bell Labs engineers were intent on using up the entire English alphabet on analog carrier. When they developed the first digital carrier, they skipped a few letters. (That's a joke.)
The United States Bell System turned on the first commercial digital carrier system in 1962 under the streets of Chicago, Illinois, where electrical noise from high-tension lines and automotive ignitions interfered with analog systems. The system was designated T1, with the T standing for Terrestrial to distinguish the land transmission from satellite transmission. Bell Laboratories also launched Telstar I, the first communications satellite, in 1962 [7].
The impetus for development of digital carrier and Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) was due to the following factors:
1. Terminal multiplexing equipment could be made compact at low cost and could take maximum advantage of advances in solid-state digital circuit technology through system software and firmware upgrades.
2. Highly reliable techniques could be employed to provision a rugged transmission circuit that did not require complex design procedures and elaborate adjustments. In other words, the system could truly be standardized and would not require tuning in either the design or implementation phases.
3. A variety of services could share the same circuit and without the requirement to base the design on the most sensitive service.
4. Error performance would be improved considerably and would not be sensitive to circuit length, as regenerative repeaters, rather than amplifiers, would be employed [3].
T1 refers to a specific set of cable pairs and digital repeaters spaced every 6000 feet or so. T-carrier was rapidly and extensively deployed throughout the carrier networks, initially for short-haul interexchange trunking. Also known as digroup (digital group), T1 was first offered commercially to end users by AT&T in 1977 on the basis of a special assembly tariff and was added to the interstate DDS Tariff #267 in December 1981 [8]. In 1983, AT&T tariffed T1 under the name Accunet 1.5. T1 provides 24 channels, based on a convenient multiple of 2 × 12 channels, which formed the basis for the original analog N-carrier [3]. (Note: The 24-channel limitation was due to the nature of the ON-carrier vacuum tube technology at the time. Those vacuum tubes were able to support total bandwidth of 96 kHz. Because each voice-grade channel runs at 4 kHz, a vacuum tube capable of 96 kHz could support no more than 24 analog channels. As backward compatibility was an issue and connectivity between new digital T-carrier and legacy analog ON2-carrier was critical, T1 was limited to 24 channels.)
Before proceeding with the discussion of T-carrier, I have to pause for just a few words to reinforce the fact that digital communications goes back to telegraphy and to mention that time division multiplexing dates at least to 1874, although in a crude form. In that year, Jean Maurice Emile Baudot of the French telegraph administration devised an automatic telegraph that involved synchronized rotating distributor arms that switched the use of the telegraph line between four or six sets of equipment at each end of the line. As the distributor arms revolved two or three times a second, they switched the line between the operators, each of whom had access to the line for a fraction of a second, which was just long enough to transmit a five-bit word in Baudot code. On the receiving end of the line was an electromechanical device that printed the messages in Roman type on a paper tape [1]. With that bit of history to put things in context, we can now fast-forward to 1962, and the next major development in digital transmission technology—T-carrier.
7.4.1 T-Carrier Concept
T-carrier is a dedicated, digital, leased-line service offering that employs TDM in order to derive multiple channels from a single four-wire circuit operating in FDX transmission mode. In capsule, T-carrier offers the advantages of digital error performance, increased bandwidth, and improved bandwidth utilization. As is the case with digital services, in general, T-carrier also delivers increased management and control capabilities to the carriers and end users alike. Additionally, T-carrier is medium independent. In other words, it can be provisioned over any of the transmission media (i.e., twisted pair, coax, microwave, satellite, free space optics, or fiber-optic cable), at least at transmission rates of T1 (1.544 Mbps) and below. At the higher rate of T3 (44.736 Mbps), twisted pair is not a suitable transmission medium, except over very short distances, due to issues of signal attenuation.
As is the case with any dedicated service offering, T-carrier cost is sensitive to distance and bandwidth. While T-carrier initially was deployed in support of voice transmission, it supports data, image, and video as well. Further, T-carrier supports any and all such information streams on an unbiased basis. In other words, all bits and bytes are afforded the same level of treatment, which is the uncompromising level of performance demanded by uncompressed voice. As a result, T-carrier offers the advantage of supporting integrated communications across all information types, whether or not they expect that same high level of treatment. As noted in Figure 7.3, T-carrier can obviate the need for multiple voice, facsimile, data, video, and image networks [6, 9].
Figure 7.3: Digital carrier as a replacement for multiple dedicated, leased-line networks
The significance of T-carrier extends well beyond its practical advantages. Specifically, and as the first digital carrier system, it set the standards for digital transmission and switching, including the use of Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) for digitizing analog voice signals. T-carrier not only set the basis for the North American digital hierarchy but also led to the development of similar standards, such as E-carrier in Europe and J-carrier in Japan. Ultimately, the CCITT (now ITU-T) developed international standards recommendations to ensure interconnectivity of national networks. Although T-carrier, E-carrier, and J-carrier are very different in terms of certain specifics of the protocols employed (e.g., transmission rates, encoding techniques, and signaling and control methods), their basic characteristics are much the same.
7.4.2 Channelized T1
The fundamental building block of T-carrier is a 64-kbps channel, referred to as DS-0 (Digital Signal level Zero). Digital carrier is a channelized service, at least in a standard voice implementation. In other words, a single high-capacity digital circuit supports multiple logical channels, with each channel supporting a separate conversation. A T1 circuit, for example, operates at 1.544 Mbps, supporting the standard 24 time division multiplexed information-bearing channels, each with a bit rate of 64 kbps (Figure 7.4). E-1 supports 30 TDM channels of 64 kbps plus 2 separate signaling and control channels; J-1 supports 24 channels, as does T1.
Figure 7.4: Channelized T1, framing convention
The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) set the T-carrier hierarchy standards (see Table 7.1) in its T1.107 specifications. Beginning at the T1 level, the hierarchy progresses up to T4, which provides bandwidth of approximately 274 Mbps in support of 4032 channels. Most end users subscribe to T1 services, because one or more T1s generally satisfy their bandwidth requirements.
|
Table 7.1: North American Digital Carrier Hierarchy (T-Carrier) Open table as spreadsheet |
|||
|
Digital Signal (DS) Level |
Data Rate |
Number of 64-kbps Channels (DS-0s) |
Equivalent Number of Tx's |
|
DS-0 |
64 kbps |
1 |
Not applicable |
|
DS-1 (T1) |
1.544 Mbps |
24 |
1T1 |
|
DS-1C (T1C) |
3.152Mbps |
48 |
2T1 |
|
DS-2 (T2) |
6.312Mbps |
96 |
4T1, 2 T1C |
|
DS-3 (T3) |
44.736 Mbps |
672 |
28T1, 14T1C, 7T2 |
|
DS-4 (T4) |
274.176 Mbps |
4032 |
168T1, 84T1C, 42T2, 6T3 |
The process of transmitting data (voice, data, video, or image) in designated and consistently repeated channels, or time slots, is known as byte interleaving. For example, each voice conversation to be transmitted is accepted by the multiplexer, assuming capacity is available, and is assigned a time slot. The eight-bit bytes associated with that voice conversation are sent in the designated time slots 8000 times per second, for a total of 64 kbps, which is a voice-grade channel. Those time slots are reserved for that conversation, with the multiplexer providing the transmitting device with regular and repeated access to them for the duration of the communication. Time slots are reserved in both directions, because both real-time voice and T-carrier are FDX in nature.
7.4.3 Unchannelized T1
Unchannelized T-carrier can support bandwidth-intensive services that do not lend themselves to 64-kbps channelization and standard framing conventions [7]. In other words, the traditional convention of 64-kbps channels can be abandoned in favor of carving the T1 pipe into any combination of segments of bandwidth of any usable size or increment. Additionally, any combination of bits can be transmitted, including an infinite number of zeros, without concern for the violation of the ones density rules (discussed later in this chapter)—in other words, a clear channel of 64 kbps or more, rather than a 56-kbps channel [8, 11]. A very high speed data communication or a full-motion videoconference, for example, might require a full T1 pipe. A less intensive communication might require 512 kbps, that is, eight channels, or one-third of a T1 facility. Such services are supported through customer equipment in the form of highly intelligent time division multiplexers, routers, or data switches (Figure 7.5). In a private, dedicated, leased-line network, this is easily accomplished. In a switched network application, however, the carrier must be aware that such use will be made of the facility, so the entire facility can be allocated and managed properly.
Unchannelized T-carrier commonly is used for access to a packet-based network such as Frame Relay or ATM. Chapter 10 discusses how these services switch data in packet format, specifically in the form of frames or cells. The switches employed in such networks multiplex frames or cells over an unchannelized T-carrier circuit. Carving the packets or cells into eight-bit samples for transmission over 64-kbps channels only to re-form them on the other end of the link serves no purpose. In fact, such a process only introduces additional levels of complexity, opportunities for timing errors, additional latency, and so on.
7.4.4 Encoding
While T1 is a digital service, it also supports the transmission of data such as voice and video that is analog in its native form. Codecs must be used to convert such analog signals to digital format prior to their being transmitted over a T1 circuit. The standard digitizing technique for voice, known as Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), was developed as an integral part of T-carrier. It also became the standard technique for digitizing voice in Private Branch eXchanges (PBXs) and other devices, for the obvious reason of providing seamless transmission between such devices and the network. The quantizing techniques typically employed in contemporary T1 networks include PCM and Adaptive Differental PCM (ADPCM); there also are a number of nonstandard approaches, including CVSD, VQL, VQC, and HCV.
7.4.4.1 Pulse Code Modulation
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), formally known as ITU-T G.711, is based on the Nyquist theorem developed by Harry Nyquist in 1928. Nyquist established the fact that the maximum signaling rate achievable over a circuit is twice the number of signal elements, or hertz [12]. In consideration of the Nyquist theorem, PCM specifies that the analog voice signal be sampled at twice the highest frequency on the line. As a voice-grade analog line is defined as providing bandwidth of 4000 Hz, the Nyquist theorem requires the signal to be sampled 8000 times per second. Each sample is a measurement of the amplitude of the sine wave. (Note: Technically, the sampling process must detect every change in direction, i.e., up or down, of the analog waveform.) The individual samples comprising the compressed voice stream are encoded (quantized, or quanti-fied) into eight-bit binary (digital) approximate values, based on a table of 256 (28) standard values of amplitude (Figure 7.6) according to the nonlinear PCM scale. The individual samples then are transmitted in designated time slots over the T-carrier circuit at the very precise pace of 125 μs (1/8000th of a second). The process is reversed on the receiving end of the connection as the encoded amplitude samples are expanded (i.e., decoded, or decompressed) to reconstitute an approximation of the original analog voice signal. The twin processes of com pressing and ex panding are jointly known as companding. The sampling rate and the eight-bit coding scheme yield very high quality voice.
Figure 7.6: PCM encoding of analog voice signal, with reconstruction of approximate analog voice
It should be noted that sampling that is too infrequent results in a phenomenon known as aliasing, in which the digitized points can be used to represent more than one analog signal. As a result, the reconstructed analog voice signal is less than smooth and accurate, or even totally unintelligible. Similarly, sample encoding that yields bit values that are too approximate yields low-fidelity voice. Even PCM yields some amount of quantizing noise, which results from the inexact representation of a smoothly varying analog signal by a digital value restricted to 256 discrete steps. PCM also intentionally introduces some amount of quantizing noise, as it places the greatest emphasis on the amplitude levels in the low and normal volume range, where most speech activity takes place. PCM is nonlinear, much like a sliding-scale or graduated-scale voice ruler with the gradations spaced much closer together near zero volume and farther and farther apart as volume levels increase. This nonlinear approach sacrifices some voice quality at the higher amplitude levels, but the effect is masked by other distortions created by the telephone microphone (transmitter), speaker (receiver), and circuit when the volume is at such high levels. So, PCM can be considered to be a form of compression [3, 11]. (Note: The frequency of signal change, or tonal quality of the voice signal, is automatically taken into account.)
The above calculation shows that 8000 eight-bit samples per second yield a bandwidth requirement of 64 kbps for a PCM-encoded digital voice signal. As PCM was the first standard technique widely used in digital carrier systems, the channel width of 64 kbps became the worldwide standard for all forms of digital networking.
There are two different PCM companding techniques specified in G.711. In North America and areas under North American influence, μ-law, often printed as mu-law, is used. (ASCII does not conform to an expanded character set that includes Classic Greek letters, so you will please understand if the μ does not typeset correctly.) A slightly different nonlinear encoding technique known as A-law is used elsewhere in the world. The two techniques are similar, but different enough to require a gateway to convert from one to the other.
This standard approach of channelized T1, as noted previously, was developed and optimized for voice communications using PCM and TDM. Notably, T-carrier was developed for use in the carrier networks, and subsequently the carriers made it available to end-users. As a carrier-provided service, T1 must conform to all of the expectations of the carrier network, unless special arrangements are made. This is true of leased-line T-carrier networks, as depicted in Figure 7.3. It is particularly true of T-carrier when applied as an access service for purposes of access to, rather than through, the carrier network. For example, an end-user organization that employs a T1 local loop from a PBX to a circuit-switched PSTN must conform to the requirements of the carrier, which typically specifies 24 channels of 64 kbps and PCM-encoded voice. But large end-user organizations with large carrier-provided VPNs may take advantage of more efficient encoding techniques such as ADPCM, assuming that the carrier supports them. The following discussion explains how ADPCM supports toll-quality voice at 32 kbps, thereby yielding more efficient use of available bandwidth.
7.4.4.2 Differential Pulse Code Modulation
Differential Pulse Code Modulation (DPCM) makes more efficient use of bandwidth than PCM, as only the changes in signal level are encoded and transmitted. Based on the logical assumption that the change, or differential, in the voice signal occurs relatively gradually, fewer bits can be used to represent each sample. While DPCM will work with various numbers of bits, a four-bit approach generally is used in this technique, which yields a 2: 1 compression ratio. This level of compression enables a T1 circuit to support 48 channels of 32 kbps, rather than the PCM standard of 24 channels of 64 kbps. DPCM generally provides voice quality comparable to that of PCM. However, noise (distortion) may result on occasions when the signal varies significantly from one sample to another. A common example is that of a modem transmission, as the amplitude (i.e., volume) and frequency (i.e., pitch, or tone) levels can vary abruptly. This issue can be resolved through several workarounds. One approach is to run PCM on some channels of an intelligent TDM PBX or multiplexer and DPCM on others. If the PBX or multiplexer is intelligent enough, it will sense the modem transmissions and route those calls through the PCM channels. Another approach is to incorporate modems into the voice interface modules on the multiplexer. The modems will recognize the modem signals and demodulate the analog signal into a digital signal in PCM format transparently [11]. DPCM is unusual, as this set of issues and workarounds is generally troublesome.
The following calculation shows that 8000 four-bit samples per second yields a bandwidth requirement of 32 kbps for a DPCM-encoded digital voice signal:
7.4.4.3 Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM), formally defined in ITU-T G.722 and G.726, can improve the quality of DCPM further, without increasing the number of bits required. Through increasing the range of signal changes that can be represented by a four-bit value, DPCM adapts to provide higher quality for voice transmission. Because ADPCM does not interface with a COE based on PCM, it is necessary that special equipment in the form of a Bit Compression Multiplexer (BCM) be used to insert two compressed voice conversations into a single PCM channel. A BCM generally is in the form of a printed circuit board that fits into the T1 multiplexer [11].
Notably, ADPCM overcomes the deficiency of DPCM with respect to support of modem transmissions over T1. As you undoubtedly notice when dialing into the Internet, modem tones are very different from voice tones in that both the amplitude and frequency shifts are extreme. As noted previously, DPCM cannot accommodate these shifts. ADPCM, however, can distinguish the presence of a modem tone and can adapt by reverting to a channel width of 64 kbps or by forcing the modem to adapt to a lower speed. Although 32 kbps is the most commonly used ADPCM bit rate, ITU-T standards specify bit rates of 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, and 16 kbps.
7.4.4.4 Digital Speech Interpolation
Digital Speech Interpolation (DSI) is rooted in a voice compression algorithm known as Time-Assigned Speech Interpolation (TASI) developed by Bell Telephone Laboratories in the 1950s for transatlantic telephone cable systems [13]. DSI makes the legitimate assumption that there are predictable pauses in normal human speech. During those pauses, additional voice signals are inserted through a technique known as silence suppression. As DSI works on the basis of statistical probabilities, it is employed effectively only when there are a significant number of voice conversations supported. For example, 72 channels yield additional compression of 1.5: 1, and 96 channels yield an additional 2: 1 (32 kbps). Newer implementations can provide as much as 4: 1 (16 kbps), although voice quality is compromised at this level.
DSI suffers the disadvantage of degradation of the signal quality during periods of heavy use. If the parties in a conversation speak rapidly, with few pauses, the voice signal can be clipped, or truncated, as the system attempts to detect valid speech and struggles to allocate bandwidth. The more conversations supported, however, the more predictable the average pauses and the lower the statistical probability of such degradation. DSI is commonly used in satellite communications, where bandwidth is precious.
7.4.4.5 Quantizing Variations
Variations in the quantizing method are some times employed, although they are neither generally accepted nor widely deployed. Those variations include the following [11]:
· Variable Quantizing Level (VQL): compression ratio 2:1 (32kbps)
· Continuously Variable Slope Delta (CVSD): compression ratio 4:1 (16kbps), or 8:1 (9.6kbps)
· Vector Quantizing Code (VQC): compression ratio 4:1 (16kbps)
· High Capacity Voice (HCV): compression ratio 8:1 (8 kbps)
7.4.5 Framing
T-carrier employs a very specific set of conventions to transmit information. Framing is one example. Using Tl as an illustration, each channel of input is time division multiplexed into a Tl frame, or set of data. In other words, conversation 1 might be allocated time slot 1 (channel 1), conversation 2 might be allocated time slot 2 (channel 2), and so on, through conversation 24 and channel 24. That set of sampled data is inserted into a frame, which is prepended by a framing bit, as illustrated in Figure 7.4, to distinguish it from subsequent frames of data. The process is repeated for frame 2, frame 3, and so on.
The combined processes of voice encoding and framing yield total Tl bandwidth of 1.544 Mbps. Of that total, 1.536 Mbps is available for information transfer, as noted in the following calculation; the remaining 8 kbps is required for framing and other transmission overhead:
There exist several generations of framing conventions, which are designated as Dl, D2, D3, D4, and Extended SuperFrame (ESF). Additionally, the ITU-T has developed an international set of recommendations for framing digital carrier signals:
· Dl framing, developed in 1962, robbed the Least Significant Bit (LSB)—the eighth bit—in each channel of each frame in order to insert a signaling bit in the form of alternating 1s and Os. Although Tl and PCM are designed around the interleaving of eight-bit bytes, bit robbing does not affect the quality of digitized voice because seven bits are satisfactory for reconstructing a high-quality approximation of the analog voice input. By truncating an eight-bit value, however, data are seriously impacted; the integrity of the data stream is violated as well. (Imagine the impact of a bit change that converts a decimal point to a comma during the transmission of a financial transaction.) In order to avoid this impact, the data always avoid the eighth bit in every channel, thereby limiting data transmission to 56kbps. While Dl framing no longer is used, the LSB still is robbed, even in the contemporary D4 framing technique. Therefore, data transmission remains constrained to 56 kbps in many carrier networks.
· D2 framing, was used to create a superframe, a 12-bit pattern in the F (Framing) bit position, that is, for framing locators. Information was transmitted in a 12-frame sequence or superframe. D2 framing is considered obsolete.
· D3 framing, which is still in use, assumes that all inputs—whether voice or data—are analog. It uses a superframe format and sequence bits.
· D4 framing, also known as M24 Superframe, uses a 12-bit sequence (1000 1101 1100) of the F bit, repeated every 12 frames, to define the frame locations and enable the receiver to find the channels. D4 enables robbing of the LSBs of the sixth and twelfth frames only. Voice and data are accommodated; data are treated as digital input. This approach improves available signal capacity and yields better voice transmission. Data transmission, however, remains limited to 56 kbps, as even the slightest level of bit robbing negatively affects the integrity of the data stream. Additionally, ones density (i.e., the density of 1 bits required to the receiver to recover timing) must be maintained through the insertion of stuff bits. Considered together, the 12 frames are designated a superframe.
· Extended superframe was originally tariffed by AT&T in 1985 and now heavily used. Extended superframes are 24 frames in length; signaling is performed in frames 6, 12, 18, and 24. It offers the advantages of nondisruptive error detection [six-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)] and an Embedded Operations Channel (EOC) for network management using only 8 kbps of overhead [3, 6, 9]. This is accomplished because the highly intelligent ESF channel banks require only 2 kbps for purposes of synchronization. Thereby, the remaining 6 kbps of the framing bits are liberated for other purposed. Specifically, 2kbps is used for error detection (CRC) and 4 kbps is used for end-to-end diagnostics, network management, and maintenance functions.
· ITU-T international framing conventions differ greatly from those described above, which are used in North America and Japan (modified). ITU conventions call for level 1 (E-1) to employ 32 DS-0 channels, 30 for information and 2 specifically designated for signaling and control. The first such DS-0 channel carries the functional equivalent of framing bits, while the sixteenth carries signaling bits [11], as illustrated in Figure 7.7.
Figure 7.7: Channelized E1, framing convention
7.4.6 Transmission
Digital carrier transmission facilities can include unshielded twisted pair (22 or 24 gauge), shielded copper, coaxial cable, microwave, satellite, infrared, or fiber-optic cable. Therefore, digital carrier is said to be medium independent. Regenerative repeaters reshape and boost the signal at regular intervals. In a twisted-pair T1 circuit, also known as a T-span or T1 pipe, the repeaters are spaced at intervals of approximately 6000 ft, which corresponds with the spacing of loading coils in analog circuits. As digital technology replaced analog, the loading coils were removed from their protected housings and replaced with repeaters, which were designed specifically to operate at those intervals. While T1 and E-1 were originally developed as short-haul carrier systems, they can operate over twisted pair for distances up to 200 miles (325 km) or so, with proper spacing of up to 50 repeaters.
The repeaters are line powered, that is, powered from the CO exchange over the same transmission line that they serve at levels up to 100 V. The repeaters maintain their synchronization through the transmission bit stream; therefore, bipolar transmission is critical, as is the ones density rule.
7.4.6.1 Alternate Mark Inversion
Bipolar transmission refers to the fact that the electrical signal has two active states, positive (+) and negative (-) voltage, plus an inactive state of zero voltage. More specifically, Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) reverses the polarity of alternate marks, or 1 bits, expressing the first as a positive voltage of +3 V, the second as a negative voltage of-3 V, the third as +3 V, and so on. Between any two successive marks, the signal returns to and pauses at zero voltage in order to maintain a zero reference point for the receiving multiplexer, as illustrated in Figure 7.8 [11].
Figure 7.8: Bipolar signal format
Since 0 bits are represented by a zero voltage, they provide neither clocking pulses nor power for the repeaters. Neither do 0 bits provide any clocking for the receiving multiplexer. A string of too many successive 0 bits will cause synchronization issues, which can translate into timing slips, or jitter, as the receiver loses the ability to measure the bit time and determine where one bit ends and the next begins. This, in turn, can jeopardize the integrity of the bit stream. As a result, there is a requirement for a certain ones density. Over time, there have been several specifications for ones density. AT&T originally specified a limit of 15 consecutive zeros and at least one 1 bit in every eight bits (i.e., byte or, more correctly, octet), for an average density of at least 12.5 percent. As newer equipment was installed in the network, the FCC later relaxed the rule to 80 consecutive zeros but retained the requirement for a ones density of 12.5 percent.
7.4.6.2 Bipolar with Eight-Zeros Substitution
Although T1 and E1 were developed specifically for voice communications, they are used intensively in support of data, video, and all variety of applications. Some of those applications, and video in particular, can involve long strings of zeros as legitimate data. In order to accommodate this requirement, extended superframe (ESF) for T-carrier and the ITU-T framing conventions for E-carrier both provide clear channel communications without bit robbing. They also support long strings of zeros through a technique known as Bipolar with Eight-Zeros Substitution (B8ZS). When B8ZS encounters a string of eight zeros (00000000), it substitutes a specific bit pattern that intentionally violates AMI, that is, includes an intentional BiPolar Violation (BPV). If the preceding mark (1 bit) was represented as a +3 V, the substituted bit pattern is 000+−0−+, as illustrated in Figure 7.9. If the preceding mark was represented as a-3 V, the substituted bit pattern is 000−+0+−. Since the bit pattern is known to both the transmitting and receiving multiplexer, the receiving multiplexer can restore the original 00000000 bit pattern.
Figure 7.9: Bipolar with eight-zero substitution
7.4.6.3 Transmission Media
Note that twisted pair typically is not used at transmission rates above T1 or E-1. At those higher speeds, the native carrier frequency is so high as to make twisted pair unusable due to issues of signal attenuation, at least in a Wide Area Network (WAN) environment. Note that twisted pair performs well at very high frequencies in the Local Area Network (LAN) domain. As the UTP (Category 3, 4, or 5) cable is specifically designed for such frequencies, the cable runs are short, and the environment can be controlled to minimize issues of ambient interference. For reasons that are discussed in Chapter 2, optical fiber is the preferred medium, although infrared and wireless systems offer significant benefits where cabled systems are not practical or where portability is desirable.
7.4.7 Hardware
DS-1 equipment is required both for end-user organizations and for carriers; that equipment must be of the same generation in order to effect compatibility. Ideally, the user organization should use equipment of the same origin and software generic as the carrier in order to ensure access to all of the functions and features. Hardware includes channel banks, channel service units and digital service units, multiplexers, and digital cross-connect systems.
7.4.7.1 Channel Banks
Channel banks were among the first DS-1 devices. Designed for voice-only service in analog applications, channel banks interface analog switches (PBXs and COs) to DS-1 circuits. Channel banks perform two functions in sequence. First, they multiplex up to 24 analog signals on a common Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) electrical bus. Second, they encode the individual PAM channels into a digital format, using PCM, for transmission over a DS-1 circuit [6, 9].
Channel banks also accommodate digital data. As relatively unintelligent devices, channel banks place each conversation on a separate channel; for example, a 9.6-kbps data conversation occupies a 64-kbps channel, just as does a 56-kbps data transmission or a digitized voice conversation. Therefore, channel banks do not make efficient use of available bandwidth. Combined channel banks and CSUs often are in the form of printed circuit boards that fit into PBX card slots for seam-less interface to a network T1 circuit.
7.4.7.2 Channel Service Units and Digital Service Units
Developed circa 1974, Channel Service Units (CSUs) and Digital Service Units (DSUs) are discussed at length in Chapter 6. As a brief recap, they are devices that, in combination, interface the user environment to the digital network at the physical level, corresponding to layer 1 of the OSI model. In contemporary systems, they generally combine into a single device, known as a Channel DSU (CDSU) or an Integrated Service Unit (ISU), which may reside under the skin of another device, such as a multiplexer. They are used in a wide variety of digital data networks, including DDS and T-carrier.
7.4.7.3 Multiplexers (Muxes)
Multiplexers (muxes) are a significant step up from channel banks in terms of intelligence, capability, and cost. Originally based on channel banks and containing CSUs and DSUs, contemporary time division multiplexers offer a tremendous range of flexibility and capability. Muxes typically offer capabilities that include support for both channelized and nonchannelized service, support for multiple medium interfaces (e.g., twisted pair, coax, and fiber), support for multiple trunk types [e.g., Direct Inward Dial (DID) and combination trunks], support for superrate transmission (i.e., channels of a width greater than 64 kbps), and support for subrate transmission (i.e., channels of a width less than 64 kbps). Additionally, they offer the advantages of user-definable configuration, internal diagnostics capability, voice compression, and T-carrier-to-E-carrier protocol conversion. Intelligent muxes also have the ability to allocate bandwidth on a priority basis for specified users and applications, and even to reserve bandwidth, perhaps for a scheduled videoconference or large file transfer associated with a regular data backup. Intelligent muxes can allocate bandwidth on a dynamic basis, assigning channel capacity as required to meet the demands of traffic. A videocon-ference, for example, may require superrate capacity for a short period of time; multiple, low-speed data communications may require subrate channels for a brief moment; and, at other times, the entire capacity of the circuit may be in support of 32-kbps voice conversations. Finally, contemporary multiplexers commonly are capable of being remotely configured and managed.
Recently, a new breed of multiplexer has emerged in the form of Integrated Access Devices (IADs). These devices, which can be quite small and very low in cost, support multiple interfaces, perhaps to a small PBX for voice and a router for Frame Relay. Substantial economies can be realized through an IAD, which enables a single T1 or E1 circuit to be shared by multiple data types in support of multiple applications and services.
7.4.7.4 Nodal Multiplexers
Nodal muxes, a step further up the mux food chain, are truly intelligent network nodes acting as T/E-carrier network switches. In addition to serving as traditional muxes for the resident site, they also serve as true networking devices, much like a combined CO/tandem switch in the voice carrier world. Nodal muxes provide the additional function of dynamic alternate routing, which enables them to switch traffic over an alternate path in the event of a condition of blockage or failure in the primary circuit. Figure 7.10 illustrates a fully meshed private leased-line T1 or E-1 network. Recall from Chapter 5 that a full-mesh configuration requires N(N-1)/2 circuits, where N is the number of nodes. So, a four-node configuration requires 4(4-1)/2 = 6 circuits. As the number of nodes increases to 5, the number of circuits increases to 10. As the number of nodes increases to 6, the number of circuits increases to 15. The mathematical relationship between nodes and circuits in a fully mesh configuration is such that a fully meshed private leased-line network rarely becomes too complex and expensive beyond three or perhaps four nodes, despite the advantages of redundancy and resiliency that a full mesh offers. A partial mesh can be almost as effective, with far fewer circuits.
Figure 7.10: Private E-1 network with nodal multiplexers to provide dynamic alternate routing in a fully meshed network configuration
7.4.7.5 Digital Access Cross-Connect System
Digital Access Cross-Connect Systems (DACSs, or DCCSs) are nonblocking, ECC switches that serve to cross-connect digital carrier bit streams on a buffered basis by redirecting individual channels or frames from one circuit to another. They provide an electronic common control means of cross-connection that replaces the traditional manual method of physical cross-connection of wires. A DACS can redirect traffic to better manage the capacity and performance of the T-carrier network [13]. A DACS does not switch traffic call by call in the sense that you normally think of a switch. Rather, it switches data circuit to circuit or frame by frame on a preprogrammed basis. Although originally developed for carrier use, DACSs also are deployed in large user organizations to support private digital carrier networks. Smaller versions, residing on a PC, are available for less communications-intensive environments. Typically of significant port capacity, DACSs provide support for DS-0, DS-1, and DS-3 [6] and can accomplish conversions between T-carrier and E-carrier.
7.4.8 Variations on the Theme
While the United States set the theme for digital carrier, the concept was quickly adopted by the CEPT (Committee on European Post and Telegraph) and the CCITT and is now specified in ITU-T G.703 and G. 704. The resulting E-carrier standard differs greatly in its implementation, and there exist some further differences in various national implementations. The Japanese version, J-carrier, resembles T-carrier, but with differences sufficient to cause incompatibility. The DS-0 channel is universal, and some number of DS-0 channels are organized into frames that are repeated 8000 times a second at a precise rate of 125 μs.
7.4.8.1 E-Carrier
E-carrier involves a different voice-encoding technique using A-law rather than μ-law. E-carrier is characterized by an entirely different digital hierarchy (refer to Table 7.2), beginning with E-1 at 2.048 Mbps. E-1 supports 30 clear information channels, with 2 channels set aside for framing and nonintrusive signaling and control. Rather than using a framing bit for frame synchronization, E1 uses time slot 0. Specifically, time slot 0 begins with an International (I) bit in bit position 1. E1 frames involve a fixed seven-bit pattern (0011011) in bit positions 2-8 of time slot 0 for even-numbered frames and, in odd-numbered frames, a single 1 bit in position 2. In those alternate frames, bit position 3 is used for frame synchronization Alarms (A), with a 1 bit indicating a yellow alarm and a 0 bit indicating normal alarm status. Bit positions 4–8 are set aside for National (N) use, to be determined by the national carrier, as illustrated in Figure 7.11. All signaling takes place in time slot 16. This signaling and control convention results in E-carrier providing clear channel communications of a full 64 kbps per channel, with no con-cerns for bit robbing, which restrains T1 channels to 56 kbps where older equipment is in place in the network. E1 line coding employs High-Density Bipolar 3-zeros (HDB3). Similar to AMI in T1 networking, HDB3, however, imposes a limit of three successive 0 bits. A fourth 0 bit triggers zeros suppression, substituting a known bit pattern with an intentional bipolar violation. The E-carrier multiframe of 16 frames roughly corresponds to the T-carrier superframe of 12–24 frames [11, 14]. In multiframe format, the I bit in time slot 0 of even-numbered frames can be used for error correction employing the CRC-4 mechanism and the N bits can be relabeled as Spare (S) bits.
|
Table 7.2: International (ITU-T) Digital Carrier Hierarchy (E-Carrier) Open table as spreadsheet |
|||
|
Level |
Data Rate (Mbps) |
Number of 64-kbps Channels (DS-0s) |
Number of E-1s |
|
1 |
2.048 |
30 |
1 |
|
2 |
8.448 |
120 |
4 |
|
3 |
34.368 |
480 |
16 |
|
4 |
139.264 |
1920 |
64 |
|
5 |
565.148 |
7680 |
256 |
Figure 7.11: E-1 frame with signaling and control detail
7.4.8.2 J-Carrier
J-carrier closely resembles T-carrier, although the hierarchy is slightly different. Line coding and framing also vary considerably from the ANSI approach developed in the United States. Although diversity can be interesting, the advantages of these differences are questionable as, not surprisingly, incompatibility is ensured. The J-carrier digital hierarchy begins at 1.544 Mbps and proceeds to 6.313Mbps, 32.064Mbps (J1), 97.728Mbps (J3), and 397.20Mbps (J4) [6, 8]. Table 7.3 provides a clear comparison of the various DS levels.
|
Table 7.3: Digital Hierarchy: T-Carrier, E-Carrier, and J-Carrier Based on ITU-T G.702 Open table as spreadsheet |
||||
|
|
|
Total Signaling Rate (Mbps) |
||
|
DS Level |
Number of Data Channels |
T-Carrier (North America) |
E-Carrier (International) |
J-Carrier (Japan) |
|
DS-0 |
1 |
0.064 |
0.064 |
|
|
DS-1 |
24 |
1.544 |
— |
1.544 |
|
|
30 |
— |
2.048 |
|
|
DS-1C |
48 |
3.152 |
— |
3.152 |
|
DS-2 |
96 |
6.312 |
— |
6.312 |
|
|
120 |
— |
8.448 |
|
|
DS-3 |
480 |
— |
34.368 |
32.064 |
|
|
672 |
44.736 |
|
|
|
DS-3C |
1,344 |
91.053 |
|
|
|
DS-4 |
1,440 |
— |
— |
97.728 |
|
|
1,920 |
— |
139.264 |
|
|
|
4,032 |
274.176 |
|
|
|
DS-5 |
5,760 |
— |
— |
397.200 |
|
|
7,680 |
— |
565.148 |
|
|
DS-6 |
30,720 |
— |
2200.00 |
|
7.4.9 T2 and Above: The Rest of the Hierarchy
T1 certainly is not the end of the story. Generally, the next step is T3, at a nominal rate of 45 Mbps. The T1C (T1 Concatenated), T2, and T4 levels are very unusual in end-user implementations, and the carrier networks rarely employ them any longer. There does remain some T2 in place in the local loop, where Bell companies used it in Digital Loop Carrier (DLC) applications. The Subscriber Line Carrier 96 (SLC-96) system introduced by Western Electric (now Lucent) in 1979, for example, comprises four T1s multiplexed to support 96 channels, commonly provisioned over a single T2 facility from the CO. The SLC-96 essentially is a remote line shelf and TDM mux that allows a single four-wire twisted-pair circuit (or a fiber circuit) to serve as many 96 channels and, therefore, 96 single-line residences or small businesses. As the channels from the premises to the CO are dedicated, the DLC is not particularly intelligent and is not positioned as a contention device of any sort. As illustrated in Figure 7.12, the SLC contains a channel bank that accomplishes the Analog-to-Digital (A-to-D) or D-to-A conversion processes, multiplexes the signals, and so on. A later Lucent system (1985) supports up to 192 channels over four T2 copper circuits or a duplex optical fiber configuration. As the Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs) replace UTP local loops with fiber optics, the embedded DLCs will be decommissioned and replaced either with newer versions that have both copper and fiber interfaces or with fiber optics to the premises.
Figure 7.12: T2 circuit connecting a DLC to a CO
While the data rate increases at the TIC and T2 levels, the carrier reference frequency increases, and issues of signal attenuation and crosstalk over copper twisted pair increase. This fact creates special engineering problems, which can be resolved by various means, including spacing repeaters ever more closely together. At the higher levels of T3 and T4 and the higher associated signaling speeds, these issues cannot be resolved satisfactorily. Therefore, these higher levels run over fiber optics, Free Space Optics (FSO), or microwave.
Above Tl, additional multiplexing is required. In the case of T2, the mux is termed an Mil (Multiplex Tl to T2). As mentioned in the above discussion of DLC and SLC-96, a T2 runs at 6.312Mbps and comprises four Tls at 1.544Mbps apiece, plus 132 kbps of overhead and justification, or bit stuffing, to adjust for variations in the clocking rates of the incoming Tls. The following set of simple equations builds the logic for the signaling speed from a single DS-0 channel to a Tl and then a T2:
At the T2 level, the overhead comprises a total of 168 kbps, including Tl framing. That comes to approximately 2.7 percent, leaving the effective payload at 97.3 percent assuming that the DS-Os are clear 64-kbps channels packed with raw user data. If, however, bit robbing comes into play, each of those channels is reduced to only 56kbps and the effective payload drops to 5.376Mbps (56kbps × 24 × 4), or 85.17 percent. T2 originally was developed for digital carrier applications of 500 miles or less, primarily between metropolitan areas. Traffic levels long since have grown well beyond the capabilities of T2, and it has been replaced with T3 or higher speed Synchronous Optical NETwork (SONET) facilities, which I discuss in Chapter 9.
At the T3 level, an M13 mux gets involved. Actually T3 begins by multiplexing four Tls into a T2, as discussed above and illustrated in Figure 7.13. Then seven T2s are multiplexed to yield a rate of 42.924Mbps. Stuff bits are added to adjust for variations in the clocking rates of the incoming T2s, bringing the signaling rate up to 44.736 Mbps for 672 channels (24 × 4 × 7 = 672), according to the following formula:
At this level, overhead includes 555kbps for T3, 882kbps for T2 (136kbps × 7), plus 32 kbps for Tl (8 kbps × 4), for a grand total of 1.469 Mbps, or approximately 3.28 percent. That yields a payload factor of 96.72 percent, assuming clear channel communications. If bit robbing is involved in old North American networks, another 5.376Mbps drops away (8kbps × 672 channels), for a grand total of 6.845Mbps, leaving a theoretical payload of only 37.891 Mbps for an efficiency factor of 84.7 percent. If the payload contains data blocks, frames, packets, or cells with their own overhead issues, it gets even more overhead intensive. Now all of this overhead may seem wasteful, and it is at some level. At another level, however, we must realize that each bit of overhead has a purpose somewhere in some piece of equipment developed at some point in time to be backward compatible with something else that had some legitimate reason for doing what it did some years before, perhaps in a way that we would do entirely differently if we knew then what we know now. So, we deal with it, things interconnect to form networks that interconnect, and life is good. With that bit of wisdom having been painfully extracted from the dark recesses of my mind at this late hour and firmly implanted in this work, let us proceed.
7.4.10 Fractional T1
Fractional Tl (FT1), originally offered in Canada, first was tariffed in the United States in 1987 by Cable & Wireless. Now offered by many LECs and IXCs, FT1 provides Tl functions and features but involves fewer DS-Os. It is offered in fractions of Tl channel capacity, generally at 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, or 12 DS-0 channels. Subrate transmission also is available at speeds of 9.6kbps. FT1 is particularly applicable where relatively small branch locations connect to a more significant location such as a regional office. There they connect to a full Tl mux or nodal processor, which aggregates the traffic with that of the larger site over a full Tl or T3 backbone network. Figure 7.14 provides a graphic view of an FT1 in an example private T-carrier network configuration. As is the case with T-carrier in general, FT1 serves not only voice applications but also videoconferencing, data communications, and other applications that require more than 56/64kbps but less than a full Tl. It should be noted that FT1 is no less resource intensive than a full Tl. The same four-wire circuit is required, as is the same CSU/DSU and other equipment. Essentially FT1 is a Tl with some number of channels deactivated. Therefore, some carriers charge the same for an FT1 local loop as for a full Tl, although there may be some savings in terms of port charges or other charges. Fractional E1 service is available in some countries.
Figure 7.14: Private T-carrier network with nodal multiplexers to provide dynamic alternate routing in a partially meshed network configuration, including FT1 tail circuits
7.4.11 Digital Carrier Applications
The applications for digital carrier are many. Large user organizations find digital carrier services to be highly cost effective for local loop access, typically replacing multiple, single-channel PBX trunks. Large corporations find T/E-carrier effective for private, leased-line networks or access to VPNs. The ability of T/E-carrier to accommodate voice, facsimile, data, video, and image information on an unbiased basis and, therefore, to eliminate or reduce the number and variety of specialized circuits offers great advantage.
Internet Service Providers (ISPs) commonly use channelized T/E1 to provide modem-based access to small users requiring channel width of no more than 64 kbps. This channel width is perfect for even the highest speed conventional modems (i.e., V.90 and V.92 at 53.3 kbps upstream), which gain access to the ISP on a dial-up basis through the circuit-switched PSTN. ISPs commonly make use of unchannelized T-carrier (T/E1 or T/E3) for access to an Internet backbone provider. The unchannelized approach is preferred for this application because data typically move between the ISP and the Internet backbone provider using the Frame Relay or ATM protocol, both of which I discuss in Chapter 10.
Although private leased-line T/E-carrier networks largely have given way to newer LAN internetworking technologies such as Frame Relay and IP networking, embedded T/E-carrier networks continue in place and are expanded at times. Incidentally, Frame Relay and T-carrier naturally coexist. A large number of user organizations now run Frame Relay data over the dedicated, leased-line networks they put in place years ago for PCM-based voice traffic. Also, access to ATM, Frame Relay, and IP networks commonly is accomplished over unchannelized T/E-carrier circuits.
7.5 X.25 AND PACKET SWITCHING
Paul Baran and his research associates for the RAND Corporation invented packet switching in the early 1960s. Interestingly enough, the concept first was published in 1964 as a means of transmitting secure voice for military application. In the late 1960s, the U.S. General Accounting Office (GAO) issued a report suggesting that there existed a large number of data centers supported, at least in part, by the federal government. Further, the report indicated that many of those data centers were underutilized and others were severely overloaded. The imbalance was due largely to the lack of a WAN technology that would permit the sharing of those resources on a cost-effective basis.
As a result of that study, the Advanced Research Project Agency NETwork (ARPANET) was developed. ARPANET, the first sophisticated packet-switched network architecture, was born in 1971. ARPANET was intended to link computers on a time-share basis in order to share computer resources more cost effectively [15]. Specifically, ARPANET was designed to support various defense, higher education, and Research and Development (R&D) organizations [16].
Packet switching soon was commercialized and made widely available in North America by companies including Telenet, Tymnet, and Graphnet (a facsimile-like service) in the United States and Datapac in Canada. In Europe, packet switching was offered early on by the pan-European Euronet. In fact, packet switching quickly became available in most countries and currently is virtually ubiquitous. The CCITT (now ITU-T) internationally standardized X.25 as the interface into a packet-switched network in 1976 and subsequently revised the standard in 1980, 1984, 1988, and 1993.
In 1983, the majority of ARPANET users spun off to form the Defense Data Network (DDN), also called MILNET (MILitary NETwork), which included European and Pacific Rim continents. Locations in the United States and Europe that remained with ARPANET then merged with the Defense Advanced Research Project Agency Network to become Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA) Internet [17].
The wide availability of packet switching has made it consistently popular over the last 20 years or so. Additionally, packet networks are highly cost effective for applications that require many-to-many connectivity and involve relatively low data volumes. That popularity is growing and is ensured well into the future, largely through its historical deployment as the network technology of the Internet. You should note that X.25 is an interface specification, and does not define the internal operational characteristics of the data network.
7.5.1 Concept of Packet Switching
The basic concept of packet switching is one of a highly flexible, shared network in support of interactive computer communications across a public WAN. Previously, large numbers of users spread across a wide area and, with only occasional communications requirements, had no cost-effective means of sharing access to host computer resources, that is, time share, from their remote asynchronous terminals. The issues were several:
· Bursty Communications: Asynchronous communications are bursty in nature. In other words, data transmission occurs in bursts of keystrokes or data file transfers. Further, lots of idle time occurs on the circuit between transmissions of relatively small amounts of data.
· Analog Technology: Additionally, those early networks consisted of analog facilities in the form of twisted-pair local loops, with various combinations of twisted pair, coax, and microwave in the core. Analog technology offered very poor error performance and relatively little bandwidth.
· Cost: Calling costs were quite high across the WAN. This was especially true of data calls in support of asynchronous communications, as connect times are long even though data volumes tend to be low.
Existing circuit-switched networks certainly offered the required flexibility, as users could dial up the various host computers on which the desired database resided. Through a low-speed modem, which was quite expensive at the time, data could be passed over the analog network, although error performance was less than desirable. But the cost of the connection was significant because the calls were billed based on the entire duration of the connection, even though the circuit remained idle much of the time. Dedicated circuits could address the imbalance between cost and usage, because costs are not usage sensitive and dedicated circuits can be shared among multiple users through a concentrator. But dedicated circuits were expensive, especially in long-haul applications, and involved long implementation delays. Further, users tended not to be concentrated in locations where they could make effective use of dedicated circuits on a shared basis. Finally, large numbers of dedicated circuits were required to establish connectivity between clusters of users and the various hosts.
Packet switching solved many of those problems in the context of the limitations of the networks existing at the time. Packet-switched networks do a very cost-effective job of supporting low-speed, asynchronous, conversational, and bursty communications between computer systems in full-duplex mode. The low-speed, bursty nature of interactive asynchronous terminal-to-host applications enables large numbers of users to engage in simultaneous data sessions across a highly shared network. Rather than establishing connections across physical circuits to transmit data, the various network devices organize user data into packets and interleave them with packets generated by other users in a manner much like TDM muxes interleave bytes, although on a much less rigid basis. As packet-switched network usage can be billed to the user on the basis of the number of packets transmitted during a session, rather than billing for the duration of a call, packet networks are very cost effective for low-volume, interactive data communications. Further, packet-switched networks can perform the process of error detection and correction at each packet switch, or node, thereby considerably improving the integrity of the data from end to end.
Understanding the concept and nature of packet switching requires the examination of a number of dimensions and characteristics of such networks. The following is an exploration of the X.25 protocol suite, including the packet layer, access procedure, and frame format. There is considerable detail on switching and transmission, error control, connectionless service, latency, permanent virtual circuits versus switched virtual circuits, and protocol conversion.
7.5.2 X.25 Protocol Suite
The X.25 protocol suite maps into the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Refer-ence Model at the three lowest layers:
· Packet Layer Protocol (PLP) maps into layer 3, the network layer.
· Link Access Procedure—Balanced (LAP-B) is the X.25 bit-oriented protocol for encapsulating the PLP packet. LAP-B maps into layer 2, the link layer.
· X.21bis defines the mechanical and electrical parameters for the physical, which is at layer 1, the physical layer. Layer 1 options include EIA/TIA-232, EIA/ TIA-449, EIA-530, and G.703.
7.5.2.1 Packet Layer Protocol
The X.25 network layer protocol is the Packet Layer Protocol (PLP), which manages packet exchanges between physical DTE across a network of virtual circuits. PLP also can run on LANs and ISDN interfaces running Link Access Procedure—Data channel (LAP-D). PLP is responsible for call setup, synchronization, data transfer, and call clearing (i.e., call teardown). In data transfer mode, PLP transfers data between DTE across both Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs) and Switched Virtual Circuits (SVCs). Data transfer mode is responsible for data segmentation on the transmit side and reassembly on the receive side of the communication. This mode also handles bit padding, flow control, and error control.
An X.25 packet network transports and switches data through the network on the basis of packets, each of which is of a finite maximum size and of a specific structure, including a header and a payload. As illustrated in Figure 7.15, PLP packet fields include the following:
· General Format Identifier (GFI) is a 4-bit field that identifies packet parameters, which can include payload type (e.g., user data or control data), windowing information, and whether or not delivery confirmation is required.
· Logical Channel Identifier (LCI) is a 12-bit field that identifies the logical channel group and channel number of the virtual circuit that connects to the destination DTE.
· Packet-Type Identifier (PTI) is an 8-or 16-bit field that identifies the PLP packet type, of which there are 17. Packet types include various call setup and call clearing, data and interrupt, flow control and reset, restart, and diagnostic packets. The exact composition of this field varies slightly, depending on whether the network is set for modulo 8 or modulo 128, as identified in the GFI field, with modulo referring to windowing information that identifies the number of packets that can be sent in a string before an acknowledgment must be returned by the receiving device across a link. If the network is set for modulo 8 and the packet type is either data or flow control, the PTI field includes a three-bit (23 = 8) packet-receive sequence number and a three-bit packet-send sequence number. If the network is set for modulo 128 and the packet type is either data or flow control, the PTI field includes a seven-bit (27 = 128) packet-receive sequence number and a seven-bit packet-send sequence number. If the packet is a data type, there also is included a one-bit field indicating whether the packet is part of a sequence of packets to be treated as a logical whole. If the packet is a call setup, call clearing, or registration type, the PTI field replaces the sequence numbers with originating and destination DTE addressing information.
· User or Control Data comprise the payload. If the packet is a data packet, the payload is encapsulated higher layer application information. If the packet is a control packet, the payload comprises various information relating to call setup and clearing, flow control and reset, and so on. The default maximum payload size is 128 octets, which every network must support. Public X.25 networks variously accommodate packets with maximum payloads of 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, and 1024 octets. Airline reservation networks commonly use packet sizes of 1024 octets, although some custom networks can accommodate packet sizes of up to 4096 octets.
Figure 7.15: X.25 packet structure
7.5.2.2 Link Access Procedure—Balanced
Link Access Procedure—Balanced is a derivative of the High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) protocol, which in turn is based on the IBM Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) frame. LAP-B is a bit-oriented protocol running at layer 2, the data link layer, of the OSI Reference Model. (Note: Refer to Chapter 6 for a discussion of all of these terms.) The LAP-B frame comprises a header and trailer that encapsulate the PLP packet and provides a mechanism for transporting that packet across a link, ensuring that frames of data are ordered correctly and are free from error. LAP-B is a balanced protocol that operates in Asynchronous Balanced Mode (ABM), which refers to the fact that the devices have a balanced, rather than a master/slave, relationship. Therefore, a device at either end of the link can initiate a dialogue at any time. As illustrated in Figure 7.16, the LAP-B frame format includes the following fields:
· Flag: The flag field is a one-octet field that delimits (i.e., establishes the limits or boundaries of) the beginning and end of the frame. The flag is always the specific bit pattern 01111110 (7E in hexadecimal), which is known to all transmitters and receivers.
· Address: The address field is a one-octet field that contains no address information whatsoever. Since the frame moves across a point-to-point link between one DTE and one DCE, it is hardly likely that addressing would be an issue. Rather, addressing is the responsibility of the LCI field contained in the PLP packet. So, the address field is used simply to distinguish between commands from DTE to DCE and the associated responses and commands from DCE to DTE and the associated responses.
· Control: The control field is a one-octet field that identifies the frame type. An Information (I) frame carries upper layer (e.g., application) information and some control data. A Supervisory (S) frame carries control information such as I-frame acknowledgment, request for retransmission, and flow control. An Unnumbered (U) frame carries control data such as disconnection request, acknowledgment frame, and frame reject.
· Data: The data field is a variable-size field that contains upper layer information in the form of an encapsulated PLP packet.
· Frame Check Sequence (FCS): The FCS field is a two-octet CRC field that provides excellent error detection. The CRC provides meaningful information for error correction, which is performed at a higher level.
Figure 7.16: X.25 LAP-B frame format
7.5.2.3 X.21bis
X.21bis is a Layer 1, or Physical Layer, specification used in X.25. X.21bis defines the mechanical and electrical parameters for cables and connectors in support of FDX transmission at speeds from 9600 bps and 64 kbps for point-to-point connections over four-wire circuits. As a pure Physical Layer specification, X.21bis addresses the movement of electrical bits across a wire that connects DTE and DCE, and that's about all. In addition to moving bits, of course, there are provisions for call control, which entails the devices using signaling leads to signal when they are ready or not ready to receive calls. There also is a provision for signal timing, or synchronization, at 8 kbps. Figure 7.17 illustrates the relationship between the Layer 3 PLP packet, the Layer 2 LAP-B frame, and the Layer 1 X.21bis bit stream. Note that the physical layer circuits connecting nodes in the network core can take any number of forms, from analog to digital, T-carrier to E-carrier, copper to fiber, and anything in between.
Figure 7.17: X.25 packet encapsulation in LAP-B frame
7.5.3 Error Control
X.25 provides for error control through the use of a CRC contained in the FCS field of the LAP-B frame. Should an error occur in transmission from the DTE through the DCE to the originating network node, that node will recognize the error and correct for it by requesting a retransmission of the corrupted packet. Through the core of the network, each node acting on the packet repeats that process. At the destination network node, the sequence numbers of the packets are checked, any missing packets are identified, and requests for retransmissions are made, as required. Once all packets are present and accounted for, they are resequenced as required, and the data stream is presented to the destination host. Note: There is no error control at the PLP packet layer, which is Layer 3, the Network Layer. There may be an error control function at a higher layer, but that is an issue under the control of the user host computers and is outside the scope of X.25.
Error control was extremely important in early packet networks because the facilities consisted of analog modems on twisted pair, which clearly is error prone. A cascading error control process, therefore, was developed to ensure the integrity of the individual packets and of the entire packet stream. Notably, the process of retransmission has a negative effect on overall throughput because errored packets that require retransmission consume bandwidth. As error control is accomplished at the link level, X.25 discovers and corrects for errors link by link, thereby limiting this throughput issue. If error control were end to end, retransmissions would be end to end, as would be throughput issues. However, this process is demanding of the computational resources of each of the nodes, thereby adding to their cost. Additionally, the process is time consuming because each packet must be checked for errors prior to being forwarded to the next node. As the time consumed during the error-checking process imposes some level of latency on each packet, the level of latency from end to end increases as the number of nodes involved increases. As is discussed in Chapter 10, the next major evolutionary step in packet services was Frame Relay, which shifted the error control process to the end-user domain in order to improve network efficiency and reduce cost.
7.5.4 Datagram Mode: Connectionless
The most basic mode of X.25 operation is that of datagram mode. In this mode, each packet, together with its destination address and usually originating address, can be exchanged between host computers over the packet-switched network, independently of all other datagrams. The datagram mode deals with each packet individually, without any consideration that each packet is one of a stream of packets associated with a session supporting a file transfer, for example. In other words, each packet works its way through the network, entirely on its own, and either makes it to the receiver or not, which has no affect whatsoever on any other packet trying to do the same thing, whether it is part of the same session or not. The datagram mode is connectionless, meaning that there is no predetermined path set up for the packets to go through the network. Rather, each packet can take an entirely different route from originating host to destination host, as illustrated in Figure 7.18. In a connection-oriented mode, a path is set up through the network for all packets associated with an originating and destination address pair, either permanently or perhaps just for a given session.
Figure 7.18: X.25 packet-switched network, supporting transmission in datagram mode
In a typical scenario, the transmitting terminal, equipped with a modem, dials a telephone number to gain access to a local packet node on a circuit-switched basis through the LEC COE. Alternatively, a short-haul, dedicated circuit might connect the user location directly to the packet node. Once the connection to the packet node is established, the transmitting device sends a control packet across the network to establish a data session with the target host computer. That node sends the packet to the target device, which acknowledges its receipt and establishes a session by responding with a control packet to the originating device. Then the originating device begins sending a stream of data, segmented into packets, with each packet numbered sequentially. The originating node receives each packet, checks for transmission errors, reads the address, and forwards the packet toward the destination, across the most direct and available link. The process repeats at each node until the data reach the packet node serving the target host. Each packet routes through the network independently, from node to node, in the direction of the target device, taking the most direct and available path at that instant. Should a reasonable route or the computational resources of the node not be available immediately, the packet will queue in buffer storage at a node for a defined length of time, until a link becomes available. Some packets may encounter little or no congestion and therefore work their way through the network quickly across a relatively direct path involving relatively few nodes. Other packets may encounter considerable congestion and therefore queue for relatively long periods of time and take indirect routes involving a relatively large number of nodes. All of these factors contribute to latency. When the communication session is complete, a control packet is sent across the network to terminate the data call. ARPANET pioneered the concepts of locally adaptive routing, network message segmentation, and datagram transmission mode. The datagram mode is the lowest common denominator, and all national carriers are expected to support it at a packet size of 128 octets.
X.25 internodal links originally were dedicated analog trunks leased from the various local and long-haul carriers. Over time, those analog facilities were replaced by digital circuits, usually in the form of 56-kbps DDS circuits. Many of those circuits subsequently were replaced with T-carrier and E-carrier facilities. Currently, the facilities generally are high speed and fiber optic in nature, although a variety of analog and digital media are employed in consideration of specific network economics, all of which are sensitive to the region.
7.5.5 Virtual Circuits: Connection Oriented
Datagram mode aside, X.25 packet switching is a connection-oriented service. That is to say that a call is set up over a shared physical path, or Virtual Circuit (VC), before the first packet is sent and over which all packets may travel in support of a logical connection. In datagram mode, X.25 is connectionless, with each packet perhaps traveling a different path, depending on the availability and performance of the various network links at any given moment in time. In either case, each packet of data is addressed separately and, therefore, is capable of working its way through the network independently of the other packets in a stream of packetized data. This characteristic of packet networks is a critical advantage because the network and all of its elements are shared among a large number of users. Hence, the cost of transmission across such a network is very low in the context of an appropriate application. There are two types of virtual circuits: PVCs and SVCs.
7.5.5.1 Permanent Virtual Circuits
Packet switching supports a large number of transmissions riding over the same previously designated circuit or path. While the individual packets of the typical user may travel different paths, those of large user organizations that use the network intensively commonly travel over permanent virtual circuits (PVCs). In this scenario, all packets always travel the same path between two host computers, as illustrated in Figure 7.19. The path is established on the basis of routing instructions programmed in the routing tables of the involved nodes and is invoked based on the logical channel group and logical channel number contained in the LCI field of the PLP packet. As the path is predetermined and programmed in a routing table, it can be identified and exercised quite quickly.
Figure 7.19: X.25 packet-switched network, supporting transmission over PVCs
The links that comprise the route are defined by the service provider on a permanent basis until such time as they are permanently redefined, perhaps when the service provider rebalances the network to improve overall performance in consideration of changing usage patterns. Because the physical circuits are shared by large numbers of users and large numbers of packets and packet streams, rather than being committed to a single data stream, the customer's connections are virtual in nature. While latency always is an issue in packet networks, a virtual circuit at least provides some assurance that the level of latency will remain fairly consistent from packet to packet. As all packets travel the same path, they will arrive in sequence. Further, a virtual circuit that creates significant levels of packet errors can be identi-fied more easily, the specific link or switch causing the problem can be isolated, and the problem can be corrected more readily than if packets whizzed around the network over multiple changing paths and circuits in datagram mode. Because PVCs are permanently defined, however, they are subject to catastrophic failure. Should an individual switch or circuit fail along a given PVC, the network provider either must correct the problem or redefine the PVC. In the meantime, the user organization cannot use the network, unless a backup PVC is provided at additional cost.
7.5.5.2 Switched Virtual Circuits
Alternatively, the network nodes may select the most available and appropriate path on a call-by-call basis using switched virtual circuits (SVCs) that are set up on the command of (i.e., signaling from) the user equipment before the first packet is sent. Once selected, all packets in a given session travel the same path, just as they do in a PVC scenario. SVCs differ from PVCs as the path is set up in consideration of both the condition and the load at the instant the connection is required, rather than being defined well in advance. Therefore, failed and congested switches and circuits are bypassed, and overall performance is improved. This process of automatic load balancing offers benefits to both the user organization and the carrier. SVCs, however, demand a greater level of network intelligence, which adds to total network cost to the carrier and ultimately translates into higher cost to the end-user organization. The establishment of an SVC also involves some level of delay in the call setup process, since the network nodes must examine multiple paths prior to making an optimal path selection.
7.5.6 Protocol Conversion
As an option, packet-switched networks accomplish protocol conversion, including any protocol that is well established, well understood, widely deployed, and therefore supported by the carrier. As this process of protocol conversion adds value, packet networks (X.25) are widely recognized as the first Value-Added Networks (VANs) [18]. This capability certainly added great value some years ago when protocol conversion was considered to be quite demanding of limited and expensive computational resources. In many cases, the carriers could accomplish the process more cost effectively than the end-user organizations. The limited number of supported protocols included asynchronous, IBM Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC), and IBM SDLC.
In this contemporary world, however, the cost of protocol conversion is relatively minor and the number of protocols requiring support is both considerable and dynamic. Further, protocol conversion adds to overall packet latency, thereby affecting other users of a shared packet network. Therefore, and in a contemporary setting, protocol conversion generally is best accomplished by intelligent devices in the end user, rather than the carrier, domain. As I note in Chapter 10, Frame Relay is a packet service that shifts the protocol conversion process to the end-user domain to improve network speed and reduce cost.
7.5.7 Latency
Latency, or delay, is a troublesome and limiting characteristic of packet networks. As each packet may take a different route though the network in datagram mode, each may travel a route of a different length; therefore, propagation delay may vary from packet to packet. Additionally, each packet may travel through a different number of packet nodes, each of which must act on the packet to read its address, check for errors, request retransmissions of errored packets, and so on. Each of these processes compounds the issue of packet delay. Further, each packet may encounter a different level of congestion in the network and, therefore, can spend a different amount of time in queues. Finally, delay is imposed on each packet if protocol conversion is required; while this process adds value, it also adds to the latency factor. The end result is that some level of latency not only is assured but also is variable (jitter) and uncertain in magnitude [8].
The level of magnitude is measured in milliseconds (ms, or thousandths of a second), which does not seem like much on the surface. But while this characteristic of packet switching does not affect many applications, it renders others ineffective. Many data communications applications, such as e-mail, are not seriously impacted by latency or jitter. Real-time uncompressed audio, voice, and video, however, are affected quite seriously and, therefore, traditionally have not been considered good candidate applications for packet switching.
7.5.8 Access
X.25 actually is the ITU-T recommendation for a standard describing the physical, link, and packet-level protocols between the user DTE/DCE and the network [17, 19]. Host computers connect to the network over an X.25 link. The user data are packetized by DCE in the form of a Packet Assembler/Disassembler (PAD), for which X.3 is the standard. The PAD also may be responsible for password protection and performance reporting [10].
Occasional or casual users typically access a packet network on a dial-up basis from asynchronous PCs through modems, as described above. In such a scenario, the actual packetizing of the data can be performed at the originating network node or by software on the host. Individuals accessing the Internet through an online information service, for example, may use this approach.
Large user organizations often access the network via a dedicated, leased-line link to the closest network node. Such access often is in the form of an unchannel-ized T1/E1 facility. In either case, the PAD organizes the user data into PLP packets and encapsulates each in an LAP-B frame before presentation to the network [20, 21].
7.5.9 Network Interconnection: X.75
X.25 networks are widely available as a public data network (PDN) service offering, generally using packets of 128 or 256 bytes. Certain applications, however, are supported more effectively by transmission of larger packets. The airline reservation systems (e.g., American Airlines' SABRE and United Airlines' APOLLO), for example, deploy custom packet networks that use packet payloads of 1024 bytes. As this application involves the frequent transmission of relatively large sets of data (e.g., flight schedules, fares, and seating availability), a larger packet size is more appropriate. The larger packet size improves efficiency because the payload is very large, while the overhead information is roughly the same as it is for a smaller packet. As a larger packet is more likely to contain an errored bit, require retransmission, and therefore reduce throughput, the custom reservation networks typically employ digital facilities to minimize this exposure. In the United States and other highly developed countries, the reservation networks largely have shifted to Frame Relay, although X.25 remains heavily used elsewhere, in consideration of poor link quality.
The interconnection of such disparate networks is accomplished through ITU-T Recommendation X.75. Through an X.75 gateway that serves as a network-to-network interface (Figure 7.20), issues of packet size are resolved. This relatively simple level of protocol conversion occurs at a network node that examines the packet for errors and either segments the payload of a large packet into multiple smaller packets or combines the payloads of multiple smaller packets into a single larger one. After the resulting packet payload(s) form, the node encapsulates each with the necessary control data in the form of a header and trailer, modifies the addressing scheme as required, and presents each to the target network.
Figure 7.20: Disparate packet networks interconnected via X.75 gateway
7.5.10 Packet-Switching Hardware
The user of an X.25 packet network may require no hardware other than a PC and modem, with the packetizing performed at the local X.25 node. Alternatively, a hardware-or software-based PAD conforming to the X.3 standard can perform that function at the host. (Note: The advantage of the hardware PAD is that if it misbehaves, you can hit it with a hammer.) The PAD performs the packet assembly (i.e., aggregation of many individual characters) for the transmitting device and disassembly (i.e., disaggregation) for the receiving device in order to reconstitute the data in its native format.
Packet carriers, of course, must invest in packet nodes rather than circuit switches. Such packet nodes are intelligent devices capable of supporting complex routing tables, buffering packets in temporary memory, resolving packet errors, and accomplishing protocol conversions. Where X.25 networks are interconnected or where protocol conversions of any sort are required, gateways must be deployed.
7.5.11 Packet-Switching Standards
The ITU-T sets standards recommendations for packet switching. Those standards include the following [8, 10, 21]:
· X.3: Packet Assembly/Disassembly (PAD) functions
· X.25: Interface between DCE and DTE for public packet networks
Packet Layer Protocol (PLP): Network Layer
Link Access Procedure—Balanced (LAPB): Link Layer
X.21bis: Physical Layer
· X.28: Terminal-to-PAD communications formats
· X.29: Host-to-PAD communications formats
· X.31: Packet-mode services over ISDN
· X.32: Defines X.25 synchronous dial-up mode
· X.75: Internetwork call control procedures
7.5.12 Packet-Switching Applications and Futures
X.25 packet switching originally was intended for interactive time sharing, which involves long connect times and low data volumes. While X.25 still supports such applications effectively, contemporary applications include online interactive processing (e.g., reservations systems), messaging (e.g., e-mail), batch file transfer (e.g., data backup), and Internet access.
X.25 offers the advantage of being a highly mature, if limited, network technology. Therefore, it is relatively inexpensive to deploy and is highly cost effective in support of applications that require many-to-many connectivity and involve relatively low volumes of data transport over error-prone circuits. Additionally, it is virtually ubiquitous, having been deployed in every corner of the globe. X.25, however, is limited in terms of speed and is characterized by significant levels of latency. As a result, most applications and service providers have moved or are moving toward newer network technologies. The airline reservations systems, for example, have largely transitioned to Frame Relay, at least for the domestic networks in the United States; in less developed countries and regions where network reliability and performance may be at issue, X.25 is still heavily used. Internet Service Providers prefer various combinations of dial-up modem access, Frame Relay, ATM, ISDN, and TCP/IP. The Internet backbone network largely has shifted to Frame Relay or ATM, operating at minimum speeds of T/E1 or T/E3. Much of the Internet backbone has been upgraded to fiber-optic facilities operating at speeds of 155 Mbps or much more. While the future of X.25 is past its prime, the future of packet switching, in general, is quite bright. Note: Tymnet, one of the early commercial data networks, began operations in 1966 and at one point was reputed to be the largest commercial X.25 PDN network in the world. Tymnet finally ceased operations in 2003.
There are several bright spots in the future of X.25. As it is the packet protocol used in SS7, it is heavily used in the contemporary PSTN for signaling and control purposes. Therefore, it also is used in the ISDN D channel, not only for user-to-network signaling but also for user-to-user signaling in private ISDN networks and for certain user-to-user data communications applications. However, the contemporary PSTN is in a state of decline due to the popularity of Voice over IP (VoIP) and the Internet. ISDN is not exactly on the upswing either. Actually, I reckon these are more like dim spots. I'm sorry. I didn't mean to get your hopes up.
7.6 INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK
A CCITT study group first explored integrated services digital network (ISDN) as a concept from 1968 to 1971. A more focused conceptual study took place during the 1981–1984 CCITT study period. The first set of published standards recommendations appeared in 1984 in the form of a CCITT Red Book, which provided the basic framework for the concept, network architecture, UNI (User Network Interface) protocols, and common channel signaling protocols. As a result of the 1985–1988 study period, a Blue Book was published that provided descriptions of supplementary services, rate adaptation, ISDN frame relay, and the initial set of B-ISDN (Broadband ISDN) recommendations. (Note: The color of the books has no significance, other than the fact that a different color represents each study period.)
Rather than being a technology, ISDN is described as a suite of services based on a set of technologies, including transmission, switching, and signaling and control. It is a set of international standards recommendations that permits the provisioning of a wide range of services intended to be available on a ubiquitous basis. Additionally, the ISDN network is accessible through a standard set of interfaces—one for low-bandwidth applications and another for high-bandwidth applications.
The specific characteristics of ISDN include its entirely digital nature—Customer Premises Equipment (CPE), transmission facilities, and switching systems all are fully digital in nature. The three identified channel types include Bearer (B) channels that bear the end-user information; Data (D) channels (aka Delta channels) for signaling and control, low-speed end-user packet data, and telemetry; and High-speed (H) channels for channel aggregation to accommodate bandwidth-intensive applications. The UNI is defined differently at two levels: Basic Rate Interface (BRI) for low-speed access and Primary Rate Interface (PRI) for high-speed access. Common Channel Signaling System 7 (SS7) is a fundamental requirement of ISDN.
Announced to the world amidst great fanfare, ISDN quickly captured the interest of carriers, manufacturers, and user organizations worldwide. ISDN offered the compelling advantages of increased bandwidth, enhanced flexibility, improved error performance, greater reliability, broad availability, and interconnection to a wide range of services. Unfortunately, it then stalled and progressed at a glacial pace for the next few years. Among the many reasons for its slow development are long delays in standards development, lack of adherence to standards, lack of availabil-ity, regulatory hurdles, circuit and equipment costs, and poor marketing, particu-larly in the United States.
Standards development at the ITU-T is infamously slow. Standards traditionally were released every four years, in monsoon fashion and with total droughts in the interim. Over time, the various committees attained the privilege of developing and releasing certain standards recommendations on an intermediate basis. Standards then came in showers. ISDN standards include three layers. The ISDN Physical Layer (Layer 1) addresses mechanical and electrical issues including connectors, signaling rate, and line coding. At the Data Link Layer (Layer 2), ISDN specifies the Link Access Procedure—D Channel (LAP-D). Network Layer (Layer 3) specifications include user-to-user and network-to-network signaling protocols for both circuit-switched and packet-switched networking.
Standards from the ITU-T actually are in the form of recommendations. Individual member nations can implement ISDN options as they see fit or they can deviate from the standards as long as international interconnectivity is accomplished at some reasonable level. The most notable international difference is that of the basic ISDN hierarchy. The North American version follows the T1 hierarchy, with PRI including 24 channels; the European (ITU-T) version is based on E1, providing 30 information-bearing channels. While this difference is understandable in the context of maintaining backward compatibility with existing networks, it also perpetuates issues of basic protocol incompatibility.
Systems manufacturers of COs and PBXs have a strong interest in maintaining the proprietary nature of their systems architectures. Therefore, they implement ISDN in distinctly different ways. ISDN compatibility became ISDN compliance, a decidedly lower level of conformance.
Additionally, carriers have implemented nonstandard versions of ISDN. For example, Pacific Bell (now SBC) initially offered ISDN at a rate of 56 kbps per channel, rather than the standard 64 kbps. This limitation was due to the presence of older channel banks in the Pac Bell ISDN carrier network and the fact that SS7 was not fully deployed. Therefore, in-band signaling and control consumed 8 kbps of channel bandwidth due to bit robbing.
Islands of ISDN resulted from these various implementations. A given carrier using the hardware and software of a given manufacturer could not easily achieve full connectivity with another carrier deploying another version of ISDN. Weary of delays in the standards process, some carriers (e.g., Southwestern Bell and Ameri-tech, both now merged into SBC) developed and implemented proprietary versions of ISDN, further contributing to the problem. In recent years, this problem has been mitigated through cooperation of the manufacturers and carriers, with the active involvement of Bellcore (now Telcordia) [18, 22].
Availability of ISDN was slow to develop in the United States because the carriers were reluctant to invest in the technology unless they were convinced that a market existed for the services or that the technology offered internal cost savings. ISDN is not inexpensive to deploy, a fact that unfortunately has been reflected in relatively high installation charges, recurring circuit charges, and equipment costs.
Regulators in the United States generally have required that the LECs pass on the cost of ISDN infrastructure to ISDN users, rather than averaging those costs across the entire rate base. In other words, they have viewed ISDN as an optional service that must pay its own way, or the carriers must absorb any associated losses. Because the carriers were unwilling to do so, ISDN rates remained high. Coincident with the development of competition in the local exchange and encouraged by the regulators, the ILECs have exercised more freedom in pricing ISDN attractively. Each ILEC, of course, has its own pricing strategy involving installation charges, monthly rates, and usage charges. The CLECs (Competitive LECs) are free to price ISDN (and any other service offering) as they see fit and generally price it at very attractive levels.
Rates for ISDN access historically were not tariffed at attractive levels in the United States, compared with the cost of basic services. Again, the regulators were largely responsible. The ILECs bear responsibility, as well, because they were not willing to absorb initial losses in order to stimulate the growth of the service offering. Currently, the charges for ISDN vary widely, from carrier to carrier and from state to state. Generally speaking, ISDN charges are somewhat higher than those for two analog lines and for monthly recurring charges as well as installation charges. Some carriers also charge for usage per channel and sometimes charge for packet traffic based on packet volume. To encourage ISDN usage, some carriers waive or lower those usage charges during evening and weekends, when calling activity is light.
Equipment costs were high because the manufacturers constantly were investing in R&D to maintain ISDN compliance with developing standards. Additionally, the limited demand for ISDN caused the manufacturing runs to be small, which tends to increase equipment prices. While equipment costs subsequently came down considerably, they remain an additional expense.
Marketing by the ILECs in the United States proved ineffective. Not only were costs maintained at unattractive levels, but advertising and promotion were minimal and availability was highly limited. Further, meaningful and cost-effective applications were not identified and stressed. With typical lack of foresight, the LECs placed heavy emphasis on the low-speed BRI version, which is suitable only for residence, small-business, and SOHO (Small Office/Home Office) application. High-speed PRI was not emphasized heavily as a replacement for T1 trunking. ISDN Centrex was touted heavily, but with limited success. Centrex ISDN marketing was heavily slanted toward CO-based local area networking, which proved to be about as successful as the paperless office.
ISDN frustrated the industry in the United States, in general, and its less than stunning level of success eroded gradually in the face of V.90 modems. Since 2000 or so, Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) and cable modems have virtually wiped ISDN off the map, at least in the residential and small-business markets. At least one ILEC in the United States has removed all mention of ISDN from its website, closed its ISDN support office, and left ISDN customers with only a telephone number connected to an answering machine on which they can leave messages that (some say) are never returned. (I'll not name that company, in order to save them the embarrassment. At the same time, it will save them the trouble of filing a civil lawsuit against me for damages that they can't prove but that I can't disprove. Note: The United States has approximately 1,000,000 lawyers, which is about 70 percent of the world's lawyers, and a total population of about 300,000,000, which is less than 5 percent of the world's population.)
ISDN matured much more quickly and completely in Europe and certain parts of the Pacific Rim and Africa than in the United States. In those regions, the regulators encouraged deployment. Additionally, marketing was much more effective, focusing on PRI, rather than BRI [18, 23]. Outside the United States, ISDN pricing also has positioned it favorably in comparison to analog lines and modem-based Internet access. In South Africa, for example, ISDN BRI is priced very attractively for low-to-moderate Internet access. In many regions of the world, ISDN also ben-efits from the lack of competition from DSL and cable modems.
7.6.1 Isdn Devices and Reference Points
ISDN specifications include a number of functional groupings at layer 1, the physical layer. ISDN hardware, at the end-user side of the connection, includes Terminal Equipment (TE), Terminal Adapters (TAs), and Network Termination (NT) devices, line termination equipment, and exchange termination equipment, as depicted in Figure 7.21. The following discussion begins at the subscriber premises and works toward the carrier networks.
Figure 7.21: ISDN devices, reference points, and networks
7.6.1.1 Terminal Equipment
Terminal Equipment (TE) is the term for a device that connects a customer site to ISDN services. In more traditional non-ISDN terms, TE includes all Customer Premises Equipment (CPE), which category includes voice terminal equipment and Data Terminal Equipment (DTE). TE also includes premises-based switching equipment, including PBXs and routers. There are two types of TE:
· TE1 is ISDN-compatible equipment, that is, equipment that can interface directly to an ISDN circuit via a four-wire twisted-pair interface. Examples 2, 3, and 4 in Figure 7.21 illustrate TE1.
· TE2 devices do not enjoy native ISDN compatibility. TE2 equipment must connect through a Terminal Adapter (TA) that resolves issues of incompatibility. Example 1 in Figure 7.21 illustrates TE2.
7.6.1.2 Terminal Adapters
Terminal Adapters (TAs), also known as ISDN modems, are interface adapters for connecting one or more TE2 (non-ISDN) devices to an ISDN network. A TA acts as ISDN DCE, providing a function equivalent to that of a protocol or interface converter for equipment that does not have ISDN capability built in. A TA generally is in the form of a stand-alone unit, as illustrated in example 4 of Figure 7.21. A TA also can be in the form of a printed circuit board that fits into an expansion slot of the TE2. If the TE2 and TA are separate units, they connect on the basis of a standard interface such as EIA/TIA-232, V.24, or V.35.
A key function of the TA is that of rate adaption, which operates in several ways. In one case, rate adaption effectively throttles down the transmission rate from 64 kbps to the rate at which the non-ISDN device is capable. Rate adaption also serves to bond multiple B channels into H channels for more bandwidth-intensive applications. V.110 is the ITU-T Recommendation that specifies support for data terminal equipment (DTE) with asynchronous or sunchronous serial interfaces over an ISDN network through rate adaption. V.120 specifies support for data terminal equipment (DTE) with asynchronous or sunchronous serial interfaces over an ISDN network through data encapsulation. V.120 includes specifications for allowing multiple terminals to share a 64-kbps B channel through Statistical Time Division Multiplexing (STDM).
7.6.1.3 Network Terminations
Network Termination (NT) devices are physical devices that operate to interface the four-wire customer wiring to the two-wire UTP local loop. As illustrated in Figure 7.21, there are two types of NTs:
· NT1 operates at Layer 1, the Physical Layer, serving to provide physical and electrical connection between the customer wiring and the carrier local loop. If there are multiple TEs, the NT1 provides for multidrop termination, managing physical layer contention issues between the TEs and the carrier circuit. The NT1 also performs such functions as signal conversion, synchronization, Layer 1 multiplexing, frame alignment, and line maintenance and performance monitoring of the local loop. Echo cancellation is performed at this level. In North America, the NT1 is in the form of CPE. In international implementations, the NT1 is the carrier responsibility.
· NT2 operates at Layer 2, the Data Link Layer, and Layer 3, the Network Layer. NT2 is an intelligent device responsible for the user's side of the connection to the network, performing such functions as Layer 2 multiplexing, switching, or ISDN concentration. An NT2 commonly is actually an NT1/2 device, performing the combined functions of an NT1 and an NT2 and operating at Layers 1, 2, and 3 of the OSI Reference Model. Such a device likely would be in the form of a PBX, router, or data switch.
7.6.1.4 Reference Points
These functional groupings of TE, TAs, and NTs are logically distinguished by reference points, which are points of reference, interface, or demarcation. As illustrated in Figure 7.21, the reference points are as follows:
· Reference Point R corresponds to the interface between TE2 and the TA.
· Reference Point S refers to the point of interface of an ISDN terminal and the NT2, serving to distinguish between terminal equipment and network-related functions. The S interface is defined as a passive bus for up to eight NT2 devices.
· Reference Point T references a minimal point of termination at the customer premises. It is the reference point between the NT1 and NT2 devices.
· Reference Point U is the reference point between NT1 devices and line termination equipment in the carrier CO. The reference point describes the full duplex data signal on the physical two-wire subscriber line, including line coding and framing conventions. The U reference is relevant only in North America, as the NT1 function is provided by the carrier elsewhere.
· Reference Point V is the point of interface at the network side of the connection between the line termination or loop termination and the exchange termination. In other words, it is the point between the circuit-terminating equipment and the ISDN CO. As the V interface exists only if the CO does not have embedded circuit-terminating equipment, it is unusual in contemporary ISDN-compatible COs.
7.6.2 Standard Interfaces and Channel Types
The current version of ISDN is Narrowband ISDN (N-ISDN); I discuss Broadband ISDN (B-ISDN), which is still on the drawing boards where it will probably remain forever, in Chapter 10. ISDN currently is available in essentially two interface varieties (see Figures 7.21 and 7.22): Basic rate interface and primary rate interface. In each case, the ITU specifies the electrical characteristics, signaling, coding, and frame formatting. Regardless of the specifics of the interface and channel type, ISDN advantages include digital technology, clear-channel communications, and symmetric bandwidth.
7.6.2.1 Basic Rate Interface
Basic Rate Interface (BRI), also known as Basic Rate Access (BRA) and 2B+D, provides two Bearer (B), or information-bearing, channels, each operating at the clear-channel rate of 64 kbps by virtue of SS7 non-intrusive signaling. Each B channel can carry digital data, digitized voice (PCM encoded at 64 kbps or a lower rate), or a mixture of low-speed (subrate) data as long as it all is intended for the same destination. BRI also provides a Data (D) channel at 16 kbps, which is intended primarily for purposes of signaling and control, messaging, and network management. The D channel also generally is made available for X.25 packet data transmission and low-speed telemetry when not in use for signaling purposes; cost-effective applications include credit card authorization, which involves very small bursts of data [24]. BRI is used primarily for residential, small-business, Centrex, and telecommuting applications that are not particularly bandwidth intensive. The B channels can be aggregated, or bonded, to provide up to 128 kbps to a given conversation, such as a videoconference or Internet experience; additionally, multiple BRIs can be bonded for even greater capacity. Whether bonded or not, ISDN BRI provides multiple channels over a single physical loop, which is a great advantage.
A single BRI line can support up to 16 devices that contend for access to the BRI channels through a Terminal Adapter (TA). The devices can be in a variety of forms, including telephones, facsimile machines, computers, and video cameras. Additionally, ISDN can support up to 64 individual Service Profile IDentifiers (SPIDs), which are equivalent to directory numbers, one per terminal device [25]. The SPID is used in the initialization procedure when the device goes off hook to establish a connection with the network through the CO. While BRI supports as many as three simultaneous calls, the specifics of the carrier offering determine how they can be used. Some carriers offer a confusing array of ISDN BRI packages that either restrict particular B channels to voice or data application or enable them both to be used for voice or data. Some carriers offer application-specific BRI variations such as 1B+D and 0B+D, with the latter targeted at applications such as credit card verification, as illustrated in example 3 of Figure 7.21.
BRI uses an eight-pin connector as defined by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) in ISO 8877 and commonly known by the industry term RJ-45. Full-duplex (FDX) connectivity is accomplished over a digital twisted-pair local loop through the application of special carrier electronics, with four-wire connectivity accomplished over one or sometimes two physical pairs, depending on the specifics of the carrier's implementation. An NT1 device provides for compatibility with network protocols.
7.6.2.1.1 Line Coding
The BRI interface between the CO and the customer premises is known as the U Reference Point (Figure 7.21), and it runs at an actual transmission line rate of 160 kbps, carrying two 64-kbps B channels, one 16-kbps D channel, and 16 kbps of overhead for framing, echo cancellation, and an Embedded Operations Channel (EOC) that is used for line testing and monitoring. In order to support this transmission rate in full duplex mode over a physical two-wire, logical four-wire UTP local loop, the 2B1Q (2 Binary 1 Quaternary) encoding technique, with echo cancellation, is used in North America. 2B1Q is a form of Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) that uses four (i.e., quaternary) levels of amplitude (i.e., voltage), each of which represents two adjacent bits in a bit stream, and is accomplished by varying the voltage at nominal levels of ± 1 (actually 0.833) and ± 3 (actually 2.5) volts, as illustrated in Figure 7.23. Specifically, −3V represents a 00, −1V a 01, +1V a 11, and +3 V a 10. [Note: This approach is similar to the dibit Amplitude Modulation (AM) technique discussed in Chapter 6.] Because two bits are impressed on each baud (i.e., signal or signal change), the baud rate is halved, and a baud rate of 80 baud will support a transmission rate of 160 kbps. Because statistics force the line voltage to be positive half the time and negative half the time, on average, the signal power lies at a frequency of 40 kHz, which is half the baud rate. This frequency is well above the standard voice-grade rate of 4 kHz over a local loop of up to 18,000 ft. Therefore, the loop must be of excellent quality, which often means that it must be specially conditioned to perform at this level. As 2B1Q scales well, it is the electrical line-coding technique used in High-bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line (HDSL), which is a DSL version of T1/E1.
In European and many other countries, the line-coding technique employed is 4 Binary 3 Ternary (4B3T), a block code that combines four bits to represent one ternary signal state. As a result, the baud rate is three-fourths of the transmission rate, and ISDN BRA at 160 kbps requires a baud rate of 120 kbaud. 4B3T yields shorter ISDN transmission distances than 2B1Q, but distances in Europe and elsewhere often are much shorter between the CO and the customer premises [19, 26].
7.6.2.1.2 Framing
All TDM-based services require framing, and ISDN BRI is no exception. The 2B1Q-coded transmission must be organized and synchronized in some fashion in order for the B and D channels to be interleaved without losing their identity. Signaling and control functions also must be performed. The ISDN BRI involves several framing conventions, with one at the U interface and the other between the S and T interfaces:
· U Interface: The framing at the U interface, as illustrated in Figure 7.24, begins with a synchronization word of 18 bits that provides the receiver with the means to synchronize on the beginning of each frame. That is followed by 12 sets of 2B+D samples, with each B sample comprising 8 bits and each D sample comprising 2 bits, for a total of 18 bits per set. The frame ends with 6 bits of overhead in the M channel for M aintenance and other purposes. Much as is the case with T1 and E1, sets of eight frames are organized into superframes. It is at that level that the M channels find their purpose in addressing, error control, power management, and various network management functions.
Figure 7.24: ISDN BRI framing at U interface
· S/T Interface: The framing at the S/T interface is a bit more complex. The BRI/BRA framing structure comprises the two B channels (2 × 64 kbps = 128 kbps) plus the D channel (16 kbps) multiplexed into repetitive frames at 192 kbps. Each frame is 48 bits long, including two samples for each B channel, for a total of 32 bits of user data (2 × 8 = 16 × 2 = 32), plus 4 bits from the D channel, for a grand total of 36 bits. Added to that are 12 bits of overhead to bring the total up to 48 bits. Given the fact that the signaling speed of the link is 192 kbps, frames repeat at the rate of one frame every 250 μs (48 bits/192 kbps = 1/4 ms, or 250 μs). The B-channel samples are byte interleaved, as they are in T1 or E1. The four D-channel bits are spread out among the four B-channel byte samples. The overhead bits also are spread out and include bits for framing [first (F) bit and last (L) bit], channel activation (A bit), DC balancing (L bit), contention resolution when multiple TEs contend for a channel on a passive bus (E bit), and various other purposes. The line-coding format is pseudoqua-ternary coding, which differs from AMI only with respect to the polarity of the framing bit (F) and the requirement for BiPolar Violations (BPVs). Remember that the S and T interfaces are reference points involving NT1s and NT2s, which are functional groupings that often are not presented in the form of physically distinct devices. So, all of this typically takes place under the hood of a TA or some sort of TE.
7.6.2.2 Primary Rate Interface
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) also is known as 23B+D in the United States and Japan. The European or international version is known as Primary Rate Access (PRA) or 30B+D. PRI offers 23 B (Bearer) channels plus 1 D (Data) channel and is backward compatible with T1 and J1 transmission systems, respectively. PRA offers 30 B channels plus 1 D channel and is backward compatible with E1 transmission. PRI and PRA both provide a full-duplex (FDX) point-to-point connection through an NT2-type intelligent CPE switching device, such as a PBX or router, for interfacing with the carrier CO switch. The DS-0 is the basic building block of both PRI and PRA, as both the B and D channels operate on clear channels at 64 kbps. As is the case with BRI, the B channels can be used individually or can be bonded for voice, data, video, facsimile, any other data and any multimedia combination, but the D channel is reserved exclusively for signaling. As signaling and control functions are fairly light, the standards provide for Non-Facility-Associated Signaling (NFAS), which allows a D channel to support up to five PRI connections. The first PRI in a PBX trunking application, for example, would be provided at 23B+D, and the next four PRIs would be delivered at 24B+0D. Some manufacturers and carriers have stretched this limit to seven PRIs. In a con-figuration involving multiple PRIs, the typical recommendation is that a backup D channel be provisioned in order to maintain signaling and control functionality in the event that the primary D channel fails. While this backup approach diminishes the B-channel count, it is generally considered to be the most prudent approach, for B channels are useless without a D channel. NFAS is required for Switched-1536 data service; because all 24 channels of the T1 PRI line carry user data, the D channel must be on another line.
While designed for transmission over a standard DS-1 trunk, PRI is a significant improvement over T1 or E1, because the channels can be allocated dynamically. In other words, each channel can act as an incoming, outgoing, combination, or DID trunk, as the need arises. The nature of the channel can be determined as required, based on user-definable parameters. Additionally, multiple B channels can be aggregated to serve bandwidth-intensive applications, such as videoconferencing. On the negative side, PRI does not compare favorably with T1 in terms of the raw number of B channels, and PRI can be considerably more expensive, depending on tariff specifics.
7.6.2.2.1 Line Coding
PRI requires the same line coding as contemporary T1 and E1. Specifically, the coding technique is Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) with Bipolar with Eight-Zero Substitution (B8ZS).
7.6.2.2.2 Framing
T1 and E-1 framing conventions are exactly the same at the U, T, and S reference points of an ISDN circuit. PRI requires the extended super-frame (ESF) format, which supports nonintrusive signaling and control. This approach eliminates any T1 issues of bit robbing and, therefore, supports clear-channel communications. ISDN, of course, accomplishes signaling and control functions over the D channel. PRI uses time slot 24 for the D channel. PRA uses time slot 15, which actually is the 16th time slot, as the E1 time slot numbering is 0–31.
7.6.2.3 H Channels (N×64)
H channels (High-speed channels) are functionally equivalent to B channels but provide greater aggregate bandwidth in PRI applications. In this N × 64 mode, any number of B channels can be aggregated, or bonded, on a dynamic basis to enable multirate communications through inverse multiplexing. The ISDN approach does have a drawback, however, when compared to traditional inverse muxes, as the connection must be torn down and reinitiated when channels are added or dropped. The feature is known variously as multirate ISDN, N × 64, channel aggregation, and bonding. H channels find application in fast faxing (Group IV), videoconferencing, high-speed data transfer, high-quality audio transmission, and Frame Relay. Defined H channels include the following:
· H0 channels have an aggregate bit rate of 384 kbps, which is the equivalent of six B channels (6 × 64 kbps = 384 kbps). This is a common port speed offered by Frame Relay service providers.
· H1 is a full DS-1, with no framing overhead. This channel is sensitive to the specifics of the DS-1 implementation.
· H10 operates at 1.472 Mbps, which is the sum of the 23 B channels (23 × 64 kbps = 1.472 Mbps) in a baseline PRI implementation in which channel 24 is devoted to the D channel. H 10 applies in North America and Japan and is based on T1 and J1, respectively.
· H11 operates at 1.536 Mbps, the sum of all 24 B channels for the North American and Japanese versions, which is based on T1. H11 relies on Non-Facility-Associated Signaling (NFAS) to provide a D channel an H10 facility for signaling and control.
· H12 operates at 1.920 Mbps, the sum of all 30 B channels for the European version, which is based on E1.
7.6.2.4 Inverse Muxes
Offered by some manufacturers, inverse muxes enable multiple BRIs to bond, or link, for greater aggregate transmission over multiple BRIs. For example, four BRIs can be linked to support a 512-kbps data transmission. Such an approach competes effectively with Fractional T1 (FT1) where it is available.
7.6.2.5 D-Channel Contention Devices
D-channel contention devices, also known as ISDN routers and offered by some manufacturers, permit as many as eight devices to share a BRI circuit, contending for access to the B channel. The individual devices identify themselves to the network through contention for the D channel. The ISDN router also serves traditional switch functions within the context of the small-user domain.
7.6.3 Link Access Procedure—D Channel
The ISDN D channel supports signaling and control messages between user TE and the carrier networks, both circuit switched and packet switched, and between TE devices in a user-to-user private network. The D channel also can be used for user-to-user communications where the carrier supports it for applications such as credit card verification and transaction processing. Messages conveyed over the D channel employ Link Access Procedure—D channel (LAP-D), a bit-level protocol that runs at Layer 2, the Data Link Layer. LAP-D evolved from the LAP-B protocol used in X.25 networks, which makes a great deal of sense, as the ISDN SS7 signaling and control network run the X.25 packet format. LAP-B, as previously noted, is a derivative of the High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) protocol which, in turn, is based on the IBM Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) frame.
LAP-D is a balanced protocol that operates in Asynchronous Balanced Mode (ABM), referring to the fact that the devices have a balanced, rather than a master/ slave, relationship. Therefore, a device at either end of the link can initiate a dialogue at any time. As illustrated in Figure 7.25, the LAP-B frame format includes the following fields:
· Flag: The flag field is a one-octet field that delimits (i.e., establishes the limits or boundaries of) the beginning and end of the frame. The flag is always the specific bit pattern 01111110 (7E in hexadecimal), which is known to all transmitters and receivers.
· Address: The address field is a two-octet field known as the Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI), which is divided into two addresses. The first octet is the Service Access Point Identifier (SAPI), which identifies the destination service access point, each of which can support multiple terminal devices. The second octet is the Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI), which is the address of the destination terminal device.
· Control: The address field is a one-or two-octet field that identifies the frame type. An Information (I) frame carries upper layer (e.g., application) information and some control data. A Supervisory (S) frame carries control information such as I-frame acknowledgment, request for retransmission, and flow control. An Unnumbered (U) frame carries control data such as disconnection request, acknowledgment frame, and frame reject.
· Information: The information field is a variable-size field with a maximum of 260 octets comprising upper layer information. The size of the field is system dependent. Only information frames include an information field.
· Frame Check Sequence: The FCS field is a two-octet field that provides excellent error detection.
Figure 7.25: LAP-D example frame format
7.6.4 ISDN Characteristics and Benefits
ISDN is unusual, if not unique, in that it is undoubtedly the most carefully planned, well-coordinated, and best-documented network technology in history. Despite this fact, or perhaps because of it, ISDN's popularity has lagged due to the previously mentioned issues of cost, availability, and applications. The key characteristics of ISDN include its end-to-end digital nature, which is unusual for a public circuit-switched network. Through a small family of interfaces, a wide range of services can be accessed through the LEC, IXC, or CAP. Rate adaption and channel aggregation permit bandwidth-intensive applications to be supported on a dynamic basis.
The reliance of ISDN on SS7, as is discussed in Chapter 5, offers a number of advantages that include faster call setup and nonintrusive signaling and control. Additionally, SS7 (either with or without ISDN) makes possible a number of interesting CLASS services, including caller ID, name ID, call trace, selective call forwarding, and selective call blocking.
ISDN also is interoperable with X.25, Frame Relay, and ATM. In fact, ISDN standards were developed specifically with these services in mind. X.25 is the packet-level protocol used in SS7. Frame Relay closely aligns with ISDN link-level protocols. Broadband ISDN (B-ISDN) is dependent on ATM network technology, which has been overtaken by the Internet and IP-based networking, in general.
7.6.5 ISDN Characteristics and Drawbacks
ISDN does have some drawbacks. These include limited availability, standards variations, and cost. As discussed earlier in this chapter, availability has always been limited in most nations because ISDN and SS7 software is costly for the carriers to deploy; while ISDN capability can be extended to non-ISDN CO exchanges, that incremental cost is not trivial.
Not surprisingly, cost–benefit considerations dictate the success or failure of technologies, regardless of how compelling they appear at first glance. The cost of an ISDN BRI circuit often is more than twice that of an analog line, and installation costs can be considerably higher. These costs tend to discourage ISDN to some extent, particularly in voice-intensive environments where an ISDN BRI configuration may limit voice to a single channel.
Additionally, many carrier tariffs impose a usage surcharge in the form of a flat rate per minute for circuit-switched connections and a packet surcharge for packet data. The usage charge applies to local as well as long-distance calls. While these additional usage charges tend to discourage ISDN usage, the faster speed of data transfer may serve to reduce call connect time significantly, at least in comparison to dialup modem connections over analog lines.
Hardware costs are additional in support of ISDN. In a BRI environment, such additional equipment might include Terminal Adapters (TAs), inverse muxes, and BRI contention devices. In a PRI application, ISDN software for PBXs and routers represents an additional cost, and older systems generally are not upgradable at any cost.
Notably, ISDN hardware depends on local power. In other words, the phones do not work when the power goes out. Large end-user organizations are accustomed to providing power backup in the form of an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) for voice [e.g., PBX, ACD, and KTS) and data (e.g., workstations, servers, hubs, access points, switches, and routers) systems. Residential and small-business users often do not employ UPS systems. Therefore, ISDN BRI is not recommended as a full replacement for analog telephones. Rather, it should be considered a supplemental service to support a mixture of voice and data applications. Also, note that ISDN adds no real value to most voice communications, other than enhanced voice quality and extending functionality from an ISDN-based PBX system. Call centers, however, prefer PRI trunks, as they deliver Calling Line IDentification (CLID) information at no additional cost and are useful in transferring calls within the PSTN.
Also note that ISDN is required on both ends of the connection in order to provide any benefit. An ISDN BRI, for example, is of no value for access to the Internet or Web unless ISDN is in place at the ISP site. Similarly, ISDN BRI is of no value to the telecommuter for corporate intranet access unless the host location also supports ISDN in the form of either BRI or PRI.
It also is worth noting that ISDN can be wasteful of network resources in an Internet or intranet data application. Remember that ISDN is a circuit-switched service. Also you might remember that circuit switching provides temporary, continuous, and exclusive connectivity. Now, consider that interactive data applications such as the Internet, the Web, and intranets are best served by packet-based networks, as discussed earlier in this chapter. Some years ago, several carriers, including Pacific Bell and US West, sought to stimulate IDSN through tariffs that negated usage charges during off-peak hours. Those pricing plans proved highly successful because they encouraged the use of ISDN for purposes of Internet access. However, the increased usage of the PSTN, which is highly inefficient for bursty, low-volume packet data applications, caused substantial network congestion. Since then, manufacturers of carrier-class equipment have developed devices that recognize the telephone number of an ISP and shunt that traffic around the circuit switch to a packet-switched network, thereby eliminating this issue in properly equipped COs.
ISDN certainly has a lot of benefits to offer in comparison to the PSTN, and it has some limitations. Ultimately, the greatest limitation is that of bandwidth. While ISDN offers much greater bandwidth than the PSTN, plus the advantage of digital communications, IDSN BRI bandwidth pales in comparison to DSL, cable modem, and Fiber-To-The-Premises (FTTP) technologies, all of which are capable of running in the Mbps range. At the PRI level, ISDN does not compete well against fiber-optic-based technologies.
7.6.6 Isdn Standards
As mentioned earlier in this chapter, ISDN standards are voluminous. While still under development in some respects, current ITU-T standards for ISDN include the following:
· I.441/4511: ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
· I.515: Parameters for ISDN internetworking
· Q.700: Signaling System Number 7 (SS7) specifications
· Q.921: Layer 2 specification for D channel; Link Access Protocol, D Channel (LAPD)
· Q.931: Layer 3 User Network Interface (UNI) specifications
· V.110: B-channel procedures (Europe) for Terminal Adapters (TAs)
· V.120: B-channel procedures (North America) for TAs
In addition to the ITU-T, other organizations actively develop and promote ISDN standards. For example, ANSI (United States) and ETSI (Europe)each lobby the ITU for the acceptance of their parochial ISDN variations.
7.6.7 Isdn Applications
The applications for ISDN are broad in range. While ISDN was long phrased a technology in search of an application, it later opened to applications developers, and aggressively so. There is no killer app for ISDN. Rather, there are a number of applications that, in total, enhance its future. A host of applications that benefit from the improved quality of digital networking and are bandwidth intensive are well served by ISDN. Further, ISDN offers an affordable circuit-switched alternative to DDS, Switched 56, and T-carrier, which simply cannot be cost justified in many cases.
Personal office internetworking, remote office internetworking, and telecommuting (or Telework) all are facilitated by the increased bandwidth and error performance offered by ISDN BRI. In such applications, file transfers and facsimile transmission are accomplished much more quickly and with much greater clarity; the improved quality of the voice communications presents an added benefit.
ISDN also is used for access to packet data networks, including X.25, Frame Relay, ATM, and IP, with users benefiting from the faster call setup and teardown time made available by virtue of SS7. Because either the B channels or D channels can be used for packet data transfer in a BRI implementation, ISDN offers additional flexibility and bandwidth utilization. Additionally, some manufacturers of Terminal Adapters (TAs) offer built-in X.25 PADs and Frame Relay Access Devices (FRADs) for end-to-end error correction [27].
As a replacement or backup for dedicated digital services, ISDN performs well for data and image networking, whether in a host-to-host, LAN-to-LAN, or remote LAN access application. Intensive users of the Internet and Web find ISDN bandwidth to be of great advantage because the speed of call set up and file transfer increases considerably compared to dial-up analog connections. A typical Web page, for example, takes 1.5 min to load over an analog line with a 28.8-kbps modem and a little less with a 33.6-kbps modem but less than 20s at BRI speed of 128 kbps. As is discussed in Chapter 3, incoming call centers can take advantage of ISDN to increase productivity as well as make use of remote agents working from home.
At least one example merits further discussion, for purposes of illustration. A remote worker might desire to access an application residing on a LAN-connected server. An ISDN call to a local LAN site saves on long-distance charges; that LAN site connects the user to a remote site through another ISDN link. When the remote client workstation is idle, ISDN disconnects the LAN-to-LAN link to save on long-distance charges. Through a process known as spoofing, the application remains alive, as it continues to see a logical link over the B channel. The interactive data conversation can quickly be reinitiated due to the fast call setup time of SS7, which is an integral element of ISDN. The remote worker in this scenario might be a telecommuter working from home several days a week.
In terms of vertical markets, ISDN is of particular interest in the health care and education sectors, largely because of its ability to support imaging and video through rate adaption. TeleMedicine, for example, enables specialists to diagnose and treat patients in remote areas based on video examination and transmission of X-ray images across error-free and high-speed ISDN links.
The applications for ISDN are virtually unlimited, at least in terms of the network services that you can access. Through a single ISDN local loop, voice, facsimile, data, video, and image information can be accommodated. Additionally, simultaneous access to multiple networks and network services can be accomplished, perhaps including circuit-switched voice, X.25 packet, and Frame Relay. From a user's perspective, ISDN is highly flexible. From a carrier's perspective, ISDN offers the advantage of consolidating access to multiple networks, thereby relieving the strain on local loop, switching, and transport facilities. In other words, the LECs can market ISDN as a single network access solution—sort of a one-stop shop.
Notably, ISDN often is used as a backup to Frame Relay. In the event of a Frame Relay network failure, such as the total failure experienced in the AT&T network in 1998, the ISDN circuit responds immediately without dropping the data session. This approach offers diversity of both networks and services, offering greater protection than a backup Frame Relay permanent virtual circuit (PVC), which also would be affected by a total network outage.
7.6.8 Variations on the Theme
Worldwide ISDN has experienced differing levels of success due to various marketing approaches, pricing strategies, and, in some cases, aggressive government support. The Japanese government, for example, has lent strong support to the development and deployment of high-technology networks and network services.
Telecom Australia achieved much success in marketing PRI to large user organizations, in part as an alternative to leased lines. An unusual offering is that of semipermanent circuits within PRI, priced at approximately 50 percent of the cost of a dedicated circuit. In the competitive Australian telecom environment, this approach was successful in countering leased-line networks offered by alternative carriers such as Optus.
Deutsche Bundespost Telekom offers ISDN on a widely available and low-cost basis. In excess of 80 percent of Germany's population has access to ISDN within six weeks. Pricing is very attractive compared to leased lines.
Europe, for years, has offered a service known as 0B+D. This offering provides access to a solo 16-kbps D channel for low-speed data transmission. Packet data are supported at speeds up to 9.6 kbps, with signaling and control consuming the balance of the capacity; no B channels are involved. This service effectively challenges X.25 packet networking for transaction-oriented applications such as credit card authorization. A number of LECs in the United States now offer ISDN BRI variations such as 1B+D and 0B+D for applications where only a single B channel or a single D channel is required.
7.6.9 Always On/Dynamic ISDN
An interesting variation on the ISDN theme is Always On/Dynamic ISDN (AODI), which enables the user to establish a LAN-like always-on ISDN BRI connection to an ISP server, corporate intranet server, or corporate video server, for example, through special equipment and using only the D channel. The D channel maintains the always-on logical link between the client and the server systems, enabling the transfer of data (e.g., e-mail, stock quotes, or news bulletins) at rates of up to 9.6 kbps over an X.25 switched virtual circuit and without the call set up time required for a circuit-switched connection. As illustrated in Figure 7.26, a portion of the D channel on the client side operates as a link to a X.25 packet network, with the Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol (MPPP) used for access to the network from the TA. The D-channel AODI service employs the X.25 packet protocol that is used for signaling and control purposes in the SS7 network and establishes an SVC over the packet network. On the client side, the TCP/IP suite is encapsulated within the X.25 logical channel carried by the D channel, in support of connectionless data transfer. Packet handlers route the data packets around the circuit-switched network and over the X.25 packet-switched network, thereby maximizing efficiency and avoiding the unnecessary use of the circuit-switched PSTN for such an inappropriate application. On the server side, the SVC can be terminated on a BRI D channel, a designated PRI B channel, or a high-speed serial link. Should the need arise, the equipment automatically activates one or both B channels for transfer of large sets of data or to establish a videoconference. Once the need for the B channel(s) has ceased, the equipment automatically terminates those channel connections, the cost of which typically is usage sensitive. The cost of D-channel usage in an AODI application generally is based on a flat rate per month, with surcharges for kilopackets or megapackets applying above a defined usage threshold [28, 29].
Figure 7.26: Always-on/dynamic ISDN
Chapter 8: Local Area Networks—Connectivity and Internetworking
OVERVIEW
Just as computer networks have grown across continents and oceans to interconnect major computing facilities around the world, they are now growing down corridors and between buildings to interconnect minicomputers in offices and laboratories.
Robert M. Metcalfe and David R. Boggs, Xerox Palo Alto Research Center,
Ethernet: Distributed Packet Switching for Local Computer Networks,
Association for Computing Machinery, 1976
Once upon a time, computer networks consisted of mainframes in glass houses, so named because you could only watch through the glass window as a highly trained computer operator ran the machine. Input was in the form of punch cards read by card readers, and output was in the form of printed results via local printers. A few local terminals existed for input purposes, mostly control and programming. All processing occurred on a batch, rather than an interactive, basis. In other words, the punch cards associated with a job were fed in a batch into a card reader, which transmitted the program and data input in a batch over a short circuit to the processor, which processed the program in a batch, and output the results in a batch to a printer, which printed in a batch. The first true mainframe was the IBM 360, introduced in 1964 [1]. As the first computer capable of both scientific and business computing, it went full circle—hence the designation 360 (degrees) [2]. During my pursuit of several degrees (academic) at the University of Texas at Austin, my computer programs, which seldom ran successfully, were processed in batch mode on a CDC 6600 mainframe computer. That heavy-metal machine cost roughly $ 6 million, occupied a huge room that was at least three times the size of a typical two-bedroom house, was water cooled, required tons of air conditioning to keep the ambient temperature low enough to age meat in the computer room, had enough large cabinets to house the population of a small nation, and possessed far less processing power and storage capacity than a contemporary laptop computer. (I may have exaggerated this a bit, but not much.)
Over time, it became possible for multiple users at dumb terminals to input information to the mainframe. The terminals were connected to ports on the mainframe through terminal controllers, or cluster controllers. Controllers essentially act as traffic concentrators to enable multiple inputs from clusters of slow terminals to share one of a limited number of very expensive ports on the host computer. As time ticked away, Remote Job Entry (RJE) was developed to enable groups of users seated at remote clusters of dumb terminals to enter data from a remote location, connecting through a cluster controller to the mainframe over a Wide Area Network (WAN), perhaps over a Dataphone Digital Service (DDS) circuit.
Parallel to the development of data networking, the computers themselves began to change. Computers became more powerful as processor speeds increased with the development of ever-faster microprocessors on silicon chips. Memory became more available as chip technology and hard-drive technology both improved. Additionally, computers became ever smaller and less expensive, to the point that the current typical desktop Personal Computer (PC) is equivalent to an early mainframe that would have filled a moderate-size office building. The PC was legitimized by the introduction of the IBM PC in 1983. By 1993, an estimated 75 percent of professionals in the United States had a workstation on the desktop. In this day and age of the mobile professional, many of those PCs are laptops, and tablet and hand-held PCs are increasing in power by the day.
It was logical that all of this computing power and storage capability on all of these desktops would lead to a need to network those devices within the workplace. And it seems as though data traffic is more or less in line with the Pareto principle, with an estimated 80 percent of data transfer confined to the workplace, and only 20 percent traveling across the WAN. Whether or not that figure is accurate, PC users clearly have a requirement to share access to hosts, applications, databases, and printers. They also require a means to share access to WANs. Local Area Networks (LANs) provide a solution to those requirements.
Robert M. Metcalfe and his associates at the Xerox Palo Alto Research Center (Xerox PARC) first developed both the concept of a LAN and the enabling technology. That first network originally was known as the Altos Aloha Network because it connected Altos computers through a network based on the University of Hawaii's AlohaNet packet radio system technology. In a memo written May 22, 1973, it became known as Ethernet, from luminiferous ether [3], the omnipresent passive medium once theorized to pervade all space and to support the propagation of electromagnetic energy, even through a vacuum. The existence of the ether was disproved around 1900 by Albert Einstein, Albert A. Michaelson, Edward W. Morley, and others, but Ethernet thrived. This highly experimental technology supported a transmission rate of 2.94 Mbps over thick coaxial cable. Xerox commercialized the technology, renaming it The Xerox Wire. Gordon Bell, Vice President of Engineering at Digital Equipment Corporation (DEC, subsequently acquired by Compaq, which later merged with Hewlett-Packard), hired Metcalfe as a consultant in 1979 for the expressed purpose of developing a LAN technology that would not conflict with the Xerox patent. Metcalfe then facilitated a joint venture of DEC, Intel, and Xerox. Known as DIX [4], the venture standardized the technology in 1979 at 10 Mbps, reverting to the name Ethernet; it quickly became a de facto standard. LANs were recognized officially in February 1980, when the IEEE established Project 802 at the request of its members. (Note: Project 802 took its name from the fact that it was established in the year 19 80 and the month 2 (February). Once again, with the help of my consulting editor in this case, I have proved myself to be the master of the arcane.) In December 1982, the first standard was published and circulated. While IEEE 802.3, to which we commonly refer as Ethernet, actually is a variation on the Ethernet standard, I adopt the conversational reference throughout this book and do not dwell on that technical distinction. For our purposes, 802.3 and Ethernet essentially are one. (Note: Because the 802.3 and true Ethernet frame formats are dissimilar, they cannot interoperate.)
Ethernet clearly remains the most popular LAN standard. In part, that popularity is due to the fact that 802.3 was the first standard. In part, it also is due to the inherent simplicity of Ethernet, as compared to other standards such as Token Ring. Also, DEC's chip design team sourced chip manufacturing to Intel, Advanced Micro Devices, and Mostek, thereby creating a highly competitive environment that quickly led to low chip prices. Token Ring is considerably more complex and costly. Developed by IBM, Token Ring chips were sourced exclusively to Texas Instruments. The impact of this decision was that of higher prices due to the lack of competition [4]. According to Metcalfe's estimates, in 1994 there were 50 million Ethernet-connected computers, 5 million of which were on 10-Mbps networks [5]. Further, 500,000 Ethernet networks were TCP/IP registered and 50,000 were connected to the Internet. No doubt those numbers have increased considerably in the past dozen years, as have the speeds at which Ethernet runs.
This discussion of the basic concepts of LANs and LAN internetworking serves as the launching pad for discussion of the network technologies of the future. In this chapter, I address the definition, origin, and evolution of LANs and their application. Dimensions of LANs to be explored include media alternatives, physical and logical topology, baseband versus broadband, Medium Access Control (MAC), and standards and standards bodies. I define and illustrate bridges, routers, hubs, switches, and gateways as well as LAN operating systems. This chapter concludes with a discussion of LAN internetworking, remote LAN access, and recent developments in the realm of high-speed LANs and wireless LANs and Personal Area Networks (PANs).
8.1 LANs DEFINED
A local area network is a form of local (limited-distance) shared packet network for computer communications. LANs interconnect computers and peripherals over a common medium so users might share access to host computers, databases, files, applications, and peripherals. LANs conform to the client/server architecture, which essentially is a distributed computing architecture that takes advantage of the fact that both the client workstations and the servers are intelligent, programmable devices and exploits the capabilities of each. In such a network, client applications on microcomputers run against one or more centralized servers, which are high-performance multiport computers with substantial processing power and large amounts of memory. Some servers are positioned as devices that control the operational, administrative, and executive functions for the network, including authenticating legitimate users, granting access privileges to a database or perhaps a shared printer, and recording usage data. Some servers are positioned as database engines, that is, application or data repositories, capable of processing client requests for information and managing the resident data. Note: LANs also support peer-to-peer communications between clients and between servers.
Generally, LAN specifications are the province of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), although the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and other standards bodies are involved, and the regulators are very much involved in spectrum allocation in the Wireless LAN (WLAN) domain. LANs operate at Layer 1, the Physical Layer, and Layer 2, the Data Link Layer, of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Reference Model. Raw bandwidth ranges up to 10 Gbps, although actual throughput often is much less. LANs are limited to a maximum distance of only a few miles or kilometers, although they often operate within a much more confined area measured in feet or meters. LANs support the transmission of data in frame format, with the frames varying in size within specified minimums and maximums.
LANs are used almost exclusively for data communications over relatively short distances such as within an office, office building, or campus environment. LANs enable multiple workstations to share access to multiple host computers, other workstations, applications and databases, printers and other peripherals, and WAN connections. LANs traditionally are used in computer data applications, although they increasingly support video and voice communications as well.
8.2 LAN DIMENSIONS
LANs can be characterized along a number of common dimensions, for ease of understanding. Those dimensions include transmission medium, physical and logical topology, baseband versus broadband, and medium access control method.
8.2.1 Transmission Media
The shared media for LANs can include most of the transmission media discussed in Chapter 2. Although coaxial cable was the original medium, fiber-optic cable has superseded coax in the LAN backbone. Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) replaced coax to the desktop beginning in the early 1990s. Radio Frequency (RF) wireless technologies more recently have become extremely popular, particularly in providing the final link to portable and mobile computers. While Wireless LANs (WLANs) generally are limited to special radio technologies, InfraRed (IR) technology is used in certain applications, and microwave and IR systems connect LANs and LAN segments in a campus environment. Satellite rarely is used in any way because propagation delay renders it unsatisfactory for interactive communications. Satellite links also defy the notion of a local area network, although they sometimes are used to link LANs and LAN segments in remote areas.
8.2.1.1 Coaxial Cable
Coaxial cable was the transmission medium first employed in LANs. Although coax is expensive to acquire and to configure and reconfigure, its performance characteristics are excellent. Additionally, Data Processing/ Management Information Systems (DP/MIS) managers traditionally were comfortable with coax, which routinely was specified in the mainframe and midrange computer world. In fact, the technology did not exist until fairly recently to make effective use of other options such as twisted pair, fiber optics, and radio systems.
In retrospect, perhaps the use of coaxial cable lessened the resistance of DP/MIS managers to the concept of LANs. Those who lived in the mainframe world (most did) regarded PCs with disdain and sneered at twisted pair, which they referred to as telephone wire.
The advantages of coaxial cable include high bandwidth and exceptional error performance over relatively long distances as the thick inner core conductor results in fairly modest signal attenuation. Further, the outer shield rejects ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) and Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) as well as providing excellent security. Coax is also highly durable, but the costs of acquisition, deployment, and reconfiguration are high. While the disadvantages of coaxial cable have been mitigated to a large extent through the development of new coax designs, those designs also affect system performance. By way of example, consider three variations on the coax theme: ThickNet, ThinNet, and Twinax.
· ThickNet: Thick Ethernet, also known as 10Base5, was approved by the IEEE in 1983. 10Base5 uses traditional thick coax, often referred to as goldenrod, referring to its high cost, high value, and the yellow cable sheath used by some manufacturers. Other manufacturers used orange cable sheaths for thick coax, giving rise to the term orange hose. 10Base5 translates to 10Mbps, Baseband (one transmission at a time over a single, shared channel), and 500m maximum segment length. While individual devices can be separated by much greater distances across the network, issues of signal attenuation limit each segment, or link, in the network to approximately 500 m.
· ThinNet: Thin Ethernet, also known as 10Base2, was approved by the IEEE in 1986. 10Base2 uses coax of thinner gauge. The thinner cable is less costly to acquire and deploy, although its performance is less in terms of transmission distance. 10Base2 translates to 10 Mbps, Base band, and 200m maximum segment length (actually 185 m, rounded up).
· Twinax: Twinaxial cable, resembles ThinNet coax, but with twin coaxial conductors, rather than one. Twinax is used in older IBM midrange systems such as Systems 34, 36, and 38 as well as the younger IBM AS/400 and RS/6000. More recently, the IEEE has developed the 10GBase-CX4 standard in support of 10-Gigabit Ethernet (10GbE). Based on the Infiniband high-speed cable assemblies, the specification calls for twinax assemblies operating over distances up to 50 ft. The standard calls for four transmitters and four receivers operating differentially in simplex mode over a bundle of eight twinax cables, with each simplex transmission occurring at 2.5 Gbps at a frequency of 3.125 GHz per channel with 8B/10B line coding. The cost of this patch cord technology is expected to be approximately th that of comparable 10GBase-optical solutions.
8.2.1.2 Twisted Pair
Since the early 1990s, unshielded twisted pair has become very popular as a LAN medium. Although its performance characteristics are less appealing than coax, its low cost and high availability certainly are very attractive. As discussed in detail in Chapter 2, UTP of various categories performs very nicely at signaling speeds from 10 Mbps up to 1 Gbps over relatively short distances.
The advantages of UTP include its low costs of acquisition, deployment, and reconfiguration. The disadvantages of UTP include its relatively low bandwidth and poor error performance over long distances. Because the carrier frequency must be high to support a data rate of 10/100 Mbps or more and as high-frequency signals attenuate relatively quickly, error performance suffers considerably over a distance. Therefore, distances are severely restricted. Additionally, the radiated electromagnetic field is considerable at the high frequencies required to support high speeds, which poses security concerns. Security at this level, however, generally is not considered to be a significant issue, as the cabling system is restricted to the premises. More importantly, the radiated electromagnetic field can create noise that affects signals traveling on adjacent pairs in the same cable and in nearby cables. At 10 Mbps, however, Category 5 (Cat 5) cable commonly is used in a structured wiring plan to support both voice and data, with two pairs typically pulled to each duplex jack—one pair for voice and one for data.
The disadvantages of UTP have been mitigated to some extent, and the LAN applications have increased through the development and use of Cat 3, 4, and 5 UTP. Since Cat 5 is by far the most capable of these standard options, it currently is the inside wire default for both voice and data. Category 6 is now enjoying application in high-speed LANs and the Cat 7 specification is under development. The following discussions of 1Base5, 10Base-T, 100Base-T, 1000Base-T, and 10GBase-T serve to illustrate the evolution of twisted-pair applications in the LAN domain:
· 1Base5 (IEEE, mid-1980s) translates to 1Mbps, Baseband, and 500m maximum segment length and was the predecessor to 10Base-T. AT&T spearheaded the 1Base5 initiative in support of its StarLAN product. 1Base5 runs over Cat 3, 4, or 5 UTP. 1Base5 is considered obsolete.
· 10Base-T translates to 10Mbps, Base band over T wisted pair (IEEE, 1990) and refers to Ethernet running over Cat 3, 4, or 5 UTP. The maximum segment length between the 10Base-T hub and the attached device (e.g., workstation or printer) is specified at 100m or less, although good Cat 5 cable will perform well over somewhat longer distances. The 10Base-T hub is a wire hub that serves as a multiport repeater as well as a central point of interconnection.
· 100Base-T (IEEE, 1995) is similar to 10Base-T Ethernet hub technology, running at 100 Mbps and requiring Cat 5 UTP or better. Distances originally were limited to 100m over Cat 5 cable but now extend to 350m over Cat 5e.
· 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3ab, 1999) is similar in concept to the predecessor 10/100Base-T. The original specifications called for Cat 5 cable to support Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) over four pairs and distances up to 100 m. Category 6 cabling specifications include UTP, Shielded Twisted Pair (STP), and Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP) rated at 250 MHz over distances up to 220 m.
· 10GBase-T (IEEE 802.3an, June 2006) is a specification for 10GbE over Cat 6 cable for distances up to at least 55 m, although distances generally can be extended to 100 m. The expectation is that Cat 7 cable will extend those distances even further. Cat 7 is STP with a combination foil and braided screen construction. Cat 7 supports signaling rates up to 600 MHz, although the usable spectrum can be up to 750 MHz.
Category 3 (Cat 3) UTP also is used for 4-Mbps Token Ring LANs. Category 4 (Cat 4) UTP, developed for 16-Mbps Token Ring LANs, has a bandwidth of 20 MHz. In addition to its application in Cat 6 and 7 cables, STP sometimes is used in high-noise environments in which UTP data transmission is especially susceptible to EMI or RFI. Examples include manufacturing environments where there are large numbers of powerful machines, power plants, and old buildings (e.g., hospitals, or government or military facilities) where it might be impossible when installing a LAN to avoid placing wires close to electric motors or older fluorescent light fixtures.
8.2.1.3 Fiber-Optic Cable
Because of its outstanding performance characteristics, optical fiber also is used extensively in contemporary LAN applications. Its cost and fragility, however, generally relegate it to use as a backbone technology in Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) networks, for example.
The advantages of fiber certainly include the combination of high bandwidth and excellent error performance. Additionally, fiber performs well over long distances and offers excellent security. The disadvantages of fiber transmission systems include their high cost of acquisition, as compared to UTP systems. While the fiber, itself, is not significantly more expensive than Cat 5e UTP, the light sources and detectors are considerably more expensive than the metallic interfaces used with UTP. As fiber is very fragile, it must be protected carefully, and redundancy is always a good idea.
As LAN speeds have increased by orders of magnitude during the past several years, however, optical fiber has enjoyed great popularity for the interconnection of hubs, switches, and routers, many of which currently feature direct optical fiber interfaces. As noted in Table 8.1, the interconnection of 100-Mbps Ethernet hubs and switches is supported over much longer distances with fiber than with Cat 5 UTP. Therefore, Cat 5 UTP generally is relegated to terminal connections, although it can be used to interconnect hubs and switches over short distances in the backbone, and fiber generally is used only for backbone applications. While the specifics of the optical fiber system vary widely, Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and Vertical-Cavity Surface Emitting Lasers (VCSELs) traditionally have been used in conjunction with various types of MultiMode Fiber (MMF). As is discussed in Chapter 2, this combination works well at speeds up to 1 Gbps or so over very short distances (300m or so) and is relatively inexpensive. At higher speeds and over longer distances, the combination of laser diodes and Single-Mode Fiber (SMF) is the clear choice.
|
Table 8.1: Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps) Distance Restrictions [6] Open table as spreadsheet |
|||
|
Standard |
Cable Type |
Duplex |
Maximum Nominal Distance |
|
100Base-T4 |
≥Cat 3 UTP |
Full or Half |
100 m |
|
100Base-TX |
≥Cat 5 UTP |
Full or Half |
100 m |
|
100Base-FX |
MMF |
Full |
2 km |
|
100Base-FX |
SMF |
Full |
40 km |
The advent of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) standards in 1999 definitely focused attention on optical fiber, although good-quality Cat 5, Cat 5e, and certainly Cat 6 have proven to be acceptable media, and Cat 7 promises to perform well at 1 and 10 Gbps. In support of the interconnection of GbE switches and in order to deal with issues of modal dispersion and pulse dispersion, which I detail in Chapter 2, several optical fiber standards were developed. 1000BaseSX uses short-wave lasers that operate at wavelengths of approximately 850 nm (nanometers). These short-wave lasers are relatively inexpensive and couple efficiently to low-cost MMF for transmission over relatively short distances. 1000Base-LX uses long-wave lasers that operate at wavelengths of approximately 1300 nm. 1000Base-LX offers improved performance over longer distances, although the cost of the technology is considerably greater than that of 1000Base-SX [6–8]. Table 8.2 provides a brief comparison of these two standards.
|
Table 8.2: Gigabit Ethernet (IEEE 802.3z) and 10GbE (IEEE 802.3ae) Media Specifications [6–7] Open table as spreadsheet |
|||||
|
Standard |
Fiber Type |
Core Diameter(μ m) |
Wavelength (nm) |
Distance Limitations (Maximum) |
|
|
1000Base-SX |
MMF |
62.5 |
850 |
160 |
220 m |
|
1000Base-SX |
MMF |
62.5 |
850 |
200 |
275 m |
|
1000Base-SX |
MMF |
50.0 |
850 |
400 |
500 m |
|
1000Base-SX |
MMF |
50.0 |
850 |
500 |
550 m |
|
1000Base-LX |
MMF |
62.5 |
1300 |
500 |
550 m |
|
1000Base-LX |
MMF |
50.0 |
1300 |
400 |
550 m |
|
1000Base-LX |
MMF |
50.0 |
1300 |
500 |
550 m |
|
1000Base-LX |
SMF |
9.0 |
1310 |
Not applicable |
5 km |
|
10GBase-SR, SW |
MMF |
62.5 |
850 |
160 |
300 m |
|
10GBase-LR, LW |
SMF |
8.3, 9.0, 10.0 |
1310 |
Not applicable |
10 km |
|
10GBase-ER, EW |
SMF |
8.3, 9.0, 10.0 |
1550 |
Not applicable |
40 km |
|
10GBase-LX4 |
MMF |
50.0, 62.5 |
1310 |
500 |
300 m |
|
10GBase-LX4 |
SMF |
10.0 |
1310 |
Not applicable |
10 km |
|
[a]Modal bandwidth, as expressed in MHz/km, is the measure of the capacity of a MMF in Gbps applications. A MMF with a higher modal bandwidth will support data transmission at a given rate over a longer distance. Modal bandwidth is determined by the dispersion characteristics of the fiber, including both modal dispersion and chromatic dispersion. The MMF core diameter (50 μm vs. 62.5 μm) is one of the fiber attributes that influence modal bandwidth. |
The IEEE 802.3ae standard for 10GbE addresses acceptable fiber media options, as listed in Table 8.2. The MMF standards are 10GBase-SW and 10GBase-SR, both of which use shortwave lasers that operate at wavelengths of approximately 850 nm, as is the case with the 1000Base-SX standard for GbE. Again, these short-wave lasers are relatively inexpensive and couple efficiently to low-cost MMF for transmission over relatively short distances. The S in 10GBase-SR refers to the Short range of the system, the L in 10GBase-LR refers to L ong range, and the E in 10GBase-ER refers to E xtended range. These standards are all intended for dark fiber applications, meaning that the fiber is inactive (i.e., dark or not lit) fiber, intended for a specific point-to-point 10GbE application, and not intended for interconnection to the WAN. The letter X indicates that the 8B/10B signal encoding technique is used. The letter R indicates that 64B/66B signal encoding is used. The number 4 in 10GBase-LX4 indicates the use of 4 wavelengths through Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing (CWDM). The W in 10GBase-SW refers to the WAN Interface Sublayer (WIS) that enables compatibility between 10GbE equipment and SONET long haul equipment in a LAN-to-WAN interface scenario.
8.2.1.4 Wireless
Wireless LANs (WLANs) offer the obvious advantage of avoiding much of the time and cost associated with deploying wires and cables. This is especially important in a dynamic environment where portability is desirable, such as an office where cubicles are frequently reconfigured. WLANs have found acceptance in providing LAN capabilities in temporary quarters, where costly cabling soon would have to be abandoned, and in older buildings, where wires are difficult or impossible to run. WLAN technologies include both RF and IR.
The most common approach is that of RF, which involves fitting each device with a low-power transmit/receive radio antenna, which traditionally is in the form of a PC card. Newer laptop, tablet, and hand-held computers boast built-in antennas. Frequency assignments for commercial applications generally are in the 2.4- and 5-GHz bands. The physical configuration involves a hub antenna located at a central point (see Figure 8.1), such as the center or the corner of the ceiling, where Line-Of-Sight (LOS) or near-LOS connectivity can be established with the various terminal antennas. While LOS is not strictly required at these frequencies, it is always desirable and is particularly important at higher frequencies, which suffer greater attenuation from physical obstructions. The hub antenna then connects to the servers, peripherals, and other hosts via cabled connections, which also connect together multiple hub antennas for transmission between rooms, floors, buildings, and so on. In order to serve multiple workstations, spread-spectrum radio technology often is employed to maximize the effective use of limited bandwidth. Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) involves scattering packets of a data stream across a range of frequencies, rather than using a single transmission frequency. A side benefit of spread spectrum is that of increased security, since the signal is virtually impossible to intercept [9]. While the raw aggregate bandwidth of a wireless radio LAN generally is described as falling into a range (e.g., 2–11 Mbps) sensitive to link quality at any given time, the effective throughput generally is considerably less due to a variety of overhead issues. Some wireless LANs also use Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) transmission, which spreads the original signal across a much wider band of frequencies, thereby yielding a greater likelihood that the signal will get through to the access hub [10]. Regardless of the frequency range employed, metal studs and thermal windows in newer buildings, lead paint in older buildings (e.g., my 1909 farmhouse), and all sorts of other sources of interference can combine to reduce the effectiveness of RF-based wireless LANs.
Figure 8.1: Wireless LAN configuration
Most WLANs use unlicensed frequencies in the 2.4-and 5-GHz ranges. This approach avoids the expensive and time-consuming spectrum licensing process. However, the use of unlicensed frequencies creates significant potential for interference from other systems in proximity that use the same frequencies. A wide variety of other devices (e.g., garage door openers, bar code scanners, industrial microwave ovens, and cordless telephones) run in the same frequency ranges, which are in the Industrial/Scientific/Medical (ISM) bands. The risk works in both directions, of course, as there is the potential that you could click your mouse and cause garage doors to open and close all over the neighborhood. (That's a joke, just to keep things in perspective, although I suppose it's possible.) The systems that use licensed frequencies avoid the potential for interference but require that the manufacturer carefully police the deployment of such systems on a site-specific basis and under the terms of an omni-license.
A good WLAN example is the IEEE 802.11b Ethernet standard, aka Wi-Fi, which begins at theoretical maximum transmission rates of 11 Mbps, with optional fallback to 2 Mbps in noisy environments. The large number of products supporting that specification generally deliver actual throughput of considerably less, as they are sensitive to factors such as background noise, distance, physical obstructions, and competing systems running in the same band. The more recent 802.11a specification runs at much higher speeds in the 5-GHz range. The 802.11 standards use the same collision-based access protocol as is optional with more traditional wired Ethernet. I discuss WLANs in more detail toward the end of this chapter.
Infrared light also can be used as a WLAN transmission system. As is described in Chapter 2, a Free Space Optics (FSO) IR system generally requires a LOS between the light source and receiver. Within a room, however, it is possible to bounce the light signal off of a wall, ceiling, or other surface between the transmitter and receiver using a technique known as diffused propagation [5]. This method works well as long as the signal retains sufficient strength but is purely a trial-and-error technique, so results can vary widely. Laptop computers, tablet computer, and Personal Digital Assistants (PDAs) and other hand-held computers sometimes are equipped with infrared (IR) ports, as are printers. Microsoft's announcement (April 1999) of IR support for Windows 2000 provided something of a boost to the use of IR in the LAN domain. This turned out to be little more that moral support, however, as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth teamed up and quickly overwhelmed IR. A quick informal poll I conducted of network administrators across the country in June 2006 revealed that very few use IR. A few use it for occasional print jobs when visiting a remote site, but most who use IR do so only occasionally to sync up hand-held computers or cell phones. I also visited a local electronics retail store, where I found that no (i.e., zero) devices had IR ports. A quick search of the Dell and Compaq websites yielded no (i.e., zero) mention of IR.
Wireless LAN technology has matured very quickly and is continuing to evolve. Although acquisition costs are not necessarily low when compared to wired LANs, configuration and reconfiguration costs are virtually nonexistent. Wireless offers the considerable advantages of portability and even mobility. Security remains a concern, but recent developments in encryption technology have largely addressed that issue, at least in the short term. Actually, this sounds so good that I think I'll take my laptop out on the back deck and finish this chapter. (It's a beautiful spring day here in Mt. Vernon.) I can connect to the Web via an 802.11g connection to my Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) router. Even though I connect over a distance of 30m or so, around two corners, and through a wall, I can connect to the WLAN access point at no less than 2 Mbps, which is faster than the downstream signaling speed of 1.544 Mbps that I can achieve over my ADSL circuit.
8.2.2 Topology: Physical and Logical Configurations
The physical topology, or layout, of a LAN is in the form of a bus, ring, or star. As trains, ovals, planets, and constellations are not defined, you should avoid vendors promoting such topologies.
8.2.2.1 Bus Topologies
As shown in Figure 8.2, bus topologies are multipoint electrical circuits. The original bus topology employed coaxial cable, although contemporary bus systems also can make use of UTP or STP. Data transmission is bidirectional, with the attached devices transmitting and receiving in both directions. While generally operating at a theoretical raw data rate of 10/100 Mbps, actual throughput typically is much less. Bus networks employ a decentralized method of Medium Access Control (MAC) known as Carrier Sense Multiple Access (CSMA), which enables the attached devices to make independent decisions relative to media access and initiation of transmission. Unfortunately, this approach results in data collisions, from which the transmitting device must recover through retransmission, which has a decidedly negative impact on throughput. As bus networks are not controlled from a centralized point, a given device cannot determine when, if ever, it will gain access to the shared bus. Therefore, such networks can be characterized as nondeterministic in nature. Bus networks are specified in the IEEE 802.3 standard and generally have a maximum specified length of 1.5 miles (2.5 km).
Figure 8.2: Ethernet bus topology
The original, classic Ethernet was based on a bus topology comprising coaxial cable segments that could be a maximum of 500m in length. Each segment supports as many as 1024 (210 = 1024) network addresses, each of which is associated with an attached device. The maximum segment length was due to issues of attenuation at the relatively high carrier frequency. Ethernet segments could connect through bridges, which function as signal repeaters. The total route length of the entire Ethernet was limited to 2.5 km, which is a function of both signal propagation time and MAC mechanisms. I discuss CSMA/CD and CSMA/CA, the Ethernet MAC standards, later in this chapter.
A tree topology is a variation on the bus theme, with multiple branches off the trunk of the central bus. Bus networks also suffer from the vulnerability of the bus—should the bus be compromised, the entire network is compromised. Similarly, tree networks are dependent on the integrity of the root bus [2].
8.2.2.2 Ring Topologies
Ring networks (refer to Figure 8.3) are laid out in a physical ring, or closed-loop, configuration. Information travels around the ring in only one direction, with each attached station or node serving as a repeater [2]. Rings generally are coax or fiber in nature, operating at raw transmission rates of 4, 16, 20, or 100+ Mbps. Rings are deterministic in nature, employing token passing as the method of medium access control to ensure all nodes can access the network within a predetermined time interval. Priority access is recognized. A master control station controls access to the transmission medium, with backup control stations assuming responsibility in the event of a master failure. Throughput is very close to raw bandwidth, as data collisions do not occur in such a carefully controlled environment and, therefore, retransmissions are unusual. On the negative side, the failure of a single node can compromise the entire network, although many ring networks add a fail-safe mechanism to prevent a total ring failure in the event that a lobe is cut. In the case of Token Ring, a relay in the wiring hub would actuate if the lobe were cut, thus restoring the balance of the ring to proper operation. Electrical ring networks are specified in the IEEE 802.5 standard; FDDI is an ANSI specification. Token-Passing Ring, IBM Token Ring, and FDDI all are based on ring topologies.
8.2.2.3 Star Topologies
Star topologies (Figure 8.4) consist of a central node, or point of interconnection, to which all other devices are attached directly, generally via UTP or STP. The central node is in the form of a hub, switch, or router. Transmission rates vary, with 10Base-T operating at 10 Mbps and 100Base-T at 100 Mbps. Perhaps the greatest advantage of a star is that individual devices can connect to the node via UTP or STP. Another key advantage of a star is the ability to isolate a dis-ruptive or failed station, thereby eliminating any negative effect it may have on overall LAN performance. Additionally, multiple attached devices simultaneously can share the full bandwidth of the LAN, at least in a switched environment. The primary disadvantage is that a hub failure is catastrophic; as all connectivity is provided through the central hub, its failure affects the entire LAN. Examples of star configurations include 10Base-T and 100Base-T. AT&T's StarLAN and DataKit and 100VG-AnyLAN are now considered obsolete. Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), also based on a star topology, enjoyed the LAN switching spotlight briefly but was overwhelmed by switched Ethernet at 100 Mbps and 1 Gbps.
Figure 8.4: 100Base-T star topology
8.2.2.4 Physical versus Logical Topology
A network may be laid out physically in one fashion but operate logically in an entirely different manner. For example, 100Base-T (see Figure 8.4) physically appears as a star configuration because the devices are arrayed around a central node in the form of a hub. But 100Base-T operates as an Ethernet bus. The bus still exists, but under the skin of the central hub to which all stations in the workgroup connect via UTP. 10/100Base-T collapses the classic Ethernet coax bus into a collapsed backbone and places it under the protection of the hub chassis. In this fashion, the network gains the logical advantages of the Ethernet protocol as well as the physical advantages of a UTP-based star. Similarly, a ring network might operate logically as a ring but be sup-ported physically by a collapsed backbone bus.
8.2.3 Baseband versus Broadband
Two LAN transmission options exist: baseband and broadband. Recall from Chapter 2 that a baseband signal is a signal in its original form, without being altered in any way, whether by modulation or conversion. A baseband transmission system, therefore, is a single-channel system that supports a single transmission at any given time. Also recall from Chapter 1 that, in the WAN domain, broadband is an imprecise term referring to a circuit or channel providing a relatively large amount of bandwidth. In a LAN context, broadband refers to a multichannel system that supports multiple transmissions through Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM). While broadband LANs were quite common in the 1980s, they are very unusual in contemporary applications.
8.2.3.1 Broadband Lans
Broadband LANs are multichannel, analog (i.e., RF-based) LANs (see Figure 8.5) typically based on coaxial cable as the transmission medium, although fiber-optic cable also is used on occasion [2]. Aggregate bandwidth may be as much as 500–750 MHz, supporting perhaps 20–30 channels, each with a width of 6 MHz, plus guardbands. The various channels are multiplexed onto the carrier through Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM). Radio frequency modems accomplish the digital-to-analog conversion process, providing the digital device with access to an analog channel. The modems, which must be tuned and managed carefully, may be either fixed frequency or frequency agile. Fixed-frequency modems must be tuned to a specific frequency channel, while frequency-agile modems can search for an available channel. Although frequency-agile modems are more expensive to acquire, they utilize available bandwidth much more effectively as they mitigate issues of congestion by automatically and dynamically balancing the load among the channels to which they have assigned access privileges.
Figure 8.5: Broadband Lan, with tree-and-branch topology
There are single-cable and dual-cable broadband LANs. A dual-cable LAN involves one cable in support of upstream transmissions from the stations to the head end and a second cable in support of downstream transmissions from the head end to the stations. In a single-cable system, specific frequency channels are designated for upstream transmissions and others for downstream transmissions. The stations connect to the cable through multiport Media Access Units (MAUs) that house the RF modems and that connect to the coax cable, as illustrated in Figure 8.5. All transmissions go through the head end. Broadband LANs commonly use 75-ohm CATV–type coax and use CATV-style connectors, taps, filters, and amplifiers in a tree-and-branch architecture, which essentially is a variation of the bus with multiple branches off of a main root bus, much as there are branches off of the main trunk of a tree.
The IEEE standard for broadband LANs is 10Broad36, translated as 10Mbps, Broad band (multichannel), with 3600m maximum total span. The total span can be divided into multiple segments, each with a maximum distance of 1800 m. The aggre-gate bandwidth is 550 MHz and the FDM channels are 14 MHz wide with 4-MHz guardbands. The modulation technique is Differential Phase Shift Keying (DPSK), a unibit modulation technique discussed in Chapter 6 and illustrated in Figure 8.6.
Figure 8.6: Broadband versus baseband
The characteristics of broadband LANs, generally speaking, are not endearing, so they are seldom used any longer. But their unique properties do have application. In the mid-1990s, for example, Sea World installed broadband LANs in its theme parks to support analog audio (music and voice paging), closed-circuit analog video (entertainment TV and security), as well as data. As the LAN is analog, it easily supports audio and TV. Further, the application is static, rather than dynamic, because the paging zones and closed-circuit TV channels require fixed amounts of bandwidth, and the associated frequency channel assignments need to be changed infrequently, if ever. Further, the locations of the terminal equipment (music and paging sources and speakers, VCRs, video cameras, and TV monitors) are fixed or seldom change. The data transmissions typically are low speed in nature and in support of transaction processing applications such as cash and credit card trans-actions initiated from the ticket counters, restaurants, and gift shops. Since the transaction processing applications are low speed, the associated channels are narrowband.
8.2.3.2 Baseband Lans
Baseband LANs are digital and single channel in nature, supporting one transmission at a time (see Figure 8.6). The full range of media options are available, including both wired (i.e., coax, UTP, STP, and fiber-optic cable) and wireless (i.e., RF and IR). Distance limitations depend on the medium employed and the specifics of the LAN protocol. Baseband LAN physical topologies include ring, bus, and star.
Baseband LANs are by far the most popular and therefore the most highly standardized. Ethernet, token-passing bus, Token Ring, and FDDI are all baseband in nature. While LANs were developed exclusively for computer-to-computer data communications applications, it fairly recently has become quite possible, if not commonplace, to support voice, video, and even videoconferencing over LANs. The support of such isochronous traffic offers clear advantages in support of workgroup communications and lower equipment and cabling costs through a shared infrastructure. As we discussed in Chapter 3, the new generation of PABX systems are client/server IPBX systems running Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) over switched Ethernet LANs.
8.2.4 Medium Access Control
Medium access control (MAC) describes the process that is employed to control the basis on which devices can access the shared medium. Some level of control is required to ensure, or at least improve, the ability of all devices to access the network within a reasonable period of time, thereby resulting in acceptable access times and response times. It also is important that some method exist to either detect or avoid data collisions, which are caused by multiple transmissions placed on the shared medium simultaneously, and to recover from them.
Medium access control takes place at Layer 1, the Physical Layer, and Layer 2, the Data Link Layer, of the OSI Reference Model. Medium access control is accomplished at the Network Interface Unit (NIU), or Network Interface Card (NIC). A NIU or NIC is at the board level, with the boards typically fitting into an expansion slot of an attached device (e.g., workstation, printer, or server). Alternatively, multiple cards may be contained within a multiport device that supports multiple workstations on a pooled basis. Each NIU/NIC has a unique logical address for purposes of identification, with the address hard coded on a silicon chip at the time of manufacture. Medium access control can be accomplished on either a centralized or decentralized basis and can be characterized as either deterministic or nondeter-ministic in nature.
8.2.4.1 Centralized Control
Centralized control involves a centralized controller that polls devices to determine when access and transmission by each station can occur. Stations can transmit when they are polled or when a station transmission request is acknowledged and granted. This process of polling requires the passing of control packets, which entail overhead and therefore reduce the amount of throughput relative to the raw bandwidth available. Additionally, the failure of the central controller disrupts the entire network; in such an event, the controller is taken offline and a backup controller assumes responsibility. Centrally controlled networks generally employ deterministic access control, whereby for each device the network administrator can establish either the specific point in time at which it is provided access or the maximum interval of time that transpires between access opportunities. The primary advantage of centralized control is that access to the shared network is managed on an orderly (controlled) basis. Access can be provided in consideration of several levels of priority, with the most critical transmissions gaining privileged levels of access. Alternatively, all devices can be of equal priority and therefore can share equally in access privileges. Token Ring and FDDI networks are examples of centralized control.
8.2.4.2 Decentralized Control
Decentralized control is somewhat anarchistic, as each station assumes responsibility for controlling its access to the shared network. Additionally, each station must assume responsibility for detecting and resolving any data collisions that might occur in the quite possible event that its access to and transmission over the shared medium overlaps with that of other devices. Decentralized control networks generally use a nondeterministic, or contentious, MAC mechanism. By way of example, Ethernet control is decentralized.
8.2.4.3 Deterministic Access
Deterministic access is a MAC convention that enables both the centralized master station, which commonly is in the form of a server, and each slaved station to determine the maximum length of time that passes before access is provided to the network. In other words, each station can be guaranteed the right to communicate within a certain time frame. Additionally, the system administrator can assign access priorities. Deterministic access is also known as noncontentious because the devices do not contend for access; rather, access is controlled on a centralized basis.
Deterministic access employs token passing. The token, which consists of a spe-cific bit pattern, indicates the status of the network—available or unavailable. The token is generated by a centralized master control station and transmitted across the network. The station in possession of the token controls the access to the network. That station may either transmit or require other stations to respond. Transmission is in the form of a data packet of a predetermined maximum size, determined by the number of nodes on the ring and the traffic to be supported; oversized transmissions are segmented, or fragmented. After transmitting, the station passes the token to a successor station in a predetermined sequence. While the process is complex and overhead intensive, its high level of control over the network avoids data collisions.
Deterministic access is especially effective in high-traffic environments where a lack of control causes chaos in the form of frequent data collisions. It also finds application in environments such as process control, where it is critical that each station have guaranteed access to the network at precise points in time. Oil refineries, for example, employ deterministic MAC through proprietary token-passing LANs. The refining process requires that the specific nature of the raw material be considered in terms of a number of characteristics, including sulfur content, paraffin content, and viscosity. With those factors in mind, the refining process is tailored to act on the crude oil in such a way as to ensure that the end product (e.g., 92 octane unleaded gasoline) remains consistent from one batch to another. In a hypothetical scenario, the master control station addresses tokens to individual devices in the form of various sensors. The individual sensors monitor pressure and temperature conditions as well as the rate of flow of various chemicals through valves throughout the entire process. In order to control the process effectively, the master controller must address each sensor at precise points in time to gather critical data about the processes. At certain times during the process, some devices may require more frequent access. Under specific circumstances, such as an alarm condition, some devices may require high-priority access. In consideration of the data provided by the sensors, the master controller may command other devices to increase or decrease temperature, open or close valves, and so on. Such a network also is highly redundant so that a network or device failure does not compromise the integrity of the process.
Manufacturing Automation Protocol (MAP) is a good example of a deterministic protocol. Developed by General Motors (GM) in the early 1980s for the interconnection of computers and programmable machine tools in factory or assembly line operations, MAP is based on Token Bus (IEEE 802.4) running at 1, 5, 10, and 20 Mbps. GM developed MAP as a multivendor solution using off-the-shelf parts, including coax cable, taps, connectors, amplifiers, splitters, and terminators. MAP sometimes is referred to as Manufacturing Automation Protocol/Technical and Office Protocol (MAP/TOP). (Note: The 802.4 committee disbanded in 2004 as the Token Bus standard has been in hibernation for some years. Token Bus is yet another casualty of Ethernet.)
CATV providers in a convergence scenario are applying deterministic protocols for Internet access, which is provided to large numbers of residences, businesses, and schools over a two-way coaxial cable system terminating in cable modems at each customer premises. As much as 500+ Mbps is reserved for such applications, with as much as 10 Mbps available to an individual user. In order to manage contention over such a network, which extends over fairly significant distances, a token-passing MAC technique is employed, with the master station positioned in a Cable Modem Termination System (CMTS) physically located at the CATV provider's head end.
General characteristics of token-based networks include a high level of access control, which is centralized. Access delay is measured and ensured, with priority access supported. Throughput is very close to raw bandwidth, as data collisions and therefore retransmissions are avoided. Throughput also improves under load, although absolute overhead is higher than with nondeterministic access techniques. Deterministic access standards include Token-Passing Ring, IBM Token Ring (Figure 8.7), and Token Bus.
Figure 8.7: Token passing, with 4-Mbps Token Ring frame format
Token-based LAN technologies are somewhat overhead intensive, due to the token-passing and management processes. But they can more than compensate for that fact by avoiding data collisions and the retransmissions required to recover from them. Token Ring, for example, comes in 4-and 16-Mbps flavors; in each case, bandwidth utilization is virtually 100 percent under full load [11].
8.2.4.4 Nondeterministic Access
Nondeterministic access, or contentious MAC, places access control responsibilities on the individual stations. Also known as Carrier Sense Multiple Access (CSMA), this approach is most effective in low-traffic environments. There are two variations on the theme: CSMA/CD and CSMA/CA.
CSMA is a decentralized, contentious MAC method used in Ethernet and other bus-oriented LANs. The carrier frequency is sensed by each of multiple stations, or nodes, to determine network availability before accessing the medium to transmit data. Further, each station must monitor the network to determine if a collision has occurred because collisions render the transmission invalid and require a retransmission.
CSMA works much like an old telephone party line, where there are multiple subscribers with individual logical addresses in the form of telephone numbers, all of which are connected to a single physical circuit. When placing an outgoing call, the subscriber must pick up the telephone to monitor the line for a short while to sense the level of activity. If there is no activity, a call can be placed. If there already is a call in progress, another call attempt cannot be made without causing interference (and hard feelings). Rather, the subscriber must hang up the telephone and subsequently monitor the circuit on some basis in order to determine its availability. Incoming calls are addressed to each party on the party line by varying the number of rings, indicating the unique logical address of each party sharing the circuit, and only the target party can answer the call without violating security and thereby creating ill will. In other words, MAC protocols govern the manner in which the circuit is managed to the satisfaction of all parties. As a result, collisions are less likely. Variations on the theme include Nonpersistent CSMA, 1-Persistent CSMA, and P-Persistent CSMA:
· Nonpersistent CSMA allows a machine to transmit data whenever it senses an idle channel. If the channel is busy, the machine backs off the network, calculates a random time interval, and again monitors the channel when that interval expires. This approach mathematically distributes the temporal monitoring of the network, thereby reducing the likelihood that multiple stations will sense its availability at approximately the same time and transmit simultaneously. This is a fairly patient approach to network access.
· 1-Persistent CSMA also allows a machine to transmit data whenever it senses an idle channel. If the channel is in use, the machine will continuously sense it until the channel becomes free. The protocol gets its name because the machine is persistent, that is, tenacious or obstinate, in its monitoring of the channel and transmits with a probability of 1.0, that is, 100 percent certainty of access success, whenever the channel is idle. If the network includes a large number of stations persistently monitoring the network, a great many of them might sense the availability of the network and begin to transmit simultaneously, virtually guaranteeing a collision. In such a scenario, 1-Persistent CSMA can be characterized as eager, if not downright greedy.
· P-Persistent CSMA allows a machine to transmit a frame during an idle time with probability P or lower, based on the length of the idle time as measured by a time slot. A time slot is the maximum packet transmission time for a station at one extreme end of the network to send a packet to a station at the opposite extreme end of the network and is based on the physical length of the cable, the physical size of the frames, and the speed of signal propagation through the wire. If a machine senses an idle condition on the channel, it transmits with probability P for one time slot. The machine then delays for worst-case propagation delay for one packet with probability 1-P. If the channel is busy, the machine listens persistently until the channel becomes idle and starts over. For example, P.01 means that there is a probability of 1 percent that the transmission will be unsuccessful. If P is set very low (e.g.,.01), throughput is nearly 100 percent, but transmission delays will be very long, as the machine will wait a very long time between idle periods. This highly cautious approach introduces useless delays at low loads but certainly improves the rate of successful transmissions at high loads.
CSMA is implemented in two standard means: CSMA/CD and CSMA/CA. In either case, latency and throughput degrade under heavy loads of traffic; for example, a classic Ethernet network running at the theoretical speed of 10 Mbps typically delivers throughput of no more than 4–6 Mbps, and often much less. Note that CSMA is half-duplex (HDX) in nature, and only one transmission can take place at any given time. While it is less costly than Token Ring networking, it also delivers less efficient bandwidth utilization.
8.2.4.4.1 Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection
CSMA/CD is the most common MAC method used in bus networks (Figure 8.8). In an Ethernet environment, for example, the transmitting station sends a data packet in both directions of the bus. The 802.3 Ethernet frame (i.e., packet) takes the following form:
· Preamble: The preamble comprises seven octets in an alternating pattern of 1s and 0s that advise the receiving stations that a frame of data is arriving.
· Start Of Frame (SOF): The SOF delimiter is a single octet that ends with two consecutive 1 bits that serve to synchronize the receiving stations on the rate of transmission.
· Destination and Source Addresses: The destination address and source address fields are the addresses of the target station and the originating station, respectively. Each address comprises each six octets, the first three of which are speci-fied by the IEEE on a vendor-dependent basis and the last three of which are assigned by the vendor. The address is hard coded on the NIC at the time of manufacture. Theoretically, each NIC and therefore each station have a unique address.
· Length: The length field of two octets indicates the number of octets of data in the data field.
· Data: 802.3 Ethernet frames have a lower limit of 64 octets and an upper limit of 1518 octets. In consideration of the fact that 18 octets are consumed with layer 1 and layer 2 processing, the data field, or payload, must comprise 46–1500 octets. In the event that the payload is less than 46 octets, padding bytes are inserted.
· Frame Check Sequence (FCS): The FCS consists of a 32-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) that is appended to the frame trailer for purposes of error control [12].
Figure 8.8: CSMA/CD, with 802.3 frame format
Each transceiver (transmitter/receiver) of each station along the way reads the address in the frame header. If the address matches, the transceiver provides the frame to the target device. If the address does not match, the transceiver forwards the frame to the next transceiver. If any node detects a data collision, that station sends a brief jamming signal over a subcarrier (i.e., lower) frequency of the network to advise all stations of the collision. Then all devices back off the network, with each calculating a random time interval before attempting a retransmission. One of the implications of this approach is that transmission is half-duplex (HDX), for full-duplex (FDX) transmission would yield collisions. CSMA/CD is designed to work with frames of specific minimum and maximum sizes. In the Ethernet environment, for example, note that the frame (packet) size varies in length from 64 to 1518 octets, with the application software driver forming frames of the proper specific size. A VoIP frame, for example, would be of the minimum size of 64 octets, and a file transfer most likely would involve frames of the maximum size of 1518 octets.
Several factors help to determine the maximum packet size. First, and as the Ethernet is shared, it is necessary to fragment a file transfer into smaller subsets of data so one transmission does not speak to the entire level of bandwidth available across the network for a long period of time. Second, the maximum frame size is a trade-off between raw efficiency and throughput. In other words, a stream of unfrag-mented, unframed data is most efficient because it requires little overhead. But a single bit error in a data stream associated with a bulk file transfer might require that the entire file be retransmitted in order to correct for the error. This process might have to repeat an infinite number of times, with the file never making it from transmitter to receiver without error. By fragmenting the file into subsets of data in the form of frames, the level of overhead increases, as each frame requires 18 octets of overhead. An errored bit, however, is confined to a single frame, which easily can be retransmitted without significant likelihood of error and without serious degradation of overall throughput across the LAN.
The minimum packet (frame) size is a direct function of the design of the classic Ethernet and the CSMA/CD control mechanism. In the most extreme case, an Ethernet comprises a number of segments, each of which is up to 500m in length, supports as many as 1024 addresses, involves a great number of transceivers, and connects to one or more other segments through a bridge. The total route length of the classic Ethernet is up to 2.5 km. Given issues of propagation delays across the segments and through the bridges, it takes a certain amount of time for a frame to traverse the network from the originating device to the target device, which is 2.5 km away in the most extreme possible case. If that frame of data encounters a data collision at the distant end just before it reaches the target device, it takes an identical amount of time for a collision notification to be received by the transmitting device across the subcarrier channel. Then a retransmission is used to adjust to that fact. If such notification is not received in time, the originating device assumes that the data were received in good form when that is not at all the case. Therefore, the minimum frame size in classic Ethernet is 64 octets, which includes 46 octets of payload and 18 octets of overhead.
8.2.4.4.2 Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance
CSMA/CA includes a priority scheme to guarantee the transmission privileges of high-priority stations. CSMA/CA requires a delay in network activity after each completed transmission. That delay is proportionate to the priority level of each device, with high-priority nodes programmed for short delays and low-priority nodes programmed for relatively long delays. As collisions still may occur, they are managed either through collision detection or through retransmission after receipt of a Negative AcKnowledgment (NAK). CSMA/CA is more expensive to implement because it requires that additional programmed logic be embedded in each device or NIC. CSMA/CA does, however, offer the advantage of improved access control, which serves to reduce collisions and thereby improve the overall performance of the network. Note that CSMA/CA remains HDX in nature.
Wireless LANs, as standardized in IEEE 802.11, employ CSMA/CA. The 802.11 standard uses a positive ACKnowledgment (ACK) mechanism which requires that the transmitting station first check the medium to determine its availability. The transmitter sends a short Request-To-Send (RTS) packet that contains the source and destination network addresses as well as the duration of the subject transmission. If the shared medium is available, the destination station responds with a Clear-To-Send (CTS) packet. All devices on the network recognize and honor this acknowledged claim to the shared network resources. If the source station does not receive an ACK packet from the destination station, it retransmits RTS packets until access is granted.
8.3 LAN EQUIPMENT
In addition to the attached transmit and receive devices, aka nodes or stations, LANs may make use of other devices to control physical access to the shared medium, extend the maximum reach of the LAN, switch traffic, and so on. Such hardware is in the form of NICs/NIUs, transceivers, MAUs, bridges, hubs, routers, and gateways. As is true of much of the technology addressed in this book, the lines increasingly blur between these devices. Therefore, I focus on the classic definitions, expanding on those concepts and introducing discussion of multifunctional devices as appropriate.
8.3.1 Network Interface Cards
Also known as Network Interface Units (NIUs), Network Interface Cards (NICs) are chipsets on printed circuit boards that provide physical access from the node to the LAN medium. The NIC is responsible for fragmenting the data transmission and formatting the data packets with the necessary header and trailer. A standard IEEE NIC contains a unique, hard-coded logical address, which it includes in the header of each data packet it transmits. The NIC typically has some amount of buffer memory, which enables it to absorb some number of bits transmitted by the associated device, form the packets, and hold them until such time as the network is available. In the context of the OSI Reference Model, NICs function at the lower two layers, the Physical and Data Link layers. The NIC also may contain a microprocessor that can relieve the attached device of some routine computational functions.
The NIC (refer to Figure 8.9) can take a number of forms, including a circuit board that fits into the expansion slot of a desktop PC, a PCMCIA card, or a stand-alone device. A NIC commonly is embedded in a desktop, laptop, tablet, or hand-held computer at the time of assembly. Transceivers (transmitter/receivers) are used in LANs to receive a carrier signal and then transmit it on its way. They are embedded in NICs/NIUs and MAUs. MAUs (Medium Access Units, or Multistation Access Units) are stand-alone devices that contain NICs in support of one or more nodes. MAUs are very unusual in contemporary networking.
Figure 8.9: Ethernet-attached workstation with NIC
8.3.2 Bridges
Bridges are relatively simple devices that connect LANs of the same architecture (e.g., Ethernet to Ethernet). Bridges operate at the lower two layers of the OSI Reference Model, providing Physical Layer and Data Link Layer connectivity. A bridge, at the most basic level, acts simply to extend the physical reach of a LAN, passing traffic from one LAN segment to another based on the destination address of the frame. In other words, bridges act as LAN repeaters where specified distance limitations are exceeded. Bridges have buffers so they can store and forward frames in the event that the destination link is congested with traffic. Two-port bridges, as illustrated in Figure 8.10, are the most common configuration.
Figure 8.10: Bridged LAN network
A key advantage of bridges is their inherent simplicity. As protocol-dependent devices, they do not perform complex processes on the data frames traveling through them; neither do they attempt to evaluate the network as a whole to make end-to-end routing decisions. Rather, bridges simply read the destination address of the incoming frame and forward it along its way to the next link. Bridges can be cascaded, or connected in series, link by link. As bridges are so simple, they are inexpensive and fast. Such bridges can support multiple LANs and LAN segments connected by multiple media. Essentially, multiple ports are provided with interfaces to an appropriate combination of coax, UTP, STP, RF, infrared, and fiber-optic transmission systems. Figure 8.10 also illustrates a pair of four-port bridges interconnected. In contemporary networking, however, a switch generally would be used in such a situation.
It also is possible for a bridge to support multiple LANs of disparate origin. For example, Ethernet-to-Ethernet and Token Ring-to-Token Ring connectivity can be provided [13]. It also is possible to interconnect disparate LANs, such as Ethernet to Token Ring, through the use of an encapsulating bridge. Such a bridge encapsulates the native LAN frame, surrounding it with control information appropriate to the LAN to which the target device is attached (Figure 8.11).
Figure 8.11: Encapsulating bridge, supporting Ethernet to Token Ring
More sophisticated bridges add more functionality, although they are more expensive and slower. Such bridges also can route traffic at a simple level between LANs based on the destination addresses. The system administrator can enter the routing table into program logic or it can be learned by the bridge as it views the originating addresses of traffic passing through it over a period of time [14]. When initialized, self-learning bridges typically broadcast a query to all attached devices. When the devices respond to the query, the bridges associate the originating addresses of the response data frames with the port over which that incoming data were presented. In this fashion, they build address tables on a port-by-port and, by implication, segment-by-segment, basis. Subsequently, the bridges view the destination addresses of transmitted frames, consult the address table, and forward the frames only over the link connected to the proper port. If the frame is intended for a station on the same segment, the bridge simply ignores it, rather than passing it on. Since the frames are not forwarded across other links, such filtering bridges do a great deal—at very low cost—to relieve overall congestion on a segment-by-segment basis. This simple level of LAN segmentation improves overall access and throughput. Over time, the bridges add new addresses to their routing tables and delete old addresses that have not been viewed in some definable period of time that is much like an expiration date. From time to time, the bridges may repeat the broadcast query process in order to rebuild and resynchronize their address tables.
Medium Access Control (MAC) bridges are more sophisticated, still. MAC bridges have the ability to connect disparate LANs (e.g., Ethernet to Token Ring). This is accomplished through the process of encapsulation, or translation, as depicted in Figure 8.10. When operating in this mode, the bridge alters the frame format by encapsulating, or enveloping, the original frame with control data specific to the protocol of the destination LAN supporting the target device. Such an approach might be used to connect an Ethernet LAN to a Token Ring LAN or where two Ethernet LANs are connected via an intermediate FDDI backbone [15].
Specific bridge protocols include Spanning Tree, Source-Routing Protocol, and Source-Routing Transparent:
· Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) bridges, also known as learning bridges, are defined in IEEE 802.1 standards. Spanning tree bridges are self-learning, filtering bridges for use in connecting LANs on a point-to-point basis. The bridge is programmed or teaches itself the addresses of all devices on the network; subsequently, the network tree of the bridge provides only one span (link) for each LAN-to-LAN connection. Some spanning tree bridges also have the capability to provide security by denying access to certain resources based on user and terminal ID. Bridges that support the spanning tree algorithm have the ability to automatically reconfigure themselves for alternate paths if a network segment fails, thereby improving overall reliability [16].
· IBM Source-Routing Protocol (SRP) packets are programmed with specific routes (i.e., lists of bridges), based on considerations such as the physical location of the nodes and the capacity of the links involved. The maximum number of bridges hopped is 13. SRP bridges are most commonly used in Token Ring networks.
· Source-Routing Transparent (SRT) is defined in the IEEE 802.1 standard. It is effectively a combination of STP and SRP. The SRT router can connect LANs by either method, as programmed [2].
8.3.3 Hubs
Hubs reflect the trend toward star and away from bus configurations. Hubs can be either active or passive. Passive hubs act simply as cable-connecting devices, while active hubs also serve as signal repeaters [2]. The first generation of hubs (1984) acted as LAN concentrators and repeaters, with a single internal collapsed backbone bus for connecting like LANs. The second generation accommodated multiple LAN architectures (e.g., Ethernet and Token-Passing Ring) over separate ports, with rudimentary network management and configuration capabilities included as well [15].
A collapsed backbone is a fairly simple concept, and one worth exploring in some detail. LANs traditionally work on the basis of a common electrical bus (i.e., shared cable medium) to which each device or group of devices is directly connected. While this approach works effectively, it requires that the cable be deployed through the entire workplace. The traditional coax medium is expensive to acquire and deploy, as is fiber-optic cable. Additionally, the cable is susceptible to physical damage unless conduits, armoring, or some other means protects it. All of these involve additional cost. Alternatively, the high-speed backbone bus can be collapsed and placed within a hub, with UTP providing the connections between the hub ports and the jacks into which the user plugs various devices such as workstations and printers. Power users can connect to high-speed ports and casual users to low-speed ports. This approach protects the backbone bus and reduces the cost of cabling. Should an individual device (e.g., workstation, NIC, or MAU) create difficulty or should a UTP cable suffer damage, it is a relatively simple matter to disable the associated port and thereby isolate the problem. While the UTP cable is inherently less capable than coax or fiber, equivalent bandwidth can be provided as long as the distances between the devices and the hub are within tolerable limits. This is an accurate description of a 10/100Base-T hub configuration, as illustrated in Figure 8.12. Multiple hubs can be interconnected with various media, depending on bandwidth requirements and distances involved.
Figure 8.12: The 10/100Base-T hubs, interconnected
This collapsed backbone is analogous to the method by which electrical wiring is run in a home or office. One approach is that of running a thick electrical bus cable all through the walls, floors, and ceilings, splicing in outlets as required. The better approach is that of collapsing the bus and placing it in a centralized circuit breaker box, where the connection to the wide area electrical grid is made and common electrical ground is established. Connections to outlets are made through circuit breakers that snap into the common electrical bus, with some circuit breakers being for power users (e.g., washing machines and dryers) and others for devices drawing less power (e.g., lamps, hair dryers, and food processors). The appliances plug into outlets that are connected to the common electrical bus by relatively thin gauge electrical wiring that is fairly inexpensive and easily installed. In the event that a device causes a problem (e.g., shorts out or draws too much power), it is isolated automatically when the circuit breaker trips.
In the context of the OSI Reference Model, hubs operate at Layer 1, the Physical Layer, with a hint of Layer 2, the Data Link Layer. Since a hub is protocol specific, like a bridge, it works quickly. Actually, a hub is very much like a bridge, except that it provides terminal connectivity on a twisted-pair basis. A hub inherently does nothing internally to control congestion, except for filtering interhub traffic. A 10Base-T hub, for example, runs the Ethernet CSMA/CD protocol over the collapsed backbone bus, and the attached devices do the same through UTP NICs. Hubs do have the effect of controlling congestion, however, because they are positioned as workgroup solutions that serve to confine traffic to the users connected to the hub or group of interconnected hubs, much as filtering bridges serve to confine traffic to a coax segment in a classic Ethernet implementation. In other words, a collision domain can be defined as single hub or group of interconnected stackable hubs.
Intelligent hubs, the third generation, provide multiple buses for multiple LANs of either the same or disparate architectures, in much the same manner as encapsulating bridges, which are illustrated in Figure 8.11. They can support multiple media (e.g., UTP and fiber), multiple speeds (e.g., 10/100 Mbps), and multiple LAN protocols (e.g., Ethernet and Token Ring). (Note: Support for multiple LAN protocols is unusual in contemporary networking, as Ethernet has overwhelmed its competition.) As addressable devices, intelligent hubs can be managed centrally via Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) or another appropriate network management protocol. Intelligent hubs also provide bridging and basic routing capabilities [15].
Regardless of the generation of the hubs, they serve, at minimum, as central points of interconnection for LAN-attached devices. Additionally, they serve as concentrators of LAN traffic and as repeaters, with multiple hubs interconnected through high-speed media [17]. A number of hub manufacturers offer stackable hubs, which offer the advantage of scalability; in other words, the hubs can be physically stacked and interconnected to increase port and traffic capacity [18]. Hubs, like bridges, do a good deal to reduce congestion through LAN segmentation and at very low cost.
8.3.4 Switches
LAN switches are intelligent hubs with basic packet store-and-forward cap abilities that can support multiple simultaneous transmissions. Switches have the ability to read the target addresses of the packets and forward them only and directly to the appropriate port associated with the target device. That device may be directly attached to the switch, may be attached to a lesser workgroup switch, or may be connected to a hub that connects to the switch, as illustrated in Figure 8.13.
The LAN switch architecture can take several forms:
· Shared Bus: A shared bus switch has a single high-speed bus that is shared by all incoming and outgoing ports on a Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) basis. This is a relatively low cost approach commonly used in smaller workgroup-level switches where issues of congestion typically are relatively modest.
· Matrix: A matrix switch contains multiple interconnected high-speed internal buses; a multibus switching matrix can provide full bandwidth to multiple, simultaneous transmissions on a port-to-port, point-to-point basis. For example, one workstation can access another over a connection of 100 Mbps, while another has connection to a database server at a full 100 Mbps and still another is passing a file to a print server at 100 Mbps, assuming that the buses are available and can run at that rate [19]. If there are congestion issues in a matrix switch, it may have the ability to subdivide its capacity, with the buses becoming shared buses through a TDM process.
Figure 8.13: Interconnected LAN switches
Along another dimension, switches may use several methods of operation:
· Cut-Through: A cut-through switch quickly reads the address of the data packet and quickly flows the frame through the switching matrix bit by bit.
· Store and Forward: A store-and-forward switch temporarily buffers, or stores, the frame as it is presented to the incoming switch port, examining the entire frame for errors through a CRC check before forwarding it through the switching matrix to the output port. While cut-through switching is faster and less expensive, it carries with it the risk of the propagation of errored data and the resulting potential for negative impact on overall throughput, as errored frames ultimately must be retransmitted. Therefore, store-and-forward switching generally is preferred over cut-through switching.
· Fragment Free: A third, and less common, method is fragment-free switching, which is similar to cut-through except for the fact that the switch stores the first 64 octets of the frame before forwarding it. As most errors occur at the beginning of a frame, this approach eliminates the possibility that runt frames, that is, truncated frames, will be transmitted [20]. Note: Recall that the minimum size of an Ethernet frame is 64 octets. The small frame size is used for VoIP over switched Ethernet.
In order to accomplish these minor miracles, the switch may store the native data packet in buffer memory at the incoming port, examine it for errors, and fragment it into smaller subsets of data. The switch then flows the packet fragments over a path set up across one of the shared buses, directing it only to the designated output port of the switch. At the outgoing port, the switch gathers the data fragments in buffer memory and reconstitutes the packet. For example and depending on the manufacturer, a Token Ring switch may fragment frames of up to 18,000 octets into units of 28, 64, or 4096 octets. The trade-off in size of the data fragment is that of performance, with smaller fragments enabling more users to share the bus at any given time and larger fragments improving switching speed because the switch must analyze and act on fewer packet headers.
Switches operate at the Physical and Data Link Layers of the OSI Reference Model—Layers 1 and 2, respectively. Switches read the destination addresses of the packets, filtering and forwarding as appropriate, based on MAC addresses (Layer 2). Switch logic is relatively simple and is in the form of firmware at the chip level. Therefore, switches are fast and relatively inexpensive. Some switches make routing decisions based on IP addresses (Layer 3). Layer 3 switching (admittedly an arguable term) involves a combination of switching and routing. This involves more complex routing decisions that are made in the context of the network as a whole yet not at the level of complexity that characterizes a router.
As illustrated in Figure 8.13, LAN switches may be positioned either at the workgroup level or in the backbone, or core.
· Workgroup Switch: A workgroup switch commonly has multiple 10/100-Mbps ports in support of workstations, perhaps connected through hubs, printers, and servers of various kinds.
· Backbone Switch: A backbone, or core, switch serves to interconnect workgroup switches and often provides access to large servers or server clusters. A core switch typically runs at 1 Gbps or perhaps 10 Gbps.
A switch does a great deal to reduce congestion and in a number of ways. First, a switch can support multiple simultaneous transmissions, whether through a matrix, a shared bus, or a combination. Second, switches serve to segment a network through filtering, as they forward traffic only to the port associated with the link to which the target device is connected. Thereby, that traffic does not contribute to congestion on other links or segments. Third, a switch can be equipped to buffer incoming packets until internal bus resources are available to process them. A switch also can be equipped to buffer outgoing packets until such time as the link to the next switch becomes available. Fourth, a switch can exercise a flow control mechanism, whereby it can advise a device to stop transmitting when its buffers are in danger of overflowing and then advise the device to resume transmission when the pressure on resources has been relieved. Fifth, store-and-forward and fragment-free switches variously eliminate or reduce the number of errored frames. Finally, a switch supports full-duplex transmission, thereby reducing or eliminating data collisions associated with CSMA in an Ethernet environment, assuming that the station is directly connected to the switch rather than through a hub. This approach is the current best practice.
The cost of switches has dropped dramatically in recent years to the point that they often compete effectively against hubs. But switch costs are sensitive to factors such as the type and speed of the transmission media interfaces, the number and speed of the ports, the number and size of the buffers, the number and speed of the internal buses, the complexity of the internal switching matrix, and the complexity of the switching or routing logic.
8.3.5 Routers
Routers are highly intelligent devices that can support connectivity between both like and disparate LANs and can provide access to various WANs, such as Frame Relay, I P, and ISDN, as illustrated in Figure 8.14. Router interfaces to ATM also are possible, although other approaches such as LAN Emulation (LANE) and MultiProtocol over ATM (MPOA) also may be employed, as is discussed in Chapter 10. Routers are protocol sensitive at the upper layers; they typically support multiple lower layer protocols and large and varying packet sizes such as might be involved in supporting both Ethernet and Token Ring. Routers typically operate at the bottom three layers of the OSI model using the Physical Layer, Link Layer, and Network Layer to provide connectivity, addressing, and switching [17]. Routers also have the capability to operate at all seven layers of the OSI Reference Model, if so equipped.
Figure 8.14: High-speed LAN with an edge router for WAN access
In addition to supporting filtering and encapsulation, routers route traffic based on a high level of intelligence that enables them to consider the network as a whole. This is in stark contrast to bridges, hubs, and switches, which view the network simply on a link-by-link basis. (Note: Layer 3 switches cross the line into the routing domain, although at a relatively simple level.) Routing considerations might include destination address, payload type, packet priority level, least-cost route, minimum route delay, minimum route distance, and route congestion level. Routers also are self-learning, as they can communicate their existence to other devices and can learn of the existence of new routers, nodes, and LAN segments. Routers constantly monitor the condition of the network as a whole, thereby dynamically adapting to changes in the condition of the network from edge to edge. Routers are multiport devices with high-speed ports running at rates up to 155 Mbps or more and with high-speed internal buses that can be on the order of 1 Gbps in the aggregate. Additionally, routers typically provide some level of redundancy so they are less suscep-tible to catastrophic failure [15].
Routers are unique in their ability to route data based on programmable network policy. Policy-based routers can provide various levels of service based on factors such as the identification of the user, the terminal, and the type of payload. From one edge of the enterprise network to the other, an edge router can select the most appropriate path through the various switches or routers positioned in the core. An important part of this process often is that of dividing the enterprise network into multiple subnets. Users associated with a subnet may be afforded access to only a limited subset of network resources in the form of sites, links, hosts, files, databases, and applications. In addition to being limited in terms of access to such a resource, users of another subnet may be prevented from receiving data from it. In effect, even the very existence of those resources is masked from view. Creation of such isolated subnets may serve for reasons of security or simply as a means of avoiding unnecessary congestion.
Routers commonly are capable of alternate routing and inverse multiplexing. As noted by Charles Darling [14], what dedicated WAN links lack in cost efficiency they make up for in lack of reliability (e.g., backhoe fade). Routers are available that sense a network failure and reestablish the connection via an alternate means, which may include a totally different network and service. While a backup ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) link may be painfully slow compared with a T1 connection, for example, Darling suggests that slow is better than stop, and I suspect that most would agree. Additionally, some routers offer inverse multiplexing capabilities over ISDN and T-carrier facilities.
Router protocols include interrouter protocols, serial line protocols, and protocol stack routing and bridging:
· Interrouter protocols are router-to-router protocols that can operate over heterogeneous networks. These protocols pass routing information and keep-alive packets during periods of idleness. Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is an example of in interrouter protocol. The Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) specified RIPv1 in RFC 1058, RIPv2 in RFC 2453, and RFCng for IPv6 in RFC 2080. The IETF specified Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) in RFC 1131 (1989), and there have been multiple revisions since.
· Serial line protocols provide for communications over serial or dial-up links connecting unlike routers. Examples include High-level Data Link Control [HDLC, ISO 3309], Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP, RFC 1055), and Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP, RFCs 1548, 1661, and 1662). Chapter 12, which deals with the Internet, provides more discussion of these specific protocols.
· Protocol stack routing and bridging protocols advise the router as to which packets should be routed and which should be bridged. Bridging protocols include Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), as defined in IEEE 802.1d.
8.3.6 Gateways
Gateways can perform all of the functions of bridges and routers as well as accomplish protocol conversion at all seven layers of the OSI Reference Model. Generally consisting of software residing in a host computer equivalent in processing power to a midrange or mainframe, gateway technology is expensive but highly functional.
Protocol conversion, rather than encapsulation, can serve to fully convert from Ethernet to Token Ring to FDDI or any other standard or proprietary protocol. Additionally, protocol conversion can address higher layers of the OSI model, perhaps through Layer 7, the Application Layer. As the process of protocol conversion is complex, gateways tend to operate rather slowly as compared to bridges and routers. As a result, they impose additional latency on packet traffic and may create bottlenecks of congestion during periods of peak usage. In a large and complex enterprise network, routers tend to be positioned at the edges of the network where they can be used to full advantage. Therefore, they make complex and time-consuming decisions and invoke complex and time-consuming processes only where required. Switches tend to be positioned within the core of the network because they can operate with greater speed, perhaps based on the instructions of the routers.
8.4 LAN OPERATING SYSTEMS
A LAN Operating System (OS), or Network Operating System (NOS), is software that provides the network with multiuser, multitasking capabilities across the network. The OS facilitates communications and resource sharing, thereby providing the basic framework for the operation of the LAN. The OS consists of modules that are distributed throughout the LAN environment; some NOS modules reside in the servers and other modules reside in the clients.
I want to digress for just a moment. The client/server model originated with the development of the U.S. Department of Defense ARPANET in the 1960s. As the cost and size of computer systems decreased and as the capabilities of those systems and the networks increased, the embodiment of client/server changed. A contemporary client is an application that generally resides on a microcomputer. Example applications include word processing, spreadsheet, and database software. The client runs against a server, which is a multiport computer containing large amounts of memory and enabling multiple clients to share its resources while performing certain functions independently. Servers are database engines capable of processing client requests for information and managing the resident data. For example, client/server continues to be used extensively in the Internet. When accessing America Online, Prodigy, CompuServe, or another service provider, you make use of a Graphical User Interface (GUI) and browser software that resides on the PC. When initiating an Internet session, that software runs against software installed in the service provider's communications server. Through this approach, the two devices communicate effectively without requiring that the software be downloaded from the server as a part of every Internet session, which, because the graphic files are huge, would cost a great deal of time, and bandwidth would be wasted. Once connected to the communications server, you subsequently can access a large number of database servers on a point-and-click basis, courtesy of the GUI, and with only the target data being transmitted across the Internet.
In addition to supporting multitasking and multiuser access, LAN operating systems provide for recognition of users based on passwords, user IDs, and terminal IDs. On the basis of such information, an OS can manage security by monitoring access privileges. Additionally, LAN OSs provide multiprotocol routing as well as directory services and message services. DOS-based LAN OSs include Microsoft's Windows NT Server, Windows 2000 Server, and Windows Server 2003. Other LAN OSs include Hewlett-Packard HP-UX, Linux, Novell Netware and Open Enterprise Server, and Sun Microsystems Solaris.
8.5 VIRTUAL LANs
Virtual LANs (VLANs) are software-defined LANs that group users by logical addresses into a virtual, rather than physical, LAN through a switch or router (refer to Figure 8.15). The LAN switch can support many VLANs, which operate as subnets [21]. Users within a VLAN traditionally are grouped by physical ports on switches and routers, TCP port address, MAC address, or IP address. Each node is attached to the switch port via a dedicated circuit. A variation on the theme is a policy-based VLAN, which can base VLAN membership on such factors as protocol, location, user name, and workstation address [22]. Users also can be assigned to more than one VLAN, should their responsibilities cross workgroup domains.
Figure 8.15: VLAN configuration across three physical LANs
The LAN switches can be networked, thereby extending the reach of the VLAN. The networking is generally provided through FDDI, 100Base-T, or GbE over optical fiber links. VLANs also can be extended across the WAN through access routers and various services such as dedicated leased lines, Frame Relay, and ATM.
The advantages of switched VLANs include the fact that bridge and router networks can be flattened and simplified, including the elimination of source-routing and bridge hop restrictions. Intelligent segmentation and microsegmentation can serve to reduce congestion, thereby yielding increased accessibility, increased throughput, and shortened response times. Workstations can be provided with full bandwidth at each port, assuming that they connect to nonblocking switches. Particularly in the case of Layer 3 (e.g., IP-based) VLANs, physical move, add, and change (MAC) activity is reduced, as many of these activities can be resolved through software changes [23, 24]. As the estimated cost of a move, add, or change varies from $ 300 to $ 1000, this approach can offer significant savings in a highly dynamic environment. Additionally, security is much improved through the association in software of users and terminals with subnetworks and hosts. A measure of security also is provided through software firewalls within the confines of each domain [25, 26]. On the downside, VLANs are not easily implemented or managed. It takes a good deal of effort to develop the switch database and identify the various logical subnets.
8.6 REMOTE LAN ACCESS
Remote LAN access is the ability to access a LAN from a remote location. The need for remote LAN access is increasing worldwide, especially in the United States and Western Europe. Telecommuting and telework now are growing at a fast pace. Various market research firms suggested that 4 million to 9 million employees worked at least 8h per week from home in 1992. In 1998, an estimated 20 million people worked from home, and an additional 9 million worked at home after normal business hours [27]. Telecommuting estimates now range as high as 40 million in the United States and 16 million in the European Union.
The concept of remote LAN access is one of providing access from remote locations to one or more host computers, which typically are LAN attached. In support of telecommuters, contractors, remote offices, and the Small Office/Home Office (SOHO), remote LAN access often is essential to the operation of the enterprise. Additionally, remote access often is provided to customers, suppliers, trading partners, and so on. The yield is that remote users are provided access to resources with the same level of privilege as though they were on-site [17]. Key components to be examined are the network, the equipment, and the applications supported. Other issues include security management and network management.
The network is clearly a developing enabler. The network can assume a variety of forms, depending on issues such as availability, cost, and bandwidth (as illustrated in Figure 8.16). Network options literally run the full range of conventional data networks, including modem-based communications over the analog PSTN, ISDN, and IP-based Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) over ADSL and cable modems. Public Wi-Fi hotspots are now widely available and are often used by traveling employees for access to corporate networks through the Internet. Finally, and in order to support truly mobile remote LAN access, cellular radio data networks often are employed [28, 29].
Figure 8.16: Remote LAN access from wireline and wireless networks through an access router with firewall
Equipment required varies according to the nature of the network employed. Improvements in equipment, as well as improvements in network technologies, have enabled cost-effective, remote LAN access. That equipment can include high-performance workstations and high-speed modems for access to the PSTN. ISDN requires Terminal Adapters (TAs), and Frame Relay requires Frame Relay Access Devices (FRADs). Access via a cellular network or a public Wi-Fi hotspot requires the use of appropriate wireless modems. Clearly, the LAN side of the connection requires the installation of modem pools, routers, and various other devices in order to support remote user access. In order to protect internal resources from unauthorized access, security mechanisms must be employed, including intrusion detection devices, firewalls, and VPN (i.e., authentication and encryption) software.
Applications most often supported include e-mail, file transfer, and database access. Additional applications include scheduling, printing, access to online services, client support, and Internet access. The applications and advantages of remote LAN access are clear even to those of us in Mt. Vernon, Washington. Margaret Horak, my lovely bride, is the sole proprietor of The Evergreen Group, an independent consultancy. Among her clients she counts several major banks, Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), and one of largest software companies in the world. For those clients she provides a number of services, including developing and maintaining websites and developing professional development curriculum, some of which is Web based. She performs virtually all of her work from right here in Mt. Vernon through remote access to her clients' LANs located on their premises around the country. In one case, her remote access is on the basis of V.90 modem dial-up through the PSTN using an 800 number. That one is really slow because she is downloading multi-megabyte files at 53.3 kbps or less and uploading them at 33.6 kbps or less. In another case, she works a lot faster through the client's VPN, which she accesses over the Internet through our shared ADSL circuit at speeds up to 1.536 Mbps on the download and up to 384 kbps on the upload. Margaret regu-larly puts virtual project teams together to develop course material. Such a project team typically includes one or more Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) and Instructional Designers (IDs), all of whom are teleworkers. The last several projects included SMEs in Argentina, Australia, Colombia, Norway, Spain, New Zealand, and the United States. Although Internet availability varies widely across these countries, some level of high-speed access generally is available to knowledge workers. Still, it was necessary to send multi-gigabyte program files by courier, as their sheer size made Internet distribution impossible.
8.7 LAN STANDARDS AND STANDARDS BODIES
Standards developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) largely have governed the world of LANs since the formation of Project 802 in February 1980. Project 802, working within the scope of the OSI Reference Model, was chartered to deal with the two lower layers. Notably Layer 2, the Data Link Layer, was divided into two subgroups: Medium Access Control (MAC) and Logical Link Control (LLC) [2]. The initial development was based on Ethernet, the embellished version of which was finalized in December 1982 as 802.3, which is commonly referred to as Ethernet. The IEEE membership, the U.S. National Bureau of Standards, and the European Computer Manufacturers Association (ECMA) accepted that first release of three standards. The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) issued correlating international standards—known as 8802 LAN standards. Since then, the IEEE has continued to develop a broad range of LAN and MAN standards. IEEE standards include the following:
· 802.1: Architecture and internetworking (high-level interface). Defines architecture layers and rules for interconnection of disparate LAN protocols. Includes data formatting, network management, and internetworking.
· 802.2: Defines equivalent LLC services, including protocol for data transfer. Largely addresses bridges.
· 802.3: Defines CSMA/CD Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications. Commonly referred to as the Ethernet standard.
· 802.4: Token Bus Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications.
· 802.5: Token-Passing Ring Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications. Includes Token Ring.
· 802.6: Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications. Distributed Queue Dual Bus (DQDB) is defined. Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS), discussed in Chapter 10 , was derived from 802.6. This standard has been withdrawn.
· 802.7: Broadband Technical Advisory Group. Standards for definition of a broadband cable plant design. Established guidelines for LAN construction within a physical facility such as a building. This standard has been withdrawn.
· 802.8: Fiber Optic Technical Advisory Group. Established to assess impact of fiber optics and to recommend standards. Note that this standard is distinct from that of ANSI's FDDI.
· 802.9: Integrated Services LAN (ISLAN). Designed for the integration of voice and data networks, both within the LAN domain and interfacing to publicly and privately administered networks running protocols such as FDDI and ISDN.
· 802.10: Standards for Interoperable LAN/MAN Security (SILS). This standard was withdrawn in 2004, and the working group is currently inactive. Security for wireless networks is being addressed in 802.11i. VLAN security is addressed in 802.11q.
· 802.11: Wireless Local Area Networks (WLANs). This is a family of standards describing the over-the-air interfaces for a number of RF-based WLANs.
· 802.12: 100+ Mbps LANs using demand priority access. The focus was on 100VG-AnyLAN, which standard is considered obsolete.
In addition to the IEEE, other standards bodies are involved in the establishment and promotion of certain LAN and computer networking standards. ANSI (American National Standards Institute), for example, developed the following standards:
· X3T9-3: HIgh Performance Parallel Interface (HIPPI)
· X3T9-5: Fiber-Distributed Data Interface (FDDI)
Table 8.3 compares Ethernet, Token Ring, and FDDI across a number of critical dimensions.
|
Table 8.3: Dimensions of Popular LAN Standards Open table as spreadsheet |
|||
|
Dimension\Standard |
Ethernet |
IBM Token Ring |
Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) |
|
Standard |
IEEE 802.3 |
IEEE 802.5 |
ANSI X3T9-5 |
|
Logical topology |
Bus |
Ring |
Ring |
|
Physical topology |
Bus, Star |
Ring, Star |
Dual ring, Dual bus |
|
Media |
Coax, UTP, STP |
Coax, UTP, STP |
Fiber |
|
Transmission mode |
Baseband |
Baseband |
Baseband |
|
Bandwidth |
10/100 Mbps, 1/10 Gbps |
4,16, 20 Mbps |
100 Mbps |
|
Medium Access Control |
Nondeterministic: CSMA/CD, CSMA/CA |
Deterministic: Token passing |
Deterministic: Token passing |
|
Payload size |
46-1500 bytes |
Up to 36,000 bytes |
|
|
Traffic type |
Data |
Data |
Data, video, voice |
|
[a]These are conventional implementation maximums. According to the IEEE 802.5 specification, however, "although there is no maximum length specified for the information field, the time required to transmit a frame may be no greater than the token holding period that has been established for the station." |
8.8 LIFE IN THE FAST LAN: THE NEED FOR SPEED
Beginning in the early 1990s, traditional LANs have been pushed to their limits as end-user organizations connect more workstations and users become more active, resulting in more LAN traffic. Increased use of graphics and other more bandwidth-intensive applications developed, adding further to the strain. Collaborative computing increases the demands on existing LAN technologies, especially as voice and videoconferencing are employed to enhance the collaborative experience. Users also have become increasingly impatient, demanding faster response times. In general, LAN users mirror the times in which we live—more is better, bigger is better, and faster is better still. Bandwidth of 10 Mbps and even 16 Mbps just does not do the trick any longer! In response to this requirement, fast LANs began to develop offering bandwidth of 100 Mbps and now an incredible 10 Gbps. Along the evolutionary path, there were some dead ends, as there always are. Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) proved too expensive and complex in the LAN domain. High-Speed Token Ring (HSTR) failed to gain any traction, as Ethernet overwhelmed it in terms of speed and undercut it in terms of cost. Despite its ability to support virtually any LAN standard, 100VG-AnyLAN had no market, as Ethernet became the only LAN standard with any following. Isochronous Ethernet (IsoEther-net) added an aggregate 6 Mbps in ISDN B channels for voice and video but quickly became irrelevant when switched Ethernet appeared at 100 Mbps. Fast LAN options currently include 100Base-T (fast Ethernet), FDDI, GbE and 10GbE.
8.8.1 100Base-T, or Fast Ethernet
A variation of 10Base-T and standardized as IEEE 802.3u (June 14, 1995), 100BaseT is a high-speed LAN standard using the CSMA/CD MAC mechanism and operating at 100 Mbps through an Ethernet switching hub. Contemporary 100Base-T hubs and switches can support port speeds of both 10 and 100 Mbps. Acceptable media for 100-Mbps Ethernet include both twisted pair and fiber, as listed in Table 8.1. The predominant version of the standard is 100Base-TX, which calls for two pairs of Cat 5 (or Cat 5e) wiring. 100Base-TX calls for the NICs in the servers, switches, hubs, and workstations to adjust to the capabilities of the medium, much as an analog modem might do. While the obvious choice is 100 Mbps, the devices will fall back to 10 Mbps if the medium will not support the higher speed. The 100Base-T4 standard, now considered obsolete, supports 100 Mbps over four pairs of Cat 3 UTP, with three pairs used for transmission and the fourth pair for signaling and control (CSMA/CD) in half-duplex (HDX) mode [30]. The 100-Mbps media also include fiber for distances up to 32 miles, or 50 km, without repeaters. Remember, however, that Ethernet is collision prone; therefore, 100 Mbps of theoretical bandwidth may yield throughput of only 50 Mbps or so for a hub technology. Switches supporting 100Base-T, however, yield much improved performance through the support of multiple simultaneous transmissions in full-duplex (FDX) mode, yielding a theoretical total bandwidth of 200 Mbps (100 Mbps × 2 = 200 Mbps in FDX), at least from the switch to the attached device [31].
The line-coding technique is sensitive to the medium, of course, but 100Base-TX uses an encoding technique known as 4B/5B, which refers to the fact that every nibble of 4 Bits of data is encoded into 5 Bits of signal. (Note: The term nibble is sometimes used to refer to a four-bit value. The term is a word play on byte, which generally is eight bits. 4B/5B also is used in FDDI and 100Base-FX.) Specified by the ANSI X3T9.5 committee, 4B/5B is sometimes referred to as block encoding, as a block of data bits is mapped into a block of signaling bits. This approach increases the number of bit patterns from 16 (24 = 16) to 32 (25 = 32), which means that every block of five signaling bits can include at least two 1 bits, even if the original data block of four bits contained either zero or one 1 bit. There are several advantages to this approach. First, the five-bit signal block includes enough clocking pulses and signal transitions to synchronize the network. Second, as only 16 of the possible 32 combinations of five signaling bits are used for data (some are used for signaling and control), some level of error detection is realized. If one of the valid bit patterns were to be changed to an invalid bit pattern as a result of an error in transit, that fact could be recognized by the receiving terminal and would trigger an error message. Table 8.4 lists the four-bit data blocks and the five-bit line codes into which they map. There are other five-bit line codes, and combinations of two five-bit line codes, used for command (i.e., control) purposes, such as Start of Stream Delimiter (SSD) and End of Stream Delimiter (ESD). There is a negative side to this approach, as the clock speed and, therefore, the signaling rate of the network must be 125 percent (5/4 = 1.25) of the actual rate. So, the signaling rate must be 125 MHz to support a unipolar code (such as that used with classic 10 Mbps Ethernet) with a signaling rate of 125 Mbps, which in turn supports a data rate of 100 Mbps. However, 100Base-TX uses an intermediate step known as MultiLevel Transition (MLT) before placing the signal on the line. This ternary approach cycles through three signal levels in the pattern +1, 0,-1, 0, which is represented as + V, 0 V,-V, 0 V. If the next data bit is a 1, the MLT-3 output transitions to the next signal state in the pattern, which would be + V. (See Figure 8.17.) If the next bit after that is also a 1, the signal state of the output transitions to the next signal state in the pattern, which would be 0 V. If, however, that next bit is a 0, the output does not transition but remains the same. MLT-3 also adds a scrambling step before placing the signal on the line, all of which support a signaling rate of 125 Mbps while placing the main spectral energy at a frequency of only 31.25 MHz. That low frequency results in improved signal quality and a reduced potential for interference.
|
4-Bit Data Blocks |
5-Bit Line Codes |
|
0000 |
11110 |
|
0001 |
01001 |
|
0010 |
10100 |
|
0011 |
10101 |
|
0100 |
01010 |
|
0101 |
01011 |
|
0110 |
01110 |
|
0111 |
01111 |
|
1000 |
10010 |
|
1001 |
10011 |
|
1010 |
10110 |
|
1011 |
10111 |
|
1100 |
11010 |
|
1101 |
11011 |
|
1110 |
11100 |
|
1111 |
11101 |
Figure 8.17: Multilevel transmission coding
8.8.2 Fiber-Distributed Data Interface
FDDI is the standard (ANSI X3T9-5; IEEE 802.2) for a fiber-optic, Token-Passing Ring LAN. Bandwidth is pegged at 100 Mbps, although several manufacturers offer 200-Mbps, FDX interfaces. (Note: This is the LAN measurement of bandwidth, which adds the bandwidth in each direction.) The excellent performance characteristics of fiber optics, in general, apply well to the LAN world. Error performance is in the range of 10-14 (i.e., one errored bit in every 100 trillion bits transmitted) and devices can be separated by as much as 1.2 miles (2 km) over multimode fiber (MMF) and 37.2 miles (62 km) over single-mode fiber (SMF) [32, 33]. The maximum frame size is 9000 symbols (1 symbol = 4 bytes), which easily accommodates the native frame sizes of all standard LAN networks [34]. The line-encoding technique is 4B/5B, as discussed in connection with 100Base-TX.
FDDI largely is deployed as a campus and sometimes a Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) backbone technology for the interconnection of major computing resources such as hubs, switches, routers, and servers. While FDDI can be extended to the device levels, the cost of optoelectric termination is high. The advantages of FDDI, however, can be extended to the workstation through a concentrator that accomplishes the optoelectric conversion process for multiple attached devices. The connection from the concentrator to the workstations is accomplished via UTP over distances of 100m or less, based on a standard known variously as Copper Distributed Data Interface (CDDI) and Twisted-Pair Distributed Data Interface (TPDDI).
The fragility of the fiber is a deterrent to the application of FDDI as well. The FDDI specifications provide for a dual counterrotating ring, which provides a measure of redundancy. Should the primary ring fail, a Dual Attached Station (DAS) or Dual Attached Concentrator (DAC) can communicate with any other device by transmitting in the opposite direction through the secondary ring, which typically is collocated in the same cable sheath as the primary ring (see Figure 8.18). If there is more than one physical failure in the cable plant, however, the ring segments and the network all fail. There are dual-homing solutions to this dilemma, although they involve considerable additional expense, with the designated stations connected via fiber to multiple servers to provide redundancy [35].
Figure 8.18: FDDI dual counterrotating ring, with frame format
Despite its reliability and throughput characteristics, sales of FDDI hubs and switches peaked at $ 220 million in 1997 [36] and have dropped off to the point that few, if any, analysts currently follow the technology. Not only is FDDI's high cost a detriment, but Ethernet optical fiber backbones currently can be deployed at much higher speeds for the interconnection of hubs, switches, routers, and the like. Further, FDDI is underpowered by current standards, with switched Ethernet running at speeds as high as 10 Gbps. FDDI legacy networks still exist and are sometimes extended but will eventually be replaced by faster, less expensive technologies such as GbE or 10GbE.
8.8.3 Gigabit Ethernet
The standard for Gigabit Ethernet (GbE or GigE) was finalized and formally approved on June 29, 1998, as IEEE 802.3z. Although fully compatible with both 10-and 100-Mbps Ethernet, most equipment has to be upgraded (i.e., replaced) to support the higher transmission level. GbE addresses the bandwidth problem in 10/100 Mbps Ethernet networks, which began to feel the stress of bandwidth-intensive, multimedia-based Internet and intranet applications as well as scientific modeling and data warehousing and data backup.
GbE is available in shared and switched versions (see Figure 8.19), both of which support multiple ports that can run at 1 Gbps in full-duplex (FDX). Shared GbE essentially is a much higher speed version of 10Base-T and 100Base-T. Shared GbE is a high-speed hub that uses CSMA/CD for Medium Access Control over the shared bus. Therefore, you can characterize shared GbE as a brute-force attack on congestion. Switched GbE addresses the congestion problem through buffering incoming Ethernet frames and passing them to the output port when the shared bus becomes available. The shared bus can run at a speed of several Gbps. The more substantial switched GbE products offer nonblocking switching through a crossbar switching matrix, which may run at an aggregate of tens of Gbps [37]. The cost of a GbE switch is greater than that of a GbE hub and is sensitive to such factors as port density, buffer placement and capacity, switch matrix complexity, and throughput.
Figure 8.19: Interconnected GbE, shared and switched
While GbE resembles traditional Ethernet, differences include frame size. As the clock speed of GbE is one or two orders of magnitude greater than its predecessors (10/100 Mbps), issues of round-trip propagation delay affect error detection. To avoid potentially incredible collision rates, the minimum frame size has increased from 64 to 512 octets, which generally is equivalent in duration to transmitting a 64-byte frame at 100 Mbps. This larger minimum frame size provides the same time for the transmitting device to receive a collision notification. Although nonstandard, some manufacturers have increased the maximum frame size from 1518 bytes to a jumbo frame size of 9000 bytes, which improves the frame throughput of a GbE switch. Since each frame requires switch processing of header information, the fewer frames presented to the switch, the more data the switch can process, switch, and deliver in a given period of time. Where multiple GbE switches are networked, jumbo frames may be passed between them. Where the GbE hub or switch inter-faces with lesser, standards-based Ethernet devices, the jumbo frame must be frag-mented to effect compatibility [37–40].
Physical transmission media currently focus on fiber optics, as discussed earlier in this chapter and detailed in Table 8.2. MultiMode Fiber (MMF) supports gigabit transmission at distances up to 550 m, and Single Mode Fiber (SMF) up to 5 km. In either case, there is a minimum distance of 2m because of issues of signal reflection (echo). While UTP, STP, and other electrically based media will support GbE, distances are highly limited. Cat 5 and Cat 5e UTP, for example, can support FDX transmission over distances up to 25 m, with each of four pairs carrying a 125-MHz signal.
GbE generally employs the 8B/10B line coding technique, which maps 8 data bits into a 10-bit symbol, or character. The 8-bit data octet is divided into two groups. The 3 most significant bits, or leftmost bits, are encoded into a 4-bit group (3B/4B). The 5 least significant bits, or rightmost bits, are encoded into a 6-bit group (5B/6B). The two groups are then concatenated, or joined together, and placed on the line. As 8 bits yields 256 possible bit combinations 28 = 256) and 10 bits yields 1024 (210 = 1024) bit combinations, each 8-bit data octet can be phrased two different ways, with one being the bitwise inverse of the other. For example, a data octet of 11001010 might be expressed the first time as 1000100111 and the second time as 0111011000. That encoding scheme yields Direct Current (DC) electrical balance on the line, as the number of 1s and 0s will be equal in the long term. This approach also ensures clock recovery, as there are sufficient 1s in sufficient density to serve as clocking pulses. 8B/10B also provides an additional embedded error control mechanism similar to that discussed in 4B/5B, which is used in 100Base-TX. On the downside, 8B/10B adds 25 percent overhead (10/8 = 1.25) to the serial data stream. Note: The 10B format also provides for a number of control characters. 8B/10B also is used in ESCON and Fibre Channel, both of which are standards used in Storage Area Networks (SANs), and a number of other protocols, both standard and non-standard. (Note: I discuss SANs later in this chapter.)
Clearly, the primary application for GbE in the near future largely will be in the backbone, for interconnecting lesser Ethernet hubs, Ethernet switches, and high-performance servers, rather than connecting individual nodes. However, GbE already is used occasionally in certain bandwidth-intensive desktop applications such as Computer-Aided Design (CAD), and GbE hubs and switches commonly offer port speeds of 10/100/1000 Mbps. Gigabit Ethernet supports HDX and FDX interfaces, with FDX offering the advantage of virtual elimination of issues of data collisions. The HDX and FDX declarations are made on a port-by-port basis.
Notably, GbE is not limited to the LAN domain. A number of service providers now offer GbE as a metropolitan area network service offering intended for multi-site enterprises confined to a metropolitan area. This service involves centrally positioning one or more GbE switches in the MAN and providing the enterprise with access via a variety of technologies. Although fiber optics clearly is the most attractive access technology from a performance standpoint, alternatives include unchannelized T-carrier, Very-high-data-rate Digital Subscriber Line (VDSL), and various wireless options. The real advantage to GbE in the MAN is that all traffic is carried in native Ethernet format, with no requirement for introducing SONET, Frame Relay, ATM, or other Layer 1 or Layer 2 protocols that can increase both complexity and cost.
8.8.4 10-Gigabit Ethernet
As if 1 Gbps is not enough, 10GbE specifications were finalized in 2002 by the IEEE as 802.3ae. As 10GbE uses the same frame format and MAC, it is backward compatible with earlier and slower Ethernets. In addition to the fact that 10GbE runs at 10 times the speed of its fastest predecessor, there are a few other notable differences. 10GbE runs only in FDX mode, which makes collision control unnecessary. The primary line encoding technique used in both GbE and 10GbE is 8B/10B, which carries a 25 percent overhead penalty, forcing the system to run at 125 Gbps. Some 10GbE systems use the more recently developed 64B/66B technique, which is similar but much more efficient, thereby allowing the system to run at close to 10 Gbps. In either case the signaling speeds discourage the use of copper. 802.3ae currently specifies five fiber-optic options, as listed in Table 8.2. The LAN interface specifies MultiMode Fiber (MMF) over distances up to 300m. The WAN interface calls for Single-Mode Fiber (SMF) over distances up to 40 km and is compatible with SONET long-haul equipment. This WAN interface makes it possible to deploy 10GbE in a Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) application, where SONET compatibility will allow enterprises to pass native Ethernet frames as the Layer 2 protocol and with no need for Frame Relay, ATM, or I P. As a result, no reformatting or protocol conversion is required. There also are two options that employ Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing (CWDM), running four parallel wavelengths over MMF at distances up to 300m and over SMF at distances up to 10 km.
Despite the obvious difficulties of running 10GbE over copper, there are several initiatives in this regard. 802.3an is a developing specification for running 10GBase-T over Cat 5e, Cat 6, and Cat 7 at distances up to 100m using a version of PAM-16, a Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) technique employing 16 levels of amplitude. There also is an option for twin-axial cable in the form of 10GBase-CX4, which the IEEE specified as 802.3ak in 2004. This standard runs over bundles of twin-axial cables, with the signal split over four cables in each direction running in simplex mode. The signaling speed over each cable is 3.125 Gbps in support of a data rate of 2.5 Gbps, with the difference due to the use of 8B/10B line coding.
While 10GbE certainly has application in support of very bandwidth intensive LAN applications of very large enterprises, it appears at this point to have application primarily as a MAN technology. That said, we always seem to find a way to consume more and more bandwidth closer and closer to the desktop [41–44]. I discuss GbE and 10GbE in the MAN context in Chapter 10.
8.9 WIRELESS LANs
Wireless LAN technology has enjoyed incredible success during the last few years. Offering the obvious advantage of much reduced wiring costs, WLANs can be deployed to great benefit in a dynamic environment where there is frequent reconfiguration of the workplace. They also offer clear advantages in providing LAN connectivity in temporary quarters, where cabling soon would have to be abandoned. Wireless LANs largely are RF based and employ spread-spectrum technology, which was developed during World War II for use in radio-controlled torpedoes. This approach offers significantly increased security and throughput, as I discuss in detail in Chapter 11.
In a typical RF-based WLAN environment (refer back to Figure 8.1), each workstation is fitted with a radio transceiver (transmitter/receiver) with an omnidirectional antenna. The client transceivers, or network adapters, commonly are in the form of PCMCIA cards, although major computer manufacturers have offered laptops with built-in transceivers since 2002. Hub antennas, or Access Points (APs), are located at central points, ideally where there is good or at least near Line Of Sight (LOS) between the hub and the workstations. If an AP is located in the center of the ceiling, for example, it will be omnidirectional. If an AP is located in the corner of a room, it will be directional in nature The AP traditionally connects to the servers and peripherals via Cat 5e cabled infrastructure, with multiple hub antennas being placed in strategic locations in rooms throughout each building. As good LOS considerably improves link quality, transmission through walls, floors, ceilings, and other dense physical obstructions should be avoided where possible. In order to serve multiple workstations, spread-spectrum radio technology is employed to maximize the effective use of limited bandwidth. A side benefit of spread spectrum is that of increased security.
Although there exist a number of nonstandard wireless LANs, this discussion focuses on standards-based versions from the IEEE 802.11 Working Group, which began its efforts in 1989. Those standards specify Layers 1 (Physical) and 2 (Data Link), as is the case with all LANs. With respect to transmission media, WLANs operate on infrared (IR) as well as radio frequency (RF) media. The RF specifications include both DSSS (Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum) and FHSS (Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum) and the Ethernet CSMA/CA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Avoidance) protocol. This Ethernet Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol involves the establishment of what amounts to a virtual circuit through the positive acknowledgment of the availability of the receiving station through the network. The transmitting station sends a Request-To-Send (RTS) packet over the airwaves. If the target device is available, it responds with a Clear-To-Send (CTS) packet, which prompts the originating device to begin transmission. Other WLAN-attached devices honor this virtual circuit agreement, thereby avoiding issues of congestion, collision, and packet data loss. This MAC-level protocol works well with the CSMA/CD protocol more typically used in conventional wired Ethernets, thereby supporting physical interconnectivity between the wired and WLANs on a logically indistinguishable basis.
Before proceeding, let us pause to briefly examine some media specifics, building on the discussion of transmission media in Chapter 2. Most WLANs operate in the 2.4-and 5-GHz unlicensed ISM (Industrial, Scientific, and Medical) bands. This approach avoids the expensive and lengthy licensing process but carries with it the potential for interference from other such systems in proximity. While the FCC in the United States and other regulatory authorities in other countries initially set aside ISM frequency ranges for unlicensed in-building communications, WLANs running in these ranges are susceptible to interference from other systems such as cordless telephones, microwave ovens, garage door openers, and bar code scanning systems. Spread-spectrum technology generally is used at these frequencies to mitigate issues of interference. As power levels are low, distances generally are limited to 500–800f or so. (It's comforting to know, therefore, that you are unlikely to cause garage doors to pop up and down all over the neighborhood when you're checking your e-mail over your WLAN. Better yet, garage door openers are unlikely to cause your systems to crash.) WLAN frequency ranges include the following:
· The range 902–928MHz is in the original ISM band. At these relatively low frequencies, signals are fairly immune to attenuation caused by dense physical matter such as windows, walls, floors, and ceilings. Those familiar with early cordless phones, analog cellular phones, and pagers, all of which run in this range or in ranges in proximity, are familiar with the advantages of operating in the 900-MHz range.
· The frequency ranges 2.4–2.5GHz and 5.8–5.9GHz also largely are in the ISM band, which they share with some cordless and cellular phones and other devices. WLANs running in the lower band of 2.4–2.5 GHz certainly are more susceptible to attenuation than those at 902–928 MHz, but much less so than those in the higher 5.8–5.9 GHz.
· The spectrum 5.15–5.35GHz and 5.75–5.85GHz was made available in the United States by the FCC in January 1997. These bands, which are part of the Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (U-NII) spectrum, are relatively free of interference and offer the potential for transmission at much higher speeds than those available at the lower frequency ranges [45].
· The bands at 18–19GHz are sometimes employed in a WLAN environment. As the same frequencies are used in commercial microwave systems, there is considerable potential for interference unless spread-spectrum coding is employed. LOS is critical in this band.
· Infrared (IR) light systems currently require no licensing. The potential for interference between systems is very limited as LOS generally is required. IR is seldom employed in contemporary WLANs.
Note that IR generally requires LOS. RF systems generally do not require LOS but certainly benefit from it, particularly at the higher frequencies. Where RF signals must pass through walls, floors, ceilings, and windows, care must be taken with respect to the construction materials used. Metallic foil-backed insulation, for example, can have disastrous effects on the RF signal, as can certain glass windows with UltraViolet (UV) protection afforded by embedded metallic film. In advance of installing a WLAN, it is highly recommended that a site survey be conducted. A number of manufacturers offer highly sophisticated site survey systems that will ensure a satisfactory level of WLAN performance.
8.9.1 IEEE 802.11
The IEEE 802 standards committee formed Working Group 11 to develop a set of specifications for over-the-air (i.e., wireless) LAN/MAN standards. The resulting family of standards, variously referred to in the vernacular as Wi-Fi and Wireless Ethernet, include IR and RF solutions, although there appear to be no practical applications for IR. The RF standards variously fall into the 2.4-and 5-GHz ISM bands and offer raw bandwidth up to 54 Mbps, at least theoretically. The original 802.11 standard, released in 1997, supported data rates theoretically up to 2 Mbps in the 2.4-GHz band. This early standard included a great number of options, which made interoperability of products of disparate origin difficult, or at least uncertain. As a result, 802.11 never gained any real traction in the market. Soon afterward, however, much improved extensions to 802.11 were finalized, and WLANs quickly gained in popularity.
8.9.1.1 IEEE 802.11a (Wi-Fi5)
Dubbed Wi-Fi5 (Wireless Fidelity 5 GHz) by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA), now the Wi-Fi Alliance, 802.11a supports speeds up to 54 Mbps in a 300-MHz allocation in the 5-GHz range, which the FCC allocated in support of U-NII (Unlicensed-National Information Infrastructure). Specifically, 200 MHz is allocated in the band 5.15–5.35 MHz for in-building applications and 100 MHz in the band 5.725–5.825 MHz for outdoor use.
Rather than using spread-spectrum technology, 802.11a uses Coded Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (COFDM) as the signal modulation technique. COFDM sends a stream of data symbols in a massively parallel fashion, with multiple subcarriers (i.e., small slices of spectrum within the designated carrier frequency band). Each carrier channel is 20 MHz wide and is subdivided into 52 subcarrier channels, each of which is approximately 300 kHz wide. Of those subcar-rier channels, 48 are used for data transmission and the remaining 4 for error control purposes. The specified modulation techniques, all of which are explained in Chapter 6, and theoretical data rates include the following:
· BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Keying) at 125 kbps per channel for a total of 6 Mbps (125 kbps × 48 channels = 6 Mbps) and 187.5 kbps for a total of 9 Mbps
· QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) at 250 kbps per channel for a total of 12 Mbps and 375 kbps per channel for a total of 18 Mbps
· 16QAM (16-level Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) at 500 kbps per channel for a total of 24 Mbps and 750 kbps per channel for a total of 36 Mbps
· 64QAM (64-level QAM) at 1 Mbps per channel for a total of 48 Mbps and 1.125 Mbps per channel for a total of 54 Mbps.
The data rates actually are raw theoretical signaling rates. The actual data rates are more on the order of 40–60 percent of the theoretical due to issues including overhead and medium access control. The symbol rate (i.e., the rate of transmission of a symbol, or set of bits) is slowed down enough that each symbol transmission is longer than the delay spread, that is, the variation in timing between receipt of the signals associated with a given symbol, with the delay spread being caused by mul-tipath propagation, which is the phenomenon by which the RF signals carrying a given data symbol arrive at the receiver at slightly different times as a result of their having taken slightly different paths as they bounced off of various physical obstructions.
While the 5-GHz spectrum is relatively clear in the United States, it is not nearly so readily available elsewhere as military and governments use portions of this band overseas. In Japan, only the 5.15–5.25-MHz spectrum is available. In Europe, the 5.725–5.825-MHz spectrum is already allocated for other uses, including HiperLAN, which competes with 802.11a. In any event, the 5-GHz spectrum is highly susceptible to attenuation [46, 47].
8.9.1.2 IEEE 802.11b (Wi-Fi)
802.11b was the first of the 802.11 family to be released. Although the standards development process of 802.11a began first, technical and regulatory difficulties arose and development slowed. WLANs conforming to the IEEE 802.11b specification now are by far the most common, due not only to the early release of the standard but also to the signal propagation characteristics of the 2.4-GHz band. As a side note, 802.11b has been dubbed Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance. The term Wi-Fi also has been attributed to the IEEE 802.11 Working Group, with Wi referring to the fact that a wire traditionally served as the physical medium for LANs and the homonym Fi referring to PHY, the PHYsical layer. So, Wireless PHY became Wi-Fi. Now, let's get back to work.
802.11b includes three transmission options, one IR and two RF. 802.11b uses Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) modulation, which involves the transmission of a bit stream that is modulated with the Barker code chipping sequence. Each bit is encoded into a redundant 11-bit Barker code (e.g., 10110111000), with each resulting data object forming a chip. The chip is put on a carrier frequency in the 2.4-GHz range (2.4–2.483 GHz) and the waveform is modulated using one of several techniques. Systems running at 1 Mbps make use of Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK), while those running at 2 Mbps make use of Quaternary Phase Shift Keying (QPSK). Systems running at 11 Mbps make use of Complementary Code Keying (CCK), which involves 64 unique code sequences and supports 6 bits per code word. The CCK code word is then modulated onto the RF carrier using QPSK, which allows another 2 bits to be encoded for each 6-bit symbol. Therefore, each 6-bit symbol contains 8 bits. While all of this may seem highly inefficient, it has considerable advantages in recovering weak signals in wireless transmission.
The FCC limits power output to 1 watt Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power (EIRP). At this low power level, the physical distance between the transmitting devices becomes an issue, with error performance suffering as the distance increases. Therefore, the devices adapt to longer distances by using a less complex encoding technique and a resulting lower signaling speed, which translates into a lower data rate. A system running at 11 Mbps using CCK and QPSK, for example, might throttle back to 5.5 Mbps by halving the signaling rate as the distances increase beyond 30m or so and error performance drops. As the situation gets worse, it might throttle back to 2 Mbps using only QPSK and 1 Mbps using BPSK. At this lowest rate, link quality generally is acceptable at distances of up to 100m or so. 802.11b divides the available spectrum into 14 channels, each of which has a width of 25 MHz. In the United States, the FCC allows the use of 11 channels. Four channels are available in France, 13 in the rest of Europe, and only 1 in Japan. There also is overlap between adjacent channels as each has a width of 25 MHz and all share a band that is only 83 MHz (2.4–2.483 GHz) wide, which fact further affects performance. In the United States, for example, only 3 of the 11 available channels are nonoverlapping. Therefore, any given system must maintain maximum channel separation and physical separation from other systems in proximity.
8.9.1.2.1 Operational Mode
Wi-Fi can operate in two modes. Ad hoc mode allows devices such as laptops to discover each other and communicate directly, without the involvement of an AP. This approach is certainly convenient for ad hoc communications, such as a spur-of-the-moment file transfer when out of range of an AP. Infrastructure mode requires that an Access Point (AP) be involved to support a connection. This approach is by far the most common, as it is truly a LAN mode of operation. Access points can be either fat or thin:
· Fat Access Point: A fat AP is intended to act independently and contains sufficient program logic and processing power to allow it to enforce policies relating to access and usage. Traditionally, multiple APs are hardwired to a switch that serves to interconnect the APs and to provide access to other internal and external resources.
· Thin Access Point: A thin AP is intended to act under the supervision of a centralized controller that configures, manages, and secures the environment. The centralized controller provides a single point of administration for all APs. This tends to be the preferred approach in contemporary Wi-Fi networks [48–50].
8.9.1.2.2 Mesh Networking
A wireless mesh network is quite simply a wireless network in which the nodes interconnect without wires. Along one dimension, there are full-and partial-mesh networks. A full-mesh network is one in which all nodes interconnect directly with all other nodes. A partial-mesh network is one in which some, but not all, nodes interconnect directly. Along another dimension, there are still two more variations on the theme. A pure mesh is a client mesh, meaning that any and all devices can interconnect with any and all other devices without wires. That approach, which is not highly scalable, is more along the lines of a piconet, which technologies such as Bluetooth address. An infrastructure mesh is a node mesh, meaning that there is no requirement for cabling from the (majority of) APs or wireless routers to a wired port on a switch or for cabling between APs. Rather, the majority of APs interconnect on a peer-to-peer basis through wireless RF links, with only those at the logical edge of the mesh connecting back to the wired LAN domain, as illustrated in Figure 8.20. A mesh configuration requires a considerable level of intelligence, which can be centralized if thin APs are preferred. Alternatively, highly intelligent fat APs can communicate on a peer-to-peer basis to auto-configure the most efficient multihop path for each transmission. The latter approach generally is preferred, as it is more conservative in terms of RF bandwidth, which is always at a premium.
Figure 8.20: WLAN mesh network with overlapping coverage zones and channel separations
A wireless mesh network autodiscovers topology changes as devices are added and moved. The network also establishes and alters traffic-forwarding paths in order to minimize the number of hops and otherwise optimize bandwidth utilization. Through the use of cognitive radio technology, the smart mesh network may also be able to sense sources of potential interference and adjust channel allocations between nodes and their associated coverage areas. Mesh networking also offers considerable redundancy and resiliency, as there are many alternate paths between any two devices. Note that the concept of a full-mesh network implies full coverage. In other words, there must be complete coverage of the area, with carefully placed and closely spaced APs providing overlapping coverage zones, as illustrated in Figure 8.20, in order for the APs to communicate on a peer-to-peer basis. That means that RF channels must be managed carefully, with frequency assignments made in such a way that the same frequency channel is not reused in an adjacent zone, or cell. Power levels must be carefully managed, as well, in order to ensure that the signal from one zone does not inadvertently compete with that of another zone. The IEEE 802.11 Task Group S met in September 2004 to begin developing a standard for interoperable mesh networking. The expectation is that a specification will be released in 2007 [51].
8.9.1.2.3 Power over Ethernet
Speaking of power, all devices comprising a LAN, whether wired or wireless, require electrical power. That includes all clients (even those that can operate on battery power for short periods), all servers, and all APs. If the building was designed with plenty of electrical outlets in just the right places, power is no problem. Since LAN-attached clients now include security cameras, tablet and hand-held computers, and even telephones (more on that later), LAN connectivity and electrical power issues can reach not only into every room, every hallway, and every corner of every building but also into parking garages and outdoor areas. A network designed to provide full coverage at that level can involve considerable costs for electrical wiring, whether it is full-mesh wireless or not. That fact increasingly prompts reexamination of full-mesh Wi-Fi, particularly in consideration of the fact that it can be much less expensive to run Cat 5e LAN cables than to run electrical wiring.
IEEE 802.3af (June 2003) addresses Power over Ethernet (PoE), which specifies the method for providing both data and electrical power to low-power devices over Cat 5, Cat 5e, and Cat 6 cable at distances up to 100 m. More correctly known as the Data Terminal Equipment Power via Media Dependent Interface amendment to 802.3, PoE defines how power is delivered to devices also using 10Base-T, 100Base-T, and 1000Base-T technologies. (Note: Running power and data over the same cable plant is something that has been done in voice telephony since 1876 but is new to the LAN domain.) PoE provides electrical circuits over two separate wire pairs, of course. PoE not only provides an alternative to expensive electrical cabling in hard-to-reach places but also alleviates concerns about power outages if an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) is available. Reliable power is always an issue in the LAN domain, which now extends to security cameras, alarm systems, bar code scanners, smart building controls, and even VoIP telephones, as we discussed in Chapter 3. The 802.3af standard specifies that the Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE), or power injectors, provide output of 48 V DC power over the cable plant to terminal units that provide 12 V DC output to PoE-compliant devices known as Powered Devices (PDs). The 802.3af standard also specifies four different power draw levels of up to 3.84, 6.49, 12.95, and 15.4 W for attached devices. The PSE automatically senses the power requirements of the PDs. The PoE-compliant IP phones typically consume 3–5 W, wireless access points 6–10 W, and security cameras 9–12 W.
PoE operates in several ways. The purest approach involves power supplied directly from an Ethernet switch to a client device. Alternatively, a midspan device can inject power without interfering with the data signal. These midspan devices are particularly cost effective where PoE is conceptually attractive but existing equip-ment does not support it. Note that the midspan device does not extend the reach of the LAN, which remains at 100 m, from switch to client. Note also that the midspan device is passive to the data signal, that is, it neither interferes with nor regenerates it. PoE systems are designed to automatically sense whether or not the attached client device is 802.3af comliant. If the device does not present an authenticated PoE signature, the system will not attempt to power it. Device compatibility issues can be resolved by an intermediate PoE-compliant picker or tap that acts as a splitter, picking off the 48 V DC and making it available to the device at 5, 6, or 12 V DC, for example.
PoE clearly solves a power problem where Cat 5e or Cat 6 is in place and properly installed and over which PoE-compliant endspan or midspan power injectors can connect to compliant client devices. It does, however, also pose a bit of a cabling problem, as it consumes two pairs of what is usually a four-pair cable. Usually Cat 5e cable is run in a four-pair configuration, with two pairs for data and one or two pairs often used for voice. Where PoE is deployed, there is the potential for something of a conflict between voice, data, and power as they all compete for limited pair count. There also can be issues with respect to the total electrical load a PoE system might place on electrical circuits and wiring closet cooling systems in a sce-nario involving large numbers of PDs.
That said, in November 2004, the IEEE formed the 802.3at Working Group to develop the next level, known as PoE Plus, with the goal of increasing power to 30 W or more. The standard will address Cat 5 or better cable and is expected to support 10Base-T, 100Base-T, 1000Base-T, and 10GBase-T. The 802.3at specification is expected in the 2007–2008 time frame [52–61].
8.9.1.2.4 Security
Two security mechanisms are specified in 802.11b. The most basic is the Extended Service Set IDentifier (ESSID, or SSID), which is in the form of an identifier code established by the system administrator for each device set up to gain access through each access point. At the next level is Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), a stream cipher that uses a 40-or 128-bit encryption key to protect data in transit. After WEP was compromised by hackers in 2001, it largely was replaced by Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), based on the more secure Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), which employs a 128-bit block cipher. WPA is included in the 802.11i standard (2004) for Wi-Fi security.
8.9.1.2.5 Public Hotspots
802.11b has become incredibly popular, not only in enterprise, SOHO, and even personal applications but also in public settings. Wi-Fi hotspots increasingly are installed in public venues such as airports and coffee shops and even on airplanes, usually on a pay-per-minute basis. A number of municipalities have installed free Wi-Fi access in downtown areas to encourage people to frequent those areas and patronize local merchants, and a great many more municipalities plan to offer such services in the future. A number of Internet Service Providers (ISPs) quite naturally are battling to keep Wi-Fi from attaining the status of a public utility, but their success has been mixed, to say the least.
8.9.1.3 IEEE 802.11g
The most recent member of the family is 802.11g (June 2003), which runs at a signaling speed of up to 54 Mbps but is backward compatible with 802.11b. Like 802.11b, 802.11g has access to 11 channels in the United States, only 3 of which can be used in a confined area at any given time without overlap. Like 802.11a, 802.11g uses Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) at data rates of 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, and 54 Mbps, with the attainable speed being highly sensitive to distance and LOS. The modulation technique reverts to the 802.11b Complementary Code Keying (CCK) approach at 5.5 and 11 Mbps. At 2 Mbps, it reverts to DSSS and QPSK and at 1 Mbps to DSSS and BPSK, again defaulting to the 802.11a specification. Dual-band components are widely available, so 802.11a-equipped computers communicate easily with 802.11g APs, and vice versa. Note, however, that when an AP supports both 802.11b and 802.11g simultaneously, the performance of both suffers, especially that of 802.11b systems. This is due to the fact that the AP goes into protected mode due to the challenge of supporting two protocols. In any case, roughly one-third of the theoretical bandwidth is consumed by overhead and throughput is likely to be in the range of 50 percent of the signaling rate.
8.9.1.4 IEEE 802.11n
The IEEE formed the 802.11n task group in January 2004 to begin work on the next-generation standards, which are expected to be finalized in late 2006 or early 2007. The focus is on increasing the signaling rate and the data rate to at least 100 Mbps. Achieving that goal can involve several approaches. Additional spectrum just is not available and, if it were, it would be in higher frequency bands, which are less effective due to issues of signal attenuation. More complex modulation techniques would allow more bits to be impressed on each baud, but the nature of radio transmission places practical limits on this approach. So, the focus is on an approach known as Multiple Input, Multiple Output (MIMO), which involves multiple transmit antennas and multiple receive antennas operating on the same frequency. 802.11n will operate in the 2.4-GHz band and will be backward compatible with 802.11b/g. As illustrated in Figure 8.21, the transmitter splits the signal across multiple transmit antennas separated by some amount of space, but operating on the same frequency at the same time, as do the receive antennas. MIMO is a LAN variation on the theme of spatial diversity, which has been used in microwave and other radio systems for many years as a means of improving communications under circumstances in which physical obstructions cause signals to take multiple paths as they bounce off of one obstruction and then another and perhaps another as they make their way from transmitter to receiver in a phenomenon known as multipath propagation. As we discussed with respect to 802.11a, multipath propagation causes delay spread, which is the difference in timing of signal elements caused by the fact that some portions of the signal take longer paths than others from transmitter to receiver and, therefore, arrive at slightly different times. This is all related to distance and the velocity of propagation and is exactly the same set of phenomena as modal dispersion and the resulting pulse dispersion in multi-mode optical fibers. The MIMO solution to this blurring of the signal is to employ spatial diversity in sets of both transmit (output) and receive (input) antennas. The transmit signal is split across two transmit antennas, thereby doubling the effective transmission rate from 54 to 108 Mbps, for example. As the transmit antennas are separated by some amount of space, the signals will take different paths from transmitter to receiver. The likelihood is that some signal elements will be stronger than others and will arrive ahead of others, since they will take less troublesome paths and suffer less attenuation along the way. Sophisticated signal processing software will take advantage of multipath propagation to combine and correlate many signal elements arriving at different times into one linear combination of a stronger, synchronized, intelligible signal derived from each of the two receive antennas. The signal processor in the receiver will combine the results of the two antennas and reconstitute the original data stream. Although multipath signal propagation generally is considered to be a signal impediment, MIMO actually depends on it to work properly [62–65].
Figure 8.21: MIMO and multipath propagation
8.9.1.5 Voice over Wi-Fi
It was only a matter of time until someone came up with the idea of using a Wi-Fi network for voice communications. After all, Private Branch eXchange (PBX) technology has moved to VoIP over switched Ethernet, wireless voice is commonplace through cellular and cordless technology, Wi-Fi tech-nology offers plenty of bandwidth, and Wi-Fi mesh networks are possible through fat clients and high-speed layer 2 switches. It is not quite that simple, of course. Voice over Wi-Fi (VoWi-Fi) presents a number of technical challenges, including handoffs between APs as the user moves from cell to cell, Quality of Service (QoS), and security.
8.9.1.5.1 Quality of Service
The IEEE addressed QoS issues in 802.11e (2005) through a new coordination function that provides a station with high-priority traffic such as voice with more frequent network access than a station with low-priority traffic such as e-mail. Further, the station with the high-priority traffic is granted a longer transmit opportunity, that is, time window, in which to transmit as many frames as possible. In all, 802.11e defines four access priority classes, which the Wi-Fi Alliance terms to be Wi-Fi MultiMedia Extensions (WMMs or WMEs). Those classes are as follows:
· Voice priority, the highest level, is defined in support of low-latency voice.
· Video priority, the second highest level, prioritizes video relative to other data traffic. One 802.11a/b channel can support three-to-four Standard-Definition TV (SDTV) or one High-Definition TV (HDTV) data streams.
· Best effort priority is intended to support traffic from legacy devices and from applications or devices that lack QoS capabilities. Web browsing is an example of best effort traffic.
· Background priority is defined in support of low-priority traffic without strict latency and throughput requirements. Examples cited include file downloads and print jobs.
QoS also requires smooth handoffs in order to avoid lapses in conversation and dropped calls as the user moves between cells. This is more than a matter of making a connection with one AP before dropping the connection with another. It is a matter of security as well. When a client seeks access to a Wi-Fi network, it does so through an AP that, either independently if a fat AP or under the direction of a switch if a thin A P, is responsible for authenticating the identity of the client and either granting access or denying it. This process takes a few seconds, which is not noticeable in a data application but is a huge QoS issue for voice calls. As Wi-Fi cells tend to be quite small at a maximum diameter of 200m or so, these handoffs can be frequent. To mitigate this issue, Wi-Fi switches assume control of large numbers of thin APs, coordinating and controlling their activities much as a Mobile Traffic Switching Office (MTSO) controls a number of dumb cell sites. As long as the user remains within the domain of a single switch, the handoffs can be handled fairly smoothly. If the user moves between switch domains in a large Wi-Fi environment, however, QoS issues develop as the switches struggle to coordinate handoffs. There is an even more complex handoff issue if a user moves from a private VoWi-Fi domain to a public one. The IEEE is addressing these problems through the 802.11r initiative, which it expects to finalize in early 2007. Also, the IEEE 802.21 Task Group is in the early stages of developing specifications to support interoperability and handoff issues between heterogeneous networks, including 802 and non-802 network types. The expectation is that this effort will result in specifications supporting smooth interconnectivity and interoperability between Wi-Fi and cordless telephony and cellular, WiMAX, and other wireless networks. Some dual-mode and even trimode handsets already exist. For example, several ILECs in Africa that also are cellular service providers offer dual-mode phones that support VoWi-Fi and cellular. Since a single service provider owns both the PSTN and cellular networks and both installs and maintains the Wi-Fi LAN, interconnectivity can be achieved more easily than if multiple network operators were involved.
8.9.1.5.2 Configuration Considerations
The physical and logical layout of the Wi-Fi network has a real impact on its ability to support voice. A Wi-Fi network in support of laptop users is relatively simple to configure. As computing on such a platform tends to require a flat and stable surface, one looks for places with tables or at least chairs or benches for users with fairly flat laps. Configuring a network for users of tablet and hand-held computers is more challenging, as they can compute in hallways and other unusual places and while on the move. Not only do the coverage areas expand, but cells must overlap, handoffs must be made, and frequency assignments must be carefully administered so that the same channels are not used in adjacent cells. As 802.11b/g offers only 11 channels in the United States, spectrum management can be quite a challenge, particularly where user density is high and, therefore, APs must be tightly spaced and cell sizes must be small. While one obvious solution is that of reducing the power levels of the APs, VoWi-Fi network configuration issues can be tough to solve.
8.9.1.5.3 VoWi-Fi Futures
VoWi-Fi appears to have a bright future. Its key advantage is that of mobility, as is the case with any wireless voice solution. VoWi-Fi involves no airtime charges, unlike cellular, although the handsets are expensive and a Wi-Fi network configured for voice can be costly. The cost of a VoWi-Fi LAN is estimated at roughly double that of a data-only WLAN, as more access points are required, priority mechanisms must be in place, switches and/or APs must be more intelligent, security must be tightened, and so on. The real future of VoWi-Fi is in dual-mode or trimode handsets that can operate as VoWi-Fi handsets over a wireless IPBX at the office and as cellular phones elsewhere. The handsets must be intelligent enough to seek out the lowest cost alternative and to seamlessly switch between them when the need arises [66–70].
8.9.2 Hiperlan
HiperLAN (High performance radio LAN) is a high-speed LAN standard running in the 5-GHz range. Approved by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) in February 2000, HiperLAN grew out of efforts to develop a wireless version of ATM and a European alternative to 802.11. HiperLAN1 operates at rates up to 20 Mbps and HiperLAN2 at rates up to 54 Mbps. As noted in the discussion of 802.11a, in Europe the 5.725–5.825-MHz spectrum is already allocated for HiperLAN. Therefore, ETSI requires that two additional protocols be used in conjunction with 802.11a in order to protect incumbent applications and systems running over previously allocated shared spectrum. Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) allows the 802.11a system to dynamically shift frequency channels, and Transmission Power Control (TPC) reduces the power level. In combination, these protocols serve to eliminate interference issues with incumbent signals. HiperLAN uses Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) as the signal modulation technique [46].
HiperLAN has a very small following, as it has been overwhelmed by the popularity of the 802.11 family. HiperLAN is unlikely to survive the next few years as the pressure increases with the release of 802.11n.
8.9.3 Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a specification to standardize wireless transmission between a wide variety of devices such as PCs, cordless telephones, headsets, printers, and PDAs. The initial effort (April 1998) was in the form of a consortium of Intel, Microsoft, IBM, Toshiba, Nokia, Ericsson, and Puma Technology and was code named Bluetooth after Harald Blaatand, the tenth-century Danish king who brought warring tribes together and unified Denmark. Bluetooth is intended to create a single digital wireless protocol to address end-user problems arising from the proliferation of various mobile devices that need to keep data synchronized (i.e., consistent from one device to another). Bluetooth is now formalized in IEEE 802.15.1 (2002) as a Wireless Personal Area Network (WPAN) specification. A personal area network is defined by the Personal Operating Space (POS), that is, the space in the near vicinity of a device or individual [71]. Such a confined area clearly is less than that of a LAN, MAN, or WAN. While Bluetooth has limited use in short-range LAN applications, it generally finds application in providing very short range connectivity between personal productivity tools such as between a computer and a mouse, keyboard, and monitor or between a cell phone and a headphone.
In 2006, Exmovere unveiled a Web-based Bluetooth-enabled biosensor wrist-watch designed to provide elderly care assistance. The wearable Exmocare sensor system monitors the elderly person's vital signs, including pulse, heart rate, and motion, and allegedly can assess up to 10 different emotional states, including relaxed, worried, and agitated. The device collects information every 30 min and automatically alerts caregivers of any abnormal status. The wristwatch connects via Bluetooth to an enabled PC, cell phone, or GPS-car kit, which monitors the wearer's location and vehicle speed.
Bluetooth makes use of Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS), with devices employing a pseudorandom hop sequence that makes data collisions highly unlikely. Bluetooth operates in the 2.45-GHz range of the ISM band, hopping through a set of 79 (United States and Europe) or 23 (Spain, France, and Japan) channels spaced 1 MHz apart at a rate of about 1600 hops per second, with each hop lasting 62.5μs. At each hop, the baseband signal is modulated using Gaussian Frequency Shift Keying (GFSK), a technique that smoothes out the signals and limits their spectral width in order to reduce the potential for crosstalk in tightly packed radio channels. Gaussian Phase Shift Keying (GPSK) involves a positive frequency shift to represent a 1 bit and a negative frequency shift to represent a 0 bit. GPSK is not highly efficient, yielding a maximum raw link speed of 1 Mbps; however, its simplicity allows for low-cost device implementations. Depending on the transmitted power, Bluetooth devices can be organized into three classes. Class 1 equipment (maximum 100mW) has a nominal link range of as much as 100m, and Class 3 devices (maximum 1 mW) are limited to about 10m [71].
Bluetooth technology supports both Synchronous Connection–Oriented (SCO) links for packet voice and Asynchronous Connectionless Links (ACLs) for packet data. Bluetooth supports an asynchronous data channel in asymmetric mode of up to 721 kbps in either direction and 57.6 kbps in the reverse direction. Alternatively, the data channel can be supported in symmetric mode of up to 432.6 kbps. As yet another alternative, Bluetooth supports up to three simultaneous synchronous packet voice channels, or a channel that simultaneously supports both asynchronous data and synchronous voice.
Bluetooth supports FDX communications using Time Division Duplex (TDD) as the access technique. Voice coding is accomplished using the Continuously Variable Slope Delta (CVSD) modulation technique. CVSD yields voice compression of 4: 1 (16 kbps) or 8: 1 (8 kbps).
8.9.3.1 Piconets and Scatternets
Bluetooth operates on a point-to-point and a point-to-multipoint basis. As illustrated in Figure 8.22, current standards allow as many as eight devices to be linked together in a piconet, or very small network, with as many as seven devices slaved to a single master. This relationship is ad hoc and short term in nature, with the role of master assumed by the device initiating the dialogue. The standards also provide for the formation of a scatternet comprising overlapping piconets. In such a configuration, a device can serve as master in one piconet and a slave in another or as a slave in both. A device participating in multiple piconets is known as a bridge device and can forward packets from one piconet to another. In a true LAN application, Bluetooth is overshadowed by 802.11b, even though Bluetooth is easier to pronounce [72–74]. (Note: Score one for the technologists in the ongoing battle with the marketers.)
Figure 8.22: Bluetooth piconet and scatternet
8.9.3.2 Packet Format
As mentioned above, each slot in a Bluetooth connection lasts 62.5 μs and corresponds to a single hop from once device to another. The master always transmits in even-numbered slots and the slave in odd-numbered slots, with one packet transmitted per slot. As illustrated in Figure 8.23, the Bluetooth packet takes the following format:
· Access Code: The 72-bit access code is defined by the master and is unique for each piconet. The access code serves to identify incoming packets associated with a given piconet. Devices on the piconet will accept packets with the proper access code and will reject all others. This field also allows synchronization purposes.
· Packet Header: A 54-bit packet header contains the following fields, the total of which equal 16 bits. As the header is repeated three times to ensure that there are no errors in header transmission, the header consumes a total of 54 bits. Bluetooth specifications refer to this redundant error control technique as 1/3 FEC (Forward Error Correction).
· Medium Access Control (MAC) address: 3 bits, with 000 identifying a broadcast packet. Note: As 23 = 8, a piconet is limited to one master and seven slaves.
· Packet type: Four bits indicating the 16 packet types. There are 4 types of control packets and 12 types of data packets. There are 3 types of voice packets, each running at a rate of 64 kbps, including overhead and, in some cases, an FEC mechanism.
· Flow control: One bit.
· Automatic Repeat reQuest (ARQ): One bit. This bit is used to request a repeat packet transmission in the event that there is a detected error in the payload. ARQ is not used in SCO links, as error control would increase latency and retransmissions would create jitter.
· Sequence number: One bit.
· Header Error Correction (HEC): Eight bits.
· Payload: The variable-length packet is limited to 366 bits, although the theoretical limit is 625 bits (62.5 μs × 1 Mbps = 625 bits). The limit of 366 provides the transmitters and receivers with enough time to hop to the next frequency and stabilize. As the access code and packet header consume 126 bits, the payload cannot exceed 240 bits, or 30 octets. There is a provision for multislot packets, which can support a larger payload. The payload includes an error control mechanism in the form of a CRC [71].
Figure 8.23: Bluetooth packet format
8.9.4 ZigBee
ZigBee is a specification from the ZigBee Alliance for a set of high-level communications protocols based on the IEEE 802.15.4 standard for Personal Area Networks (PANs). ZigBee is intended to be simpler, more flexible, and less expensive than either Bluetooth, which also is based on 802.15, or Wi-Fi. ZigBee is designed for connecting devices in ad hoc mesh networks over very short distances with very low power consumption. There are three network topologies possible—star, peer to peer, and mesh. The high levels of redundancy and network resiliency offered by mesh networking make it the preferred approach in consideration of the applications, which include building automation and industrial, medical, and residential monitoring and control. Should a device fail or be removed, the autodiscovery feature of such a mesh network will recognize and register that fact and exercise an alternate path.
ZigBee runs in the ISM band using Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) transmission and collision avoidance. Most devices run in the 2.4-GHz range, which is available worldwide. Some run at 915 MHz (Americas) and 868 MHz (Europe), as those bands offer better signal propagation through walls, floors, windows, and so on. Depending on the frequency band selected, raw data rates are 20 kbps (1 channel at 868 MHz), 40 kbps (10 channels at 915 MHz), and 250 kbps (16 channels at 2.4 GHz). Distances range from 10m to 100+ m, depending on frequency, power output, and environmental characteristics. Security features include access control and encryption based on AES. ZigBee is highly scalable up to 65,536 devices, at least theoretically.
ZigBee is hierarchical in nature, including ZigBee End Devices (ZEDs), which are terminal devices, such as sensors, that can perform only a single monitoring or control function. ZEDs communicate with ZigBee Routers (ZRs), which can serve as ZEDs in addition to functioning as routers to pass messages to other ZRs or to the ZigBee Coordinator (ZC). The ZC initializes the network, coordinates its operation, and is responsible for security.
A ZED comprises a low-cost microprocessor, RAM and ROM memory, a battery, a radio and controller, and the IEEE and ZigBee protocol stacks. The device is small enough to be embedded in a light switch, smoke or carbon dioxide detector, thermostat, security sensor, utility meter, or medical sensor. As battery life is so critical, a ZED goes into sleep mode when not actively performing its functions. Therefore, a battery could last for years if used in a low-duty-cycle application such as meter reading or alarming [75, 76].
The term ZigBee refers to the technique, known as the ZigBee principle, that a domestic honeybee uses to communicate the location of a new food source to other members of the colony. The bee dances in a zigzag pattern that communicates information such as distance and direction, at least according to the ZigBee Alliance [76]. Others suggest that it is just a made-up name chosen at random, since independent research, including my own, fails to confirm that ZigBee has anything to do with honeybees. (That's a shame, because it's a really cool story.)
8.9.5 Software-Defined Radio
The FCC has defined Software-Defined Radio (SDR) as a generation of radio equipment that can be reprogrammed quickly to transmit and receive on any frequency within a wide range of frequencies and using virtually any transmission format and any set of standards. Theoretically, a device such as a WLAN NIC, cellular telephone, or PDA with an SDR chipset could seek out various available frequency bands and native protocols supported by the networks, lock in on the signals, and negotiate access to the desired network, downloading any necessary supplemental software required to effect network compatibility. In the process, SDR-equipped devices would resolve any conflicts between networks sharing a given band (e.g., 802.11b and Bluetooth overlap in the 2.4-GHz ISM band). The FCC began hearings on SDR in March 2000, with the intent that the development of SDR could promote more efficient use of spectrum, expand access to broadband wireless communications, and increase competition among service providers.
8.10 MINDING YOUR Ps AND Qs
The IEEE recently has taken steps to enable Layer 2 switches to support Quality of Service (QoS), which actually is more in the form of Grade of Service (GoS). In September 1998, the IEEE adopted the 802.1p specification. That specification, in conjunction with the previously adopted 802.1q specification for VLAN tagging, paved the way for standards-based multivendor GoS, much as do DiffServ (Differ-entiated Services) and various other protocols in the WAN. The 802.1 specification enables switches and other devices (e.g., bridges and hubs) to prioritize traffic into one of eight classes. Class 7, the highest priority, is reserved for network control data such as Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) and Routing Information Protocol (RIP) table updates. Classes 5 and 6 can be used for voice, video, and other delay-sensitive traffic. Classes 1–4 address streaming data applications through loss-tolerant traffic such as File Transfer Protocol (FTP). Class 0, the default class, is a best effort class. Because Ethernet does not provide a mechanism for priority identification in the frame header, 802.1q is employed. That specification defines a 32-bit tag for such purposes. Desktop systems, servers, routers, or layer 3 switches can set the 802.1q tag [77, 78]. Note that 802.1q increases the maximum Ethernet frame size from 1518 to 1522 bytes, which can overload legacy NICs and switches [79].
Ps and Qs are the mechanisms by which layer 2 switches support voice and video as well as LAN traffic in the converged LAN domain. Within the customer premises, these specifications encourage the development of the convergence scenario via such relatively inexpensive technologies as switched Ethernet.
8.11 IEEE 1394 AND FIREWIRE
The IEEE 1394 specification, known as FireWire in Apple Computer terminology, is for a data transport bus between a host computer and peripherals (e.g., high-density storage devices and high-resolution still and video cameras) and is designed to eliminate the bottleneck at the serial port of the LAN-attached PC. While 100-Mbps LANs address the bottleneck of the shared medium, they can overwhelm the attached workstation (sort of like drinking out of a fire hose). As videoconferencing and multimedia applications increase in popularity, it is necessary to increase the speed of the Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) to support them and take full advantage of the speed provided by the LAN. 1394 addresses that requirement through standards for 100, 200, and 400 Mbps. A single 1394 port can support up to 63 peripherals over a six-conductor cable up to 4.5m in length and as many as 16 cables can be daisy chained to extend the total length to as much as 72 m.
8.12 NONSTANDARD LANs
In addition to standard LANs, there exist a number of nonstandard options. Some are proprietary standards that serve certain applications and vertical markets, such as the oil refining industry described earlier. Others are more widely accepted speci-fications, published by other than a recognized standards body, with ARCnet (Attached Resource Computer net work) being a prime example. Developed in 1977 by Datapoint Corporation, ARCnet is a highly reliable, low-cost token bus system based on a physical star and logical ring and a character-oriented protocol. ARCnet supports data rates up to 2.5 Mbps and as many as 255 attached devices. More recent versions deliver 20 and 100 Mbps, although they have never been in great demand and are not widely available. ARCnet resembles but does not adhere to the IEEE 802.4 specification. RXnet was Novell's implementation of ARCnet.
Manufacturing Automation Protocol (MAP) is another good example of a non-standard LAN protocol. As discussed earlier in this chapter, MAP was developed by General Motors (GM) in the early 1980s for the interconnection of computers and programmable machine tools in factory or assembly line operations.
8.13 BROADBAND OVER POWER LINE
Broadband over Power Line (BPL) is a set of specifications for Power Line Carrier (PLC), a technology that has been used for certain telco local loop applications since 1928. In-house PLC technologies have been used in key telephone and intercom systems since at least the early 1980s, although not particularly successfully. Standards for In-house BPL, a premises networking technology, are a relatively recent development, with HomePlug standards being the most prevalent. Loosely based on Ethernet LAN standards and using a variation of CSMA/CA, In-house BPL allows any device to connect to the LAN directly through the low-voltage electric lines (110 V at 50–60 Hz or 220 V at 50 Hz). HomePlug 1.0 supports up to 16 nodes sharing bandwidth up to a theoretical maximum of 14 Mbps. Some proprietary systems support raw signaling rates up to 85 Mbps, which comes very close to 100Base-T performance.
HomePlug-compatible devices include PCs, routers, bridges, switches, and any other devices that use RF-45 (Ethernet) or USB physical interfaces. The devices plug into a HomePlug adapter that is about the size of a typical low-voltage transformer or power adapter and that plugs into any electrical outlet on the premises. Thereby, every electrical outlet becomes a port into an Ethernet LAN.
HomePlug uses of a version of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) specially tailored for powerline environments. OFDM splits the signal into a stream of data symbols for massively parallel simultaneous transmission over a number of narrowband, low-data-rate subcarrier frequencies. [Note: OFDM is the transmission technique used in 802.11a (aka Wi-Fi5) and 802.11g, 802.16, and WiMAX wireless systems. Also known as Discrete MultiTone (DMT), the technique is used in ADSL service as well.] HomePlug 1.0 specifies 84 equally spaced subcar-riers within each of which several differential modulation techniques are employed. Security is through 56-bit DES.
Attenuation in HomePlug networks is influenced not only by the propagation of the signal through the copper conductors (commonly 12 or 14 gauge) but also by splices and various components such as fuse boxes, surge suppressors, and circuit breakers. HomePlug currently offers a range of as much as 300m without repeaters, which compares favorably with the 100m supported by 10/100BaseT.
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) and Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) present considerable challenges in a HomePlug environment. Sources of EMI include brush motors, switching power supplies, fluorescent lights, and halogen lamps, all of which produce impulse noise that can negatively impact signal integrity over the shared electrical bus. HomePlug deals with these challenges through a combination of Forward Error Correction (FEC) and Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ). As RFI from amateur radio can impact certain frequencies, HomePlug employs spectral density notches around the ham radio frequency bands, thereby reducing the number of OFDM carriers that can be used in the United States. As noise on the powerline can be highly local to the receiver and as the quality of the channel between any two links connecting transmitter and receiver over the common electrical bus can vary considerably, HomePlug 1.0 uses a channel adaptation technique to turn off heavily impaired subcarriers. Tests conducted in 500 or so homes showed that 80 percent of outlet pairs can connect at 5 Mbps or better and 98 percent at 1 Mbps or better, depending on the condition of the inside wire.
The next step in the specification is HomePlug AV, which is intended to support entertainment applications such as HDTV and home theater. HomePlug AV will run in the range of 2–28 MHz, offering a raw signaling speed of up to 200 Mbps through the use of OFDM. Throughput will be more in the range of 100 Mbps, given TCP/IP and other overhead considerations. HomePlug AV will offer inherent Grade of Service (GoS) considerations through the use of IEEE 802.1Q Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) tags for marking high-priority traffic such as VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) and the streaming audio and video components of HDTV. With regard to security, HomePlug AV makes use of the highly secure AES. Note: The IEEE is working on the competing P1901 specification for BPL communications, which will address both Access BPL and In-House BPL [80–85].
8.14 STORAGE AREA NETWORKS
As electronic commerce (e-commerce) has exploded along with the growth of the Web, so has the requirement for storage. Other applications also are increasingly storage intensive, and it has become clear over the last few years that it is absolutely necessary to maintain highly secure database backups. A number of network storage technologies, which can be quite complex, have developed to satisfy this requirement. The simplest approach is that of Network-Attached Storage (NAS), which simply is one or more storage devices (e.g., disk arrays) associated with a server that exists as a node on a LAN. The storage server assumes the responsibility for all data storage and for making the data available to all users on the network who have appropriate access privileges.
A Storage Area Network (SAN) generally is in the form of a subnetwork that is part of a larger LAN. SANs generally use the SCSI protocol for communications between computers and storage servers, although they do not use its Layer 1 (Physical Layer) interface. A SAN is much more complex than a simple NAS, as it involves a high-speed, special-purpose dedicated subnetwork designed to transport data-intensive applications such as inventory management, credit and billing management, receivables management, customer relationship management, and supply chain management. SANs provide application users with much faster access to databases, as they avoid congesting the general-purpose LAN with storage traffic, which often involves very active users engaged in very large file transfers. SANs also provide for centralized management of critical data, including accessibility, security, and backup. SAN protocols include 100Base-T, GbE and 10GbE, ATM, IBM's Enterprise Systems Connectivity (ESCON) and Fibre Connections (FICON), several versions of Fibre Channel (FC), Serial Systems Architecture (SSA), Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI), and Internet Small Computer Systems Interface (iSCSI). The storage technologies include Just a Bunch Of Disks (JBOD), Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks (RAID), a cluster of servers on a network, or a more complex and expensive host storage server such as a mainframe computer. SAN applications include disk mirroring, data backup and restoration, data archival and retrieval, data transfer between storage devices, and data sharing between servers [86–91]. SAN technology has been the focus of a great deal of interest during the past few years, and there is every reason to expect that to continue into the foreseeable future. Knowledge workers seem to have insatiable appetites for information, which increasingly is in multimedia format, and they also want access to that information immediately. SANs are a prime solution. There recently has been a great deal of interest centered on the battle between FC and iSCSI.
8.14.1 Fibre Channel
The InterNational Committee for Information Technology Standards (INCITS) began work on Fibre Channel (FC) in 1988 as a replacement for the HIgh Performance Parallel Interface (HIPPI) technology, a highly distance-limited technology that involved 50-pair cable and huge connectors. ANSI approved the resulting specification in 1994. FC is connected at Layer 1, the Physical Layer, by fibre, a term the Fibre Channel industry coined to refer to a network comprising a close-knit fabric of access including both optical fiber and copper for large data transfers with low overhead, low-latency switching, and minimal interruptions to the flow of data [92]. The physical media and transceivers are the same as those used in LANs and telecommunications networks. The physical medium of choice is optical fiber, which can be MultiMode Fiber (MMF) of either 62.5 km (300 m, maximum distance) or 50 km (500 m, maximum distance) or Single-Mode Fiber (SMF) (50+ km, maximum distance). The recently developed Fibre Channel over IP (FC/IP) technology extends FC to operate through secure tunnels over public IP networks at WAN distances. FC operates at four link speeds (and FDX throughput rates, as measured in bytes per second) as follows: 1 Gbps (200MBps), 2Gbps (400MBps), 4Gbps (800MBps), and 10 Gbps (2400 MBps). The line coding technique is 8B/10B, which now also is used in GbE and 10GbE. FC equipment comprises hubs, switching hubs, switches, and routers. Gateway routers are responsible for protocol conversion to support interconnection to telecom networks such as ATM and SONET as well as SCSI SANs and Ethernet LANs.
The FC protocol stack includes a routing protocol similar to Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) and provides the Transport Layer (Layer 4) for upper layer protocols that contain the applications and user interface, with examples being SCSI, ESCON, and FICON. FC is designed to carry IP traffic as well [93].
8.14.2 Internet Small Computer Systems Interface
The Internet Small Computer Systems Interface (iSCSI, pronounced i-scuzzy) allows SCSI commands and block storage data to travel over Ethernets. An iSCSI Host Bus Adapter (HBA) looks to the computer like any storage device (e.g., internal disk or NAS) and looks to the network like a NIC. As it exits the computer headed toward the storage device, HBA converts the data to a SCSI format enclosed in an IP packet and transmitted over an Ethernet network. An advantage of iSCSI is that it is transparent, as the server software sees what looks to be a SCSI controller and the network sees only IP traffic. The protocols employed at Layers 2, 3, and 4 are Ethernet, I P, and TCP, all of which are well understood and extensively used. Further, iSCSI is intended to run at speeds up to 10 Gbps over 10GbE, at distances that can be very significant through I P, and at lower cost than FC. Critics point to iSCSI's higher overhead rate and processor intensity as issues of significance and points in the favor of Fibre Channel [94–97].